Online Edition For Part No. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

Owner's Handbook
for Vehicle
Contents
A-Z
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

730i Owner's Handbook for Vehicle
730Li Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
740i The better you are acquainted with your car, the easier you will
find it is to handle. We would therefore like to offer you the
740Li
following advice:
750i
Please read the Owner’s Handbook before setting out in your new
750Li BMW. Also use the integrated Owner’s Handbook in your vehicle.
760i It contains important notes on how to operate the car, enabling
760Li you to derive maximum benefit from the technical advantages of
750i xDrive your BMW. It also contains useful information which will help you
to uphold both the car’s operating safety and its full resale value.
750Li xDrive
Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of
730d on-board literature.
730Ld
We wish you a safe and enjoyable journey,
740d
BMW AG

© 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written
permission from BMW AG, Munich.
English III/10, 03 10 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
Overview
For quick access to a particular topic or item, Communication
please consult the detailed alphabetical index, 218 Telephone
see page 312. 228 Office
236 Contacts
About this Owner’s Handbook
239 BMW Services
Controls
6 Notes
246 Extended BMW Online services
Overview 247 Rear telephone
10 Cockpit
Mobility
17 iDrive
Driving hints
264 Refuelling
23 Voice control system
266 Fuel
25 Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the
267 Wheels and tyres
vehicle
271 Engine compartment
Controls 273 Engine oil
30 Opening and closing 275 Maintenance
45 Adjusting 278 Replacing parts
Navigation
58 Carrying children in safety 284 Help in the event of a breakdown
61 Driving 290 General care
72 Displays
84 Lights
Reference
296 Technical data
Communication Entertainment
89 Security
304 Short commands of the voice control
97 Driving stability control systems
system
104 Driving comfort
312 From A to Z
126 Climate
134 Interior equipment
140 Storage compartments
Driving hints
148 Driving precautions
Navigation
158 Navigation
Entertainment
176 Sound
Mobility
178 Radio
183 CD/multimedia
205 Rear entertainment
210 Rear entertainment, Professional
Reference

Notes
Notes
About this Owner’s Your individual vehicle

Handbook You have decided in favour of a vehicle with in‐
The quickest access to a particular topic or item dividual equipment.
is by consulting the alphabetical index. This Owner’s Handbook describes all models
The first chapter is recommended for an initial and equipment specifications which are avail‐
overview of the vehicle. able within this particular model line.
This means it can contain equipment variations
Additional sources of information that you might not have selected.
Should you require any further information, Differences, and thus all options, are marked
please contact your Service Centre, who will be with an asterisk *.
pleased to advise you. If certain equipment and models are not descri‐
Information on BMW, for example on technol‐ bed in this Owner’s Handbook, refer to the Sup‐
ogy, on the Internet: www.bmw.com plementary Owner’s Handbooks provided.
In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the con‐
trols are arranged differently from those shown
Symbols in the illustrations.
Identifies warnings that you must pay atten‐
tion to for the sake of your own safety and the
safety of others, and to help avoid damage to Built-date*
your vehicle. The production date of your vehicle is indicated
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ on the rear side of the bonnet at the front.
tion. The ‘built-date’ is defined as ‘the calendar
* Identifies optional extras or items of equipment month and the calendar year in which the body
specific to a particular market, as well as equip‐ shell and the powertrain subassemblies are con‐
ment and functions not yet available at the time joined and the vehicle is driven or moved from
of printing. the production line’.
“...” Identifies texts on the control display for se‐
lecting functions.
›...‹ Identifies commands for the voice control Status at time of publication
system. The high level of safety and quality of vehicles is
»...« Identifies replies by the voice control sys‐ ensured by continuous enhancement. In rare in‐
tem. stances, your car may therefore differ from the
Refers to measures that can be taken to help information supplied here.
protect the environment.
Symbol for components and Your own safety

assemblies Your vehicle is configured for the operating con‐
Recommends that you study this section of ditions and registration requirements of your
the Owner’s Handbook in conjunction with the country. If the vehicle is to be operated in an‐
relevant component or assembly. other country, your vehicle must be adapted to
any prevailing different operating conditions
6
and permit requirements. Information on possi‐
ble exclusion of warranty or warranty restrictions
Overview
for your vehicle can be obtained from your Serv‐
ice Centre.
Maintenance and repair

The advanced technology behind this car, for
example the use of modern materials and high-
Controls
performance electronics, means that adapted
methods of maintenance and repair are re‐
quired.
Always have the corresponding work performed
either by BMW Service or by a workshop that
Driving hints
operates to BMW specifications and has suit‐
ably trained personnel.
If such work is performed inexpertly, it could re‐

sult in consequential damage and thus consti‐
tute a safety risk.
Parts and accessories
Navigation
BMW recommends using parts and accessory
products that are specifically approved for this
purpose by BMW.
You are recommended to consult BMW Service
for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accesso‐
ries, other BMW-approved products and com‐
petent advice on all related matters.
The safety and compatibility of these products
in conjunction with BMW vehicles have been
checked by BMW.
BMW accepts product liability for them. BMW
cannot accept liability for parts or accessory
products of any kind which it has not approved.
BMW is unable to assess each individual prod‐
uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use
on BMW vehicles without safety risk. Nor can
suitability be assured if an official permit has
been issued for it in a specific country. Tests
performed for such permits cannot always cover
Mobility
all operating conditions for BMW vehicles, and

some of them therefore are insufficient.
Reference
7
8
Overview
This summary of buttons, switches and displays
serves as an initial guide.
In addition, it gives you an insight into the
principles behind the various ways in which
functions can be performed.
9
Cockpit
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel
1 Seat comfort functions* Lane departure warning* 93

Gentleman function* 47
Night vision with person recogni‐
Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem‐ tion* 121
ory* 54
Head-Up Display* 123
Active seat* 47
7 Lights
2 Roller sunblind* for rear window 42 Front fog lights* 87
3 Safety switch for windows and roller sun‐
blind* in the rear 42
Rear fog lights* 87
4 Power windows 41
5 Exterior mirror operation 55
Side lights 84
6 Driver assistance systems*
Lane change warning* 94
Low-beam headlights 84
Forward alert* 110
10
Automatic driving lights con‐ Increase distance* 106
Overview
trol* 85
Daytime driving lights* 85
Reduce distance* 105
Adaptive Headlights* 85
High-beam assistance* 86
10 Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 87
11 Buttons on steering wheel, right
Controls
Entertainment source
8 Steering-column lever, left
Turn indicator 65
Volume control
Driving hints
High-beam headlights, headlight
Voice control* 23
flasher 65
High-beam assistance* 86
Telephone* 218
Parking lights 85
12 Steering-column lever, right
Navigation
Windscreen wipers 66
On-board computer 75
Rain sensor* 67
9 Buttons on steering wheel, left
Set speed 112, 105
Cleaning the windows and head‐
lights* 66
Resume speed 113, 106
13 Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the en‐
Cruise Control on/off, inter‐ gine 61
rupt 112, 104
14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating* 57
16 Steering wheel adjustment 57
17 Opening boot lid* 37

Mobility
18 Unlock bonnet
Reference
11
Instrument cluster
Cockpit
1 Fuel gauge 74 6 Outside temperature 72

2 Speedometer 7 Electronic displays 14
3 Indicator and warning lights 12 8 Kilometres, trip odometer 72
4 Revolution counter 73 9 Clock 77
5 Engine oil temperature 73 10 Reset kilometres 72
Indicator and warning lights Overview: indicator and warning lights
Instrument cluster Symbol Function or system
Turn indicator
Parking brake
Automatic Hold
Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a Front fog lights*

variety of combinations and colours.
When the engine starts or the ignition is
Rear fog light*
switched on, the functionality of some lights is
checked and they illuminate briefly.
12
Symbol Function or system Symbol Function or system
Overview
High-beam headlights Airbag system
High-beam assistance* Steering system
Side lights, low-beam headlights Engine functions
Controls
Active Cruise Control* Brake system
Driving hints
Vehicle recognition, Active Cruise Anti-lock Brake System, ABS
Control*
Cruise Control*
Text messages
Text messages and symbols in the instrument
Lane departure warning* cluster explain the meaning of a Check Control
Navigation
message.
Dynamic Stability Control, DSC Supplementary text messages

Via Check Control, see page 81, you can call
up additional information on the control display,
Dynamic Stability Control, DSC, or including the cause of the fault and any action
Dynamic Traction Control, DTC required.
If the warning is suitably urgent, the text is dis‐
Run-flat indicator
played automatically.
Seat belts
Mobility
Reference
13
Instrument cluster, electronic displays
Cockpit
1 Symbols and messages, for example warn‐ 4 Navigation display* 158

ings 12 Service display 80
2 Range 74 5 Selection list, for example radio 74
3 On-board computer* 75 6 Transmission displays 70
14
Around the centre console
Overview
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
1 Roof lining 16 10 Park Distance Control,
2 Control display 17 PDC* 113
3 Glove box, top/bottom 140 Top View* 119
4 Air outlets 129 Rear-view camera* 115
5 Hazard warning flashers 284 Side View* 118
Central locking system 35 Hill Descent Control HDC* 98
6 Radio 178 11 Driving Dynamic Control 100
CD/multimedia 183
7 Automatic air conditioning 126 Dynamic Stability Control,
DSC 101
8 Controller with buttons 17
9 Parking brake 62 12 Gear selector lever
Auto Hold 64
Mobility
Reference
15
Around the headlining
Cockpit
1 Emergency call* 284 4 Reading lights* 88
2 Glass roof, electric* 43 5 Interior light 87
3 Front passenger airbag indicator

lamp* 91
16
iDrive
Overview
Principle Switching off
iDrive integrates the functions of a large number 1. Press the button.

of switches. These functions can thus be con‐
2. "Switch off control display"
trolled from one central point.
Controls
Operate iDrive while the vehicle is in mo‐
tion
Only make adjustments if the traffic conditions
are appropriate. Otherwise, you may become
distracted and endanger the vehicle occupants
Driving hints
and other road users.◀
Overview of controls
Switch on
Controls Press the controller to switch on.
Navigation
Controller
Selecting menu items and making settings.
1. Turning
1 Control display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to call up menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and make settings.
2. Pressing
Control display
Notes
▷ To clean the control display Care instruc‐
tions must be followed.
Mobility
▷ To avoid risk of damage to the control dis‐

play, please do not place objects in front of
it.
Reference
17
iDrive 3. Tilting in four directions All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting a menu item

Menu items in white can be selected by high‐
lighting them.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on the controller
Press the button Function
MENU Calls up the main menu.
RADIO Calls up the Radio menu.
CD Calls up the CD/multimedia 2. Press the controller.

menu.
NAV Calls up the navigation map Menu items in the Owner’s Handbook
view. In this Owner’s Handbook, the menu items that
are to be selected are shown in quotation marks,
TEL Calls up the Telephone for example "Settings".
menu.
BACK Displays the previous Switching between screens

screen. After a menu item has been selected, for exam‐
ple "Radio", a new screen is displayed. Screens
OPTION Calls up the Options menu.
can lie one on top of the other.
▷ Tilt the controller to the left.
The current screen is closed and the previ‐
Operating principle ous screen is displayed.
Calling up the main menu Pressing the BACK button reopens the pre‐
vious screen. The current screen is not
Press the button.
closed.
▷ Tilt the controller to the right.
A new screen is opened and overlaid.
The main menu is displayed.
18
▷ If applicable, other operating options for the
selected main menu, for example "Save
Overview
station".
Adjusting the settings

1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
Controls
White arrows to the left or right indicate that
other screens can be called up.
View of an opened menu
Driving hints
In general, when a menu is called up, the screen
that was last selected in this menu is displayed.
To display the first screen of the menu:
▷ Tilt the controller repeatedly to the left until
the first screen is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice. Enabling/disabling functions
Navigation
Some menu items are preceded by a checkbox.
Calling up the Options menu
This indicates whether the function is enabled
Press the button. or disabled. Selecting the menu item enables or
disables the function.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Function is enabled.
Function is disabled.
Example: setting the clock

Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is

displayed.
Alternatively, tilt the controller repeatedly to the 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
right until the "Options" menu is displayed. lighted and press the controller.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
Mobility
▷ Screen settings, for example "Split

screen".
Area remains unchanged.
▷ Operating options for the selected main
menu, for example for "Radio".
Reference
19
Symbols in the status field
iDrive 3. If necessary, tilt the controller to the left to
display "Clock/Date". The symbols are combined in the following
4. Turn the controller until "Clock/Date" is groups.
highlighted and press the controller.
Symbols for radio
Symbol Meaning
Traffic Information* switched on.
Symbols for telephone
Symbol Meaning
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highligh‐
ted and press the controller. Incoming or outgoing call*
Missed call*
Reception level of mobile telephone

network* symbol flashes: network
search
No mobile communications network

available*
Bluetooth* switched on.

6. Turn the controller to set the hour and press Roaming* active
the controller.
Text message* received.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. SIM card* check.
SIM card* disabled.

Status information SIM card* not found.
Status field PIN* required.

The following items of information are displayed
in the status field on the top right: Symbols for entertainment
▷ Time
Symbol Meaning
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output on/off. CD/*DVD player
▷ Reception level of mobile telephone net‐ Music collection*

work.
Gracenote® database*
▷ Phone status.
▷ Reception of traffic reports. AUX-IN port
AUX-IN port in the rear left*
20
Symbol Meaning 5. Select the desired menu item.
Overview
AUX-IN port in the rear right*
USB audio interface*
Audio interface for mobile phone*
Other functions
Controls
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions* switched off.
Favourites buttons
Driving hints
Split screen* General
iDrive functions can be saved on the favourites
General buttons and called up directly, for example radio
In the split screen view, additional information stations, navigation destinations, telephone
can be displayed on the right-hand side of the numbers and shortcuts into the menu.
screen, for example information from the on- The settings are saved for the remote control
Navigation
board computer. currently in use.
This information remains visible in the split
screen view even if a switch is made to another Saving a function
menu. 1. Highlight the function using the iDrive.
Switching the split screen view on and 2. Press the desired button for longer
off than two seconds.
1. Press the button.

Performing a function
2. "Split screen" Press the button.
Selecting display The function is carried out immediately.

If you have selected a telephone number, for ex‐
ample, the connection will also be established.
2. "Split screen"
Displaying assignment of buttons
3. Tilt the controller until the split screen is se‐
Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not wear
lected.
gloves or use objects.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
The assignment of the buttons is displayed at
display"
the top edge of the screen.
Mobility
Reference
21
Change between lower and upper case
iDrive
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween the input of lower case or upper case let‐
ters:
Symbol Function
Jog the controller to the top:

switching from lower case to up‐
per case letters.
▷ To display brief information: touch the but‐
ton. Jog the controller to the top:
switching from lower case to up‐
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
per case letters.
button for longer.
Clearing assignment of buttons Entry comparison

1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for Input of names and addresses: the selection is
approximately five seconds. gradually narrowed down and possibly supple‐
mented with every subsequent letter that you
2. "OK"
enter.
Inputs are continuously compared with the data
Entering letters and digits saved in the vehicle.
▷ Only letters that are present in the data are
1. Turn controller and select letters or digits. offered for entry.
2. If applicable, select other letters or digits. ▷ Destination search: placenames can be en‐
3. Select "OK" to confirm the input. tered in the writing of any language available
on the Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: deletes a letter

or digit.
Press and hold down the controller:

deletes all numbers or letters.
Enters a space.
Switching between letters and digits

Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween the input of letters and digits:
Symbol Function
Enter letters.
Enter digits.
22
Voice control system*
Overview
Principle Possible commands
▷ Voice control enables functions to be con‐
Having possible commands read aloud
trolled by voice.
The commands that are possible in each case
▷ The system includes special microphones
depend on the selected menu item on the con‐
Controls
at the outer edge of the headlining.
trol display.
▷ Most of the menu items on the control dis‐
Have possible commands read aloud us‐
play can be called up by means of spoken
ing ›Voice commands‹.
commands. The system supports spoken
input. For instance, if you have selected ›Settings‹, the
Driving hints
commands for the settings will be read out.
▷ ›...‹ Identifies commands for the voice con‐
trol system in the Owner’s Handbook.
Running functions using short
commands
Main menu functions can be performed imme‐
Requirements diately using short commands, irrespective of
On the control display, set the language to be which menu item is selected, for exam‐
Navigation
used by the voice control system to identify the ple ›Vehicle status‹.
commands to be spoken. List of short commands for voice control, see
Setting the language, see page 78. page 304.
Issuing voice commands Example: playing a CD
Activating the voice control system 1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. 2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Issue the command.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The command is shown in the instrument
cluster. The last medium played is played.
Symbol in the instrument cluster indicates
that the voice control system is active. 4. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
If no further spoken commands are possible,
switch to iDrive to continue controlling the func‐ 5. ›C D track ... ‹, for example CD track 4.
tion.
Mobility
Switching off the voice control system Setting the speech dialogue
Press the button on the steering wheel or You can set whether the system uses the stand‐
say ›Cancel‹. ard dialogue or the short variant,
in which the commands and responses of the
system are shortened.
Reference
23
Voice control system On the control display: ▷ Doors, windows and the glass roof should be
kept closed to avoid noise interference.
1. "Settings"
▷ Avoid background noises in the car while
2. "Language/Units"
you are speaking.
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting volume
Turn the volume knob during the voice instruc‐
tions until the desired volume is obtained.
▷ The volume is retained even if you change
the volume of other audio sources.
▷ The volume is saved for the remote control
currently in use.
Information regarding
emergency calls
The voice control system should not be used for
emergency calls. Under stress, the spoken lan‐
guage and voice pitch can change, which could
unnecessarily delay the connection of your call.
Instead, use the emergency call button*, see
page 284, in the area of the interior mirror.
Operating conditions
▷ Commands, digits and letters should be
pronounced fluently, with the usual empha‐
sis, and at a normal volume and speed.
▷ Always speak the commands in the lan‐
guage of the voice control system.
▷ When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
24
Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the
Overview
vehicle
Owner’s Handbook in the Browse back.
vehicle
Controls
The Owner’s Handbook can be displayed on the Browse forward.
control display to match the selected equip‐
ment.
Accessing the Owner’s Handbook Context-sensitive help - Owner’s

Handbook for current function
Driving hints
The following paths are available:
Suitable information can be displayed directly.
▷ Quick reference: "Quick reference"
▷ Key word search: "Owner's Handbook" Calling up with iDrive operation
▷ Via pictures: "Search by pictures" Switch to the Options menu directly from the
application on the control display:
Navigation
2. Turn the controller and select "Vehicle 1. Press the button or tilt the controller
information". repeatedly to the right until the "Options"
3. Press the controller. menu appears.
4. Select "Quick reference", "Search by 2. "Show Owner's Handbook"
pictures" or "Owner's Handbook".
Calling up with display of a Check
Control message
Directly from the Check Control message on the
control display:
"Show Owner's Handbook"
Switching between function and

Owner’s Handbook
You can use the controller to switch from a func‐
tion, for example radio, to the Owner’s
Browsing within the Owner’s Handbook, and then back and forth between the
Handbook two displays:
Page by page with link access

1. Press the button or tilt the controller
Turn the controller until the next or previous repeatedly to the right until the "Options"
Mobility
page is displayed. menu appears.

2. "Show Owner's Handbook"
Page by page without link access
3. Select the desired page in the Owner’s
Browse the pages directly, skipping links.
Handbook.
Highlight the symbol once. Then simply press
Reference
the controller to browse from page to page.
25
Integrated Owner’s Handbook in the vehicle
4. Press the button again to switch back
to the last displayed function.
5. Press the button again to switch back

to the last displayed page of the Owner’s
Handbook.
To switch continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner’s Handbook, repeat steps 4 and 5. As
you do so, new screens are opened.
Favourites buttons
General
The Owner's Handbook can be stored on the
favourites buttons and can be called up directly.
Saving
1. Select "Owner's Handbook" using the
iDrive.
2. Hold down the desired button for

longer than two seconds.
Use
Press the button.
The Owner’s Handbook is displayed
immediately.
26
27
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving hints Controls Overview
28
Controls
This chapter enables you to operate your car with
greater ease, explaining in detail the features
designed to make your journey safer, more
comfortable and more enjoyable.
29
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Remote control/keys Integrated key
Buttons on the remote control
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐

trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
1 Unlocking The integrated key fits the following locks:
2 Locking ▷ Driver’s door
3 Opening the boot lid ▷ Boot lid
4 Switch on headlight courtesy delay feature ▷ Storage compartment in the front centre
armrest.
General ▷ Locking cylinder with manual unlocking of
The delivery specification includes two remote the transmission lockout*.
controls with keys. The storage compartment contains a switch for
Every remote control contains a replaceable locking the boot lid separately, see page 38.
battery.
Different settings are called up in the vehicle and Replacing the battery
implemented, depending on which remote con‐
trol is detected when the vehicle is unlocked,
see Personal profile.
Information on servicing is also stored in the re‐
mote control, see service data in the remote
control
1. Remove the integrated key from the remote

control.
2. Push in catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover for the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a new battery of the same type with
the positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover back into position.
30
Dispose of the old battery at an author‐ Personal Profile
Overview
ised collecting point or hand it in to a
Service Centre. Principle
Some functions of the vehicle can be adjusted
New remote controls to individual needs.
New remote controls can be obtained from your ▷ Settings are saved automatically in the cur‐
Service Centre. rently activated profile.
Controls
▷ When you unlock the vehicle, the corre‐
Loss of remote controls sponding remote control is recognised and
A lost remote control can be blocked by the the saved profile for it is called up.
Service Centre. ▷ Personal settings are also found and called
up if the vehicle has been driven in the mean‐
Emergency detection of the remote
Driving hints
time by other persons with their own remote
control controls.
The ignition can be switched on or the engine Individual settings are saved for up to a maxi‐
started even in one of the following situations: mum of three remote controls.
▷ Interference in the radio transmission to the
remote control from external sources Transferring settings
▷ Flat battery in the remote control The personal settings can be taken to another
Navigation
If an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or vehicle with the Personal Profile function. More
start the engine, a message is displayed on the detailed information is available from your Serv‐
control display. ice Centre.
The transfer takes place:
Starting the engine in the event of ▷ Via the USB interface in the glove box to a
emergency detection of the remote USB medium
control
▷ Via BMW Online
Profile management
Calling up profiles
Independently of the remote control that is
used, another profile can be called up.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
When the corresponding message is shown on
the control display, hold the remote control at
the mark on the steering column as shown and,
within 10 seconds, press the start/stop button
Mobility
with the brake pressed.

Reference
3. Select a profile.
31
Renaming profiles Exporting profiles
Opening and closing
1. "Settings" Most settings of the active profile and the saved
2. "Profiles" contacts can be exported.
The current profile is selected. 1. "Settings"
3. Call up "Options". 2. "Profiles"
4. "Rename current profile" 3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface, see page 140: "USB device"
Show profile list at start

The profile list can be shown at the start to select
the desired profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Options"
Resetting profiles
4. "Show user list at start"
Settings of the active profile are reset to factory
settings. Personal Profile settings
1. "Settings" The following functions and settings can be
2. "Profiles" saved in a profile.
The current profile is selected. More details regarding the settings at:
3. Call up "Options". ▷ Active Cruise Control: forward alert, see
page 110
4. "Reset current profile"
▷ Exterior mirror position, see page 55
Importing profiles ▷ CD/multimedia, see page 183: last audio
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten source listened to
with the imported profile. ▷ Driving Dynamic Control: sport program,
see page 101
1. "Settings"
▷ Driver’s seat position, see page 45
2. "Profiles"
▷ Favourites buttons, see page 21: assign‐
3. "Import profile"
ment
▷ Head-Up Display, see page 123: selection,
brightness and position of the display
▷ Headlight courtesy delay feature, see
page 84: time setting
▷ Sound, see page 176: sound settings
▷ Automatic air conditioning, see page 126:
settings
▷ Steering-wheel position, see page 56
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" ▷ Navigation, see page 158: map views, route
USB interface, see page 140: "USB device" criteria, voice output on/off
32
▷ Night Vision with person recognition, see At the same time as locking and unlocking via
page 121: selection of the functions and the remote control:
Overview
type of display ▷ The anti-theft alarm system is also switched
▷ Daytime driving lights*, see page 85: set on/off. The doors cannot be unlocked at the
state safety lock buttons or door handles.
▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see ▷ The welcome lights, interior lights and cour‐
page 177: set volume of the sound signal tesy lighting* are switched on or off.
▷ Radio, see page 178: saved stations, last ▷ The alarm system*, see page 40, is armed
Controls
station listened to, special settings or disarmed.
▷ Rear-view camera, see page 115: selection
of the functions and type of display Operating from inside
▷ Side View, see page 118: selecting the type
Driving hints
of display
▷ Language of the control display, see
page 78
▷ Lane departure warning, see page 93: last
state, on/off
▷ Lane change warning, see page 94: last
state, on/off
Navigation
▷ Triple turn signal, see page 66 Via the button for the central locking system
▷ TV, see page 201: saved channels, selected
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
channel, special settings
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ Locking of the vehicle, see page 36: after
In the event of an accident of the corresponding
a short time or after driving off
severity, the central locking is released auto‐
matically.
The hazard warning system and interior lights
Central locking system
illuminate.
Principle
The central locking is activated when the
driver’s door is closed.
Opening and closing: from
The following are unlocked or locked simulta‐
outside
neously:
With the remote control
▷ Doors
▷ Boot lid General
▷ Fuel filler flap Removing the remote control
Persons remaining in the car or pets left
Mobility
Operating from outside inside can lock the doors from the inside. You
▷ Via the remote control should therefore take the remote control with
you when you get out of the vehicle so that the
▷ Via the driver’s door lock
car can be opened from the outside.◀
▷ Via the door handles*
▷ Via the button in the boot lid*
Reference
33
Unlocking Comfort closing
Opening and closing
Press the button. The remote control can be used to simultane‐
The vehicle is unlocked. ously close the windows and the glass roof*, as
well as to fold in* the exterior mirrors.
You can set how the car is unlocked.
Keep the button on the remote control
The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐
pressed.
rently in use.
The windows and the glass roof* are closed and
1. "Settings"
the exterior mirrors are folded in*.
2. "Door locks"
Observe the closing operation
3. "Unlock button:"
Follow closing operation and ensure that
nobody get jammed.
Releasing the button stops the movement.◀
Switching on the interior lights,

courtesy lighting* and welcome light
With the car locked, press the button on
the remote control.
4. Select the desired function: Switch on headlight courtesy delay

feature
▷ "Driver's door only"
Briefly press the button on the remote
Only the driver’s door and fuel filler flap
control.
are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle. The duration can be set via the control display.
▷ "All doors"
Opening the boot lid
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Press the button on the remote control
Comfort opening for approximately one second.
The windows and glass roof* can also be The boot lid opens, regardless of whether it was
opened simultaneously via the remote control. locked or unlocked.
Keep the button on the remote control The boot lid swings rearwards and upwards
pressed. when opened.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
The windows and the glass roof* are opened.
On models fitted with certain items of equip‐
Releasing the button stops the movement.
ment, the boot lid can be opened with the re‐
mote control only if the car has first been un‐
Locking locked.
Press the button on the remote control.
To prevent being locked out, do not place the
remote control in the boot. The boot lid is locked
Locking from the outside again as soon as it is pressed shut.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there is someone inside it, as it cannot Acknowledgement signal of the vehicle
then be unlocked from the inside in some na‐ 1. "Settings"
tional-market versions.◀
34
2. "Door locks" On certain national-market versions, the alarm
system* is deactivated if the vehicle is unlocked
Overview
3. "Visual signal lock/unlock"
using the door lock.
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control to
disarm the alarm.
Comfort operation*
The windows and the glass roof* can also be
Controls
operated simultaneously via the door lock.
Opening/closing
When the door is closed, turn the key to the
Malfunction locking position and hold it there.
Driving hints
If it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the Turning the key back to the initial position stops
vehicle with the remote control the battery might the movement.
be flat or the problem might be due to interfer‐
ence from external sources such as mobile Observe the closing operation
phones, metallic objects, high-tension electric To avoid injuries, observe the closing op‐
cables, radio transmitters, etc. eration and ensure that no-one becomes trap‐
In this case, lock or unlock the vehicle with a key ped.◀
Navigation
via the door lock.
Manual operation
Via the door lock In the event of an electrical defect, use a key in
the door lock to unlock or lock the driver’s door.
General
Opening and closing: from
inside
Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there is someone inside it, as it cannot
then be unlocked from the inside in some na‐
tional-market versions.◀ Locking and unlocking
Mobility
Removing the key before pulling the door Press the button in the vehicle.
handle The doors and the boot lid are locked or
To avoid damage to the paint and key, always unlocked, but not deadlocked, when the front
remove the key before pulling the outer door doors are closed.
handle.◀
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Reference
35
Opening and closing You can set how the car is unlocked, see Un‐ The boot lid swings rearwards and upwards
locking, see page 34. when opened.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
Automatic locking
The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ Opening from outside
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Automatic relock"
The vehicle is locked automatically after
a short while if no door is opened.
▷ "Lock after drive away"
On driving off, the vehicle is locked au‐ ▷ Press the button on the boot lid.
tomatically. ▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approximately one sec‐
ond.
Opening from inside

Press the button in the driver's footwell.
When the vehicle is stationary, the boot lid is

opened unless it has been double-locked.
Manual release
All keys fit in the boot lid lock in the licence plate
Doors recess.
Soft Close Automatic

To close the doors, press lightly.
The actual closing action is automatic.
Risk of trapping
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
area of the doors is unobstructed.◀
Turn the key to the left as far as it will go. This

Boot lid will unlock the boot lid.
To prevent being locked out, do not place the
Opening
key or remote control in the boot.
On certain national-market versions, the boot lid
can only be opened with the remote control if the The boot lid is locked again as soon as it is
car has first been unlocked. pressed shut.
36
If the boot lid is opened via the lock when the The entire vehicle is locked.
alarm system is armed, the alarm will be trig‐
Overview
gered. Automatic operation of the tailgate*
You should therefore unlock the vehicle first.
If an alarm was inadvertently triggered: switch Opening
off the alarm, see page 40. The boot lid opens completely.
Closing
Controls
Driving hints
▷ Press the button on the outside of the boot
lid.
The recessed handles in the boot lid lining make ▷ Press the button on the remote
it easier to pull the boot lid down. control or in the driver’s footwell.
Navigation
Risk of trapping Pressing the button again stops the movement.
To avoid injuries, make sure that the clos‐ The opening procedure is also interrupted:
ing area of the boot lid is unobstructed.◀ ▷ If the vehicle begins to move.
Do not lay the remote control in the boot ▷ Press the button in the driver's footwell.
Keep the remote control with you at all
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise boot lid.
there is a risk of the remote control being locked
inside the vehicle when the boot lid is closed.◀ Closing
Soft Close Automatic

Only light pressure is required to fully close the
boot lid.
The actual closing action is automatic.
Locking the vehicle*
▷ Press the button on the inside of the boot lid.

The boot lid closes automatically.
Mobility
Pressing the switch again stops the move‐

ment.
Press the button on the inside of the boot lid.

Reference
37
Manual operation
Opening and closing
In the event of an electrical defect:
1. Unlock the boot lid manually, see page 36.
2. Open or close the boot lid slowly and without
sudden movements.
Locking separately
The switch in the front centre armrest can be
With Comfort Access: used to double-lock the boot lid separately.
▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of ▷ Boot lid double-locked, ar‐
the boot lid. row 1.
The boot lid closes automatically. ▷ Boot lid unlocked, arrow 2.
ment.
▷ Press the button, arrow 2. Push the switch in the position of arrow 1. This
secures the boot lid and disconnects it from
The boot lid closes automatically and the
central locking.
vehicle is locked.
If the centre arm rest is locked, you cannot ac‐
cess the tailgate. That is an advantage if the ve‐
hicle has been parked by a valet service. Then
the remote control can be handed over without
the key.
Emergency release*
▷ Press the button on the outside of the boot

lid.
ment.
▷ Keep the button on the remote con‐
trol pressed.
Releasing the button stops the movement. Pull the handle in the boot.
The closing action is not cancelled if the vehicle This will unlock the boot lid.
starts to move.
Risk of trapping
To avoid injuries, make sure that the clos‐
Comfort Access*
ing area of the boot lid is unobstructed.◀
Principle
Do not lay the remote control in the boot
Access to the vehicle is possible without acti‐
Keep the remote control with you at all vating the remote control.
times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise
It is sufficient to have the remote control on your
person, for example in a jacket pocket.
inside the vehicle when the boot lid is closed.◀
38
The vehicle automatically recognises the re‐ Locking
mote control when it is in the immediate vicinity
Overview
or inside the car.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking the vehicle.
▷ Comfort closing.
Controls
▷ Unlocking the boot lid separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
Use your finger to touch the door handle, ar‐
Operating requirements
row 2, for approximately one second.
▷ No external sources of interference in the
Driving hints
This corresponds to pressing the button.
vicinity.
To reduce the burden on the vehicle battery,
▷ To lock, the remote control must be located
make sure that the ignition and all electrical con‐
outside the vehicle.
sumers are switched off prior to locking.
▷ Approximately two seconds need to elapse
before the car can be unlocked and locked
Comfort closing
again.
Keep your finger pressed on the area, arrow 2.
▷ An engine start is only possible if the remote
Navigation
control is in the vehicle. The windows and the glass roof* are also
closed.
Comparison with conventional remote
control Unlocking the boot lid separately
The above functions can be operated by press‐ Press the button on the outside of the boot lid,
ing the buttons or using Comfort Access. see page 36.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Unlocking
Do not lay the remote control in the boot
Keep the remote control with you at all
times and do not lay it in the boot, as otherwise
inside the vehicle when the boot lid is closed.◀
Ignition on
Pressing the start/stop button switches on the
ignition.
Do not press the brake, otherwise the engine will
Take a firm hold of one of the door handles, ar‐
start.
row 1. This corresponds to pressing the
Mobility
button.
Malfunction
External sources of interference in the vicinity
can cause the Comfort Access system to mal‐
function: sources of this nature include mobile
phones, metallic objects, high-tension over‐
Reference
head cables, radio transmitters, etc.
39
Opening and closing In this situation, open or close the vehicle using On closing the boot lid, it is locked again and
the buttons on the remote control or via the door monitored. The hazard warning system flashes
lock with the key. once.
To start the engine after this, hold the remote On models fitted with certain items of equip‐
control at the position marked on the steering ment, the boot lid can be opened with the re‐
column, see page 31. mote control only if the car has first been un‐
locked.
alarm system* Switching off the alarm

▷ Unlock the car with the remote control.
Principle ▷ Unlock the vehicle with a key via the driver’s
The alarm system is triggered if: door lock*.
▷ A door, the bonnet or the boot lid is opened. ▷ With Comfort Access: With the remote con‐
▷ There is any movement inside the car: inte‐ trol on your person, pull the door handle.
rior movement detector, see page 41.
▷ The car’s incline changes, for instance if an Indicator light on the interior mirror
attempt is made to jack it up and steal the
wheels or to raise it prior to towing away.
▷ There is an interruption in the power supply
from the battery.
The alarm system will respond briefly to unau‐
thorised attempts to access the car as follows:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
▷ Switching on the hazard warning flashers.
▷ Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds:
Arming and disarming
System is armed.
Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, either
▷ Indicator light flashes after locking:
with the remote control or at the door lock, the
alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same Doors, bonnet, or boot lid are not properly
time. closed; the rest is secured.
After ten seconds, the indicator light flashes
Door lock with alarm system armed continuously. The interior movement detec‐
Opening certain national-market versions via tor is not active.
the door lock triggers the alarm. ▷ The indicator light turns off after the car has
This alarm can only be terminated using the but‐ been unlocked:
ton on the remote control. No attempt has been made to tamper with
the vehicle.
Boot lid with alarm system armed ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
The boot lid can also be opened using the re‐ until the engine is started, but for no longer
mote control when the system is armed. than approximately five minutes:
Press the button on the remote control The alarm has been triggered.
for approximately one second.
Tilt alarm sensor
The incline of the vehicle is monitored.
40
The alarm system is triggered, for instance, if an
attempt is made to steal the car’s wheels or tow
Overview
it away.
Interior movement detector

To ensure perfect functioning, the windows and
glass roof must be closed.
Controls
Avoiding false alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement de‐
Opening
tector can be switched off together, for example
in the following situations:
▷ Push the switch as far as the resistance
▷ In two-level garages. point.
Driving hints
▷ During transport via motorail, car ferry or The window opens as long as the switch is
trailer. held.
▷ When there are animals in the vehicle.
▷ Push the switch past the resistance
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and point.
interior movement detector The window opens automatically.
Navigation
Press the button on the remote control Pressing the switch again stops the movement.
twice in succession.
The indicator light is illuminated for approxi‐ Closing
mately two seconds, then begins to flash stead‐ Risk of trapping
ily.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement area of the window is unobstructed during clos‐
detector are switched off until the next time the ing.◀
car is locked.
▷ Pull the switch as far as the resistance
point.
Power windows The window closes as long as the switch is
held.
General
Removing the remote control ▷ Pull the switch past the resistance
Take the remote control with you when point.
you leave the car, otherwise children, for exam‐ The window closes automatically.
ple, could operate the power windows and pos‐ The movement is stopped by pressing the
sibly injure themselves.◀ switch.
Comfort operation, see page 34, via the re‐
Mobility
mote control or door lock.

Comfort closing, see page 39, with Comfort Ac‐
cess*.
After switching off the ignition

Windows can still be operated:
Reference
41
Opening and closing ▷ For some time with radio readiness ▷ Operating the roller sunblinds* via the
switched on. switch in the rear.
▷ For approximately one minute with the igni‐ ▷ Adjusting the electrical rear seats*.
tion switched off. ▷ Adjusting the electrical head restraints* in
the rear.
Anti-trap mechanism
If the closing power exceeds a certain value on Switching on and off
closing a window, the closing operation is inter‐ Press the button.
rupted.
When the safety function is switched
The window opens again slightly. on, the LED is illuminated.
Danger of trapping despite anti-trap Safety switch for rear operation
mechanism
Press the safety switch when carrying
Despite the anti-trap mechanism, make sure children in the rear seats, otherwise careless
that the windows are not obstructed as they closing of the windows could result in injury.◀
close; if this precaution is not taken, the risk re‐
To deactivate the function again, at least radio
mains that thin objects, for instance, could fail to
ready state must be switched on.
interrupt the closing movement.◀
Accessories on windows
Do not attach any accessories in the Roller sunblinds*
movement range of the windows, as otherwise
the anti-trap mechanism will be impaired.◀ General
The safety switch in the driver’s door can be
Closing without the anti-trap used to prevent, for example children from op‐
mechanism erating the roller sunblinds by means of the
If an external hazard or ice on the windows does switches in the rear.
not allow you to close the windows normally,
Press the safety switch in the driver’s door.
proceed as follows:
When the safety function is switched on, the
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and LED is illuminated.
hold it there. If the roller sunblinds can no longer be moved
The anti-trap mechanism is restricted and after a number of operations in immediate suc‐
the window opens slightly when the closing cession, the system is blocked for a limited time
force exceeds a certain value. to prevent overheating. Allow the system to cool
down.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approximately four seconds At low inside temperatures, the roller sunblinds
and hold it there. cannot be moved.
The window closes without the anti-trap
mechanism.
Safety switch
The following functions are deactivated using
the switch:
▷ Opening and closing the rear windows via
the switch in the rear.
42
Operation of driver’s door Glass roof, electric*
Overview
General
The glass roof and the sliding panel can be op‐
erated separately or together with the same
switch.
Risk of trapping
Controls
area of the glass roof is unobstructed during
closing.◀
Roller sunblind for rear window Removing the remote control
Press the button. Take the remote control with you when
Driving hints
you leave the car, otherwise children could op‐
erate the roof and possibly injure themselves.◀
Operation of rear doors
Navigation
Raising the glass roof
Roller sunblind for side windows Press the switch briefly.
Press the button. ▷ From the closed position, the
roof is raised and the sliding
The blind can only be raised and lowered with panel opens slightly.
the side window closed. ▷ The opened roof closes to
the raised position. The slid‐
Roller sunblind for rear window ing panel remains completely
Press the button. open.
The sliding panel is closed al‐
most completely by pressing
Extending or retracting the roller the switch again.
sunblinds together
Keep button pressed. Opening/closing the sliding panel
Mobility
▷ Push and hold the switch in

the desired direction as far as
the resistance point.
The sliding panel moves as
long as the switch is held.
Reference
43
Closing without the anti-trap
Opening and closing ▷ Push the switch beyond the resistance point
in the desired direction. mechanism
The sliding panel moves automatically. The In the event of danger from outside, for example,
movement is stopped by pressing the proceed as follows:
switch again.
1. Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
Opening/closing glass roof
The anti-trap mechanism is restricted and
Proceed as described under sliding trim when
the roof opens slightly when the closing
the sliding trim is open.
force exceeds a certain value.
Opening and closing the glass roof and 2. Press the switch forwards once again be‐
sliding panel together yond the resistance point and hold until the
roof closes without the anti-trap mecha‐
Push the switch twice beyond the
nism.
resistance point in the desired di‐
rection.
Initialising after power failure
The glass roof and the sliding
It is possible that the roof functions are restric‐
panel open together. The move‐
ted after a power cut.
ment is stopped by pressing the switch again.
Have the system initialised by your Service Cen‐
Comfort operation, see page 34, via the re‐ tre.
mote control or door lock.
Comfort closing, see page 39, with Comfort Ac‐
cess*.
After the ignition is switched off

The roof can still be opened or closed for ap‐
proximately 1 minute after the ignition has been
switched off.
Anti-trap mechanism
If the closing power of the glass roof exceeds a
certain value, the closing operation is interrup‐
ted from approximately the half-open position,
or during closing from the raised position.
The roof opens again slightly.
Danger of trapping despite anti-trap
mechanism
Despite the anti-trap mechanism, make sure
that the roof is not obstructed as it closes; if this
precaution is not taken, the risk remains that thin
objects, for instance, could fail to interrupt the
closing movement.◀
44
Adjusting
Overview
Safe seated position Overview
A seated position that suitably reflects your re‐

quirements is a vital condition of relaxed driving
with a minimum of fatigue.
Controls
In the event of an accident, the seated position
plays an important role together with:
▷ Seat belts, see page 50.
▷ Head restraints, see page 51.
Driving hints
▷ Airbags, see page 89.
1 Lumbar support*
2 Backrest width*
Front seats 3 Shoulder support*
Settings 4 Backrest
No seat adjustment while the vehicle is in 5 Longitudinal direction, height, tilt
Navigation
motion 6 Thigh support*
Do not reposition the driver’s seat while the ve‐
hicle is in motion. Settings in detail
The seat could move unexpectedly, leading to 1. Longitudinal direction
the driver losing control of the car, so that an ac‐
cident could be caused.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far towards
the rear
Also on the passenger’s side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is in
motion. Otherwise, there is a danger of slipping
under the seat belt in the event of an accident.
The protective effect of the seat belt is lost.◀
2. Height.
Mobility
Reference
45
Adjusting 3. Seat angle
▷ Press the switch at the front/rear.

The curvature is increased/decreased.
4. Backrest angle
▷ Press the switch at the top/bottom.
The curvature is shifted upwards/down‐
wards.
Backrest width*
5. Thigh support*.
Alter the width of the backrest via the side cush‐

ions to adjust the lateral support.
Temporarily, the backrest width opens com‐

pletely to facilitate getting into and out of the car.
Shoulder support*
Lumbar support*
The curvature of the backrest can be altered to
support the lordosis, the lumbar section of the
spine. The upper edge of the pelvis and the spi‐
nal column are supported to encourage an up‐
right seated position.
Supports the back also in the shoulder region:

▷ Leads to a relaxed posture
▷ Relieves the load on the shoulder muscles
46
Gentleman function* Seat heating*
Overview
The front passenger’s seat can be adjusted us‐
ing the driver’s seat switches.
Controls
Switch on
Press the button once per temperature
Driving hints
1. Press the button. LED is illuminated. stage.
2. Use the driver’s seat switches to adjust the Maximum temperature is indicated by three
front passenger’s seat. LEDs.
3. If required, save the memory position, see
page 54, for the front passenger’s seat. Switching off
4. Press the button to deactivate the function. Press and hold down the button.
Navigation
LED turns off. LEDs go out.
The function is also disabled automatically after In order to protect the battery the temperature
a certain time. is reduced, if necessary to the point at which the
system is switched off.
Active seat*
Active change in the seat cushion helps to avoid Temperature distribution*
strain and signs of fatigue to the back muscles, The heating distribution between the seat cush‐
preventing back pains in the lumbar region. ion and backrest can be varied.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Select the corresponding seat.
Press the button. LED is illuminated.

Mobility
4. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera‐

ture distribution.
Active seat ventilation*

Reference
The seat cushion is cooled by integrated fans.
47
Adjusting The ventilation cools the seat rapidly if the ve‐ 5 Head restraint
hicle interior is uncomfortably hot or if continu‐
6 Lumbar support
ous cooling is required at high temperatures.
If the safety switch for the power windows is
pressed, the seats cannot be adjusted.
Settings in detail
1. Longitudinal direction
Switching on
Press the button once per ventilation
stage.
The highest stage is indicated by three LEDs.
2. Seat angle
After a short time, a lower level is automatically
activated to prevent chilling.
Switching off
Press and hold down the button.
LEDs extinguish.
Rear seats
Settings 3. Backrest angle
Overview
Lumbar support
1 Longitudinal direction, incline The curvature of the backrest can be changed
2 Backrest, head restraint in such a way that the lumbar region, the lordo‐
sis, is supported. The upper edge of the pelvis
3 Adjust front passenger seat
and the spinal column are supported to encour‐
4 Adjusting the default position age an upright seated position.
48
Adjusting the basic position*
Overview
Controls
▷ Press the switch at the front/rear.
The curvature is increased/decreased. Press the button until the seat adjustment is
▷ Press the switch at the top/bottom. completed.
Driving hints
The curvature is shifted upwards/down‐
wards. Massage function in rear seat*
Motion from top to bottom in waves in the back‐
Adjusting front passenger’s seat from rest relaxes the back muscles.
the rear
For example, in order to have more legroom in Button in the rear
the rear.
Navigation
1. Press the button to activate the function, ar‐ Switching on
row. To switch on, press the button once per
2. Adjust the front passenger’s seat, for exam‐ massage stage.
ple longitudinal direction. The highest stage is indicated by two LEDs.
3. Press the button to deactivate the function,
arrow. Switching off
The function is also disabled automatically after To switch off, press the button for a longer pe‐
a certain time. riod.
LEDs extinguish.
Mobility
Reference
49
Seat heating* Active seat ventilation*
Adjusting
Switch on Switching on
Press the button once per temperature Press the button once per ventilation
stage. stage.
Maximum temperature is indicated by three The highest stage is indicated by three LEDs.
LEDs.
Switching off
Switching off Press and hold down the button.
Press and hold down the button. LEDs extinguish.
LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution Seat belts

The heating distribution between the seat cush‐
ion and backrest can be varied. General
Before driving off, always make sure that all oc‐
1. "Climate"
cupants have fastened their seat belts.
2. "Seat heating rear"
The airbags are a complementary safety feature
3. Select the corresponding seat. and not a substitute for the seat belts.
Number of seat belts

Your vehicle has been fitted with four or five*
seat belts for the safety of you and your passen‐
gers. However, they can only offer protection
when adjusted correctly.
▷ The upper belt anchorage is suitable for
adults of any stature as long as the seat is
correctly adjusted.
4. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera‐ ▷ The two seat belt buckles integrated into the
ture distribution. rear seat are intended for the left and right
seat occupants.
▷ The buckle marked CENTER is only to be
used by a passenger occupying the centre
rear seat.
One person per seat belt
50
Never restrain more than one person with each Check whether the seat belt has been fastened
seat belt. Babies or small children must not correctly.
Overview
travel on the lap of another occupant.◀ The seat belt reminder is activated when the
Fastening the seat belt seat belt on the driver’s side is not fastened. On
Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis some national versions, the seat belt reminder
and shoulder as close as possible to the body is also activated above approximately 8 km/h,
and make sure that it is positioned low at the hip 5 mph if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
in the area of the pelvis and is not pressing on fastened or if heavy objects are located on the
Controls
your midriff. Otherwise, the seat belt can slip seat.
over the hip and injure the midriff in the event of
a head-on collision. Safety function
The seat belt must not pass across the neck. It In critical driving situations, for example full brak‐
should not be pulled across sharp edges or ing, the front seat belts are tensioned automat‐
Driving hints
routed or fastened over hard or fragile objects.◀ ically.
Impairment of the restraining effect If the driving situation passes without an acci‐
dent, the belt tension is loosened.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly
pull the seat belt in the upper-body area taut, If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
otherwise its restraining effect could be im‐ stop the vehicle and open the seat belt using the
paired.◀ red button in the lock section. Fasten the seat
belt again before continuing your journey.
Navigation
Fastening the seat belt
Damaged seat belts
In the event of stress due to an accident or dam‐
age:
Replace the belt system, including the seat-belt
tensioner, and have the belt anchorage
checked.
Checking and replacing the seat belts

Only have this work carried out at the Serv‐
ice Centre, as otherwise correct functioning of
The seat belt buckle must be heard to engage. this safety device is not ensured.◀
After fastening the seat belt and closing the
door, the seat belt strap is tensioned once au‐
tomatically. Front head restraints
Unfastening the seat belt Correctly adjusted head restraint
1. Hold onto the belt. Head restraints adjusted to the correct height
reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the event
2. Press the red button on the belt buckle.
of an accident.
Mobility
3. Guide the belt back up to the reel.

Adjusting head restraint
Seatbelt reminder for driver's and front Adjust the head restraint correctly for all
passenger's seat* occupied seats, as otherwise there is an in‐
The indicator light is illuminated and a creased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
warning sounds. In addition, a message dent.◀
Reference
will appear on the instrument cluster.
51
Height Distance to back of head: manual head
Adjusting
Adjust the head restraint so that its centre is ap‐ restraints
proximately at the height of your ear.
Spacing
Adjust the spacing so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint

In the event of a severe rear-end collision, the
active head restraint automatically reduces the
gap to the head. ▷ Forward: pull
Reduced protection ▷ Back: press button and slide head restraint
towards rear.
▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or
head restraints.
Distance to back of head: electrical*
▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hangers head restraints
over the head restraints.
The head restraint is shifted automatically on
▷ Do not attach any accessories to the seat or adjusting the shoulder support.
head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active Adjusting side sections*
head restraint is impaired and personal safety is
endangered.◀
Adjust height
Fold forwards to increase lateral support in the

rest position.
Removing
Adjust electrically.
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint
Head restraints adjusted to the correct height
reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting head restraint
52
Adjust the head restraint correctly for all occu‐ jured or objects damaged when the head re‐
pied seats, as otherwise there is an increased straints are extended.◀
Overview
risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀ When the rear window safety switch, see
page 42, is pressed, the height adjustment of
Height the head restraint is disabled.
Adjust the head restraint so that its centre is ap‐
proximately at the height of your ear. Adjusting side sections*
Controls
Spacing
Adjust the spacing so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjust height: manual head restraints
Driving hints
Fold the side sections forwards to increase lat‐
eral support in the rest position.
Removing: manual head restraints
Navigation
Only remove the head restraint if no-one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
▷ Up: pull
▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint downwards.
Adjust height: electrical*
▷ The outer head restraints are extended au‐
tomatically as soon as a rear passenger fas‐
tens the seat belt.
1. Pull up the head restraint as far as the limit

position.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint fully out.
Before carrying passengers
Install the head restraints again before
carrying passengers, otherwise the head re‐
straints do not offer protection.◀
Mobility
▷ The height of the head restraint can also be

adjusted electrically.
Removing: electrical* head restraints
Extending the head restraint
Ensure that the space above the head re‐ Note
straints is clear, otherwise persons could be in‐ Do not remove the rear head restraints.
Reference
53
Adjusting To prevent damage, they can only be refitted by Two different seat positions can be saved and
the Service Centre. called up.
Removing Saving
Only remove the head restraint if no-one will be 1. Switch on ignition.
sitting on the seat in question. 2. Set desired position.
1. Push the head restraint fully upwards.
3. Press the button on the door. LED
2. Extend the head restraint completely with a
in button is illuminated.
firm pull.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. LED turns
Before carrying passengers
off.
Install the head restraints again before
If the MEMORY button was pressed acciden‐
carrying passengers, otherwise the head re‐
tally:
straints do not offer protection.◀
Press the button on the door again.
LED turns off.
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel position memory* Recalling
Do not call up the memory while the vehi‐
General
cle is in motion
Front Do not call up the memory while the vehicle is in
motion, otherwise an unexpected seat or steer‐
ing wheel movement may cause an accident.◀
Convenience function
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Briefly press button 1 or 2 as desired.
The relevant seat adjustment is done automat‐
ically.
You can save and recall two different positions The process is cancelled if a seat adjustment
for the driver’s seat, exterior mirrors and steering switch or one of the buttons is pressed.
wheel for each remote control. The lumbar sup‐
port setting is not saved. Safety function
1. Close the driver’s door or switch the ignition
Rear
on.
2. Keep button 1 or 2 pressed as desired until
the adjustment procedure has been conclu‐
ded.
Calling up has been disabled

After a short time, calling up saved seat posi‐
tions is disabled to prevent the battery from be‐
ing discharged.
54
To reactivate calling up: Overview
Overview
▷ Open or close a door or the boot lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the start/stop button.
Calling up with the remote control

The last adjusted driver's seat, exterior mirror
Controls
and steering wheel position is stored for the cur‐
rently used remote control.
Risk of jamming when the seat moves 1 Adjusting
back
2 Left/right, automatic parking function*
If this function is used, first ensure that the foot‐
Driving hints
3 Folding in and out
well behind the driver’s seat is clear. Otherwise,
with any moving back of the seat people could
Selecting a mirror
be injured or objects be damaged.◀
Switching to other mirror:
Adjustment process is interrupted:
Push mirror changeover switch.
▷ By operating the switch or the seat adjust‐
ment
Electrical adjustment
Navigation
▷ By pressing a key of the memory
Corresponding to movement of button
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position aut."
Saving positions*
Seat, mirror and steering wheel position mem‐
ory, see page 54.
Adjusting manually
In the event of an electrical defect, for example,
press the borders of the mirror glass.
Parking position*
When reverse gear is engaged, the glass of the
mirror on the front passenger side tilts slightly
Mirrors down. This improves the view of the kerb or
other obstacles near the ground, for example
Exterior mirrors when parking.
General Activating
Mobility
Correctly estimating distance

1. Push mirror changeover switch into
Objects reflected in the mirrors are closer position for driver’s mirror.
than they appear. Do not gauge your distance
2. Engage transmission position R.
from following traffic based on what you see in
the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk When towing a trailer*, the automatic parking
Reference
of an accident.◀ function is switched off.
55
Interior mirror, automatic-dim*
Adjusting Deactivating
Push mirror changeover switch into position for
front passenger’s mirror.
Folding in and out

Press the button.
Possible up to approximately 20 km/h, 15 mph.

An advantage, for example
▷ In car washes
The function is controlled by photocells:
▷ In narrow streets
▷ In the mirror glass
▷ When folding mirrors back out that have
▷ On the back of the mirror
been folded in manually.
To keep the system functioning properly:
Folded-in mirrors automatically fold out at ap‐
proximately 40 km/h, 25 mph. ▷ Keep photocells clean.
▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the inte‐
Folding mirrors in a car wash
rior mirror and windscreen.
Before driving through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually or by pressing button; oth‐
erwise, they could be damaged due to the width Illuminated vanity mirror* in
of the car.◀
the rear
Automatic heating
Folding down
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
with the engine running.
Interior mirror
Reducing glare
Press the button.

The vanity mirror folds down.
The angle can be adjusted by hand.
Folding up
From behind when driving at night: turn button.
Press the mirror upwards.
Steering wheel
General
Adjusting while the vehicle is in motion
56
Do not adjust the steering wheel position while
the vehicle is in motion, or an accident may result
Overview
from any unexpected movement.◀
Controls
Driving hints
Adjusting
Navigation
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Saving position
Seat, mirror and steering wheel position mem‐
ory, see page 54.
Easy entry/exit
The steering wheel temporarily moves to its
highest position to facilitate entry and exit.
Steering wheel heating*
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Mobility
▷ On: LED is illuminated.

▷ Off: LED turns off.
Reference
57
Carrying children in safety
Important considerations Fitting child restraint systems

Note Child restraint systems
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems are available
Do not leave children unattended in the from your Service Centre for every class of age
vehicle, as they could otherwise endanger or weight.
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.◀ Before installation
With adjustable seat backrests in the rear:
Suitable seats Before installing child restraints, set all seat
In principle, all seats in your vehicle, with the ex‐ backrests to the basic position.
ception of the driver’s seat, are suitable for in‐
stalling child restraint systems for all age groups Notes
that have been approved for the corresponding Manufacturer specifications for child re‐
age group. straints
When selecting, installing and using child re‐
Always carry children at the rear
straint systems, follow the manufacturer’s infor‐
Accident research has shown that the safest mation, otherwise the protection may be affec‐
place for children is on the rear seat. ted.◀
Carry children at the rear Child restraint systems following an acci‐
Children younger than 12 years or smaller dent
than 150 cm, approximately 5 ft are only to travel Following an accident, all components of the
in the rear in suitable child restraint systems, child restraint system and the seat belt that was
otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in used to secure it should be checked and re‐
the event of an accident.◀ newed if necessary.
This work should only be carried out by your
Children in the front passenger’s seat Service Centre.◀
If it becomes necessary to use a child restraint
system in the front passenger’s seat, make sure On the front passenger’s seat
that the front and side airbags on the passen‐ Before fitting a child restraint system in the front
ger’s side are disabled. Front passenger airbags passenger’s seat, make sure that the front and
can only be deactivated with the key switch for side airbags on the passenger’s side are disa‐
front passenger airbags. bled.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If you fit a child restraint system in the front If you fit a child restraint system in the front
passenger’s seat, the front passenger airbags passenger’s seat, the front passenger airbags
must be deactivated, otherwise a child travelling must be deactivated, otherwise a child travelling
on that seat will face an increased risk of injury on that seat will face an increased risk of injury
if the airbags are deployed, even if a child re‐ if the airbags are deployed, even if a child re‐
straint system is used.◀ straint system is used.◀
58
Seat position and height Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors
Overview
Before mounting a universal child restraint sys‐ Properly engage the lower ISOFIX an‐
tem, move the front passenger’s seat to the chors
rearmost position and the middle height posi‐ Make sure that the lower ISOFIX anchors are
tion to achieve the best possible routing of the correctly locked in place and that the child re‐
belt and protection in the event of an accident. straint system is seated firmly against the back‐
Do not change this seat position and height. rest, as otherwise the protective effect can be
diminished.◀
Controls
Backrest width* Before fitting ISOFIX child restraint systems,
Before installing a child restraint on the passen‐ pull the belt away from the area of the child seat
ger seat, Backrest widthfully open the . Do not mountings.
change the backrest width from this point on
and do not call up a memory position.
Driving hints
Backrest width for child’s seat
Before fitting a child restraint system in the
front passenger’s seat, the backrest width must
be fully open. Do not change the setting while
the child restraint system is fitted, as otherwise
the stability of the child’s seat will be restric‐
Navigation
ted.◀
The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are
located in the gap between the seat and back‐
ISOFIX child seat mountings rest.
Note
Fitting ISOFIX child restraint systems
Manufacturer specifications for ISOFIX 1. Fit the child restraint system, see instruc‐
child restraints tions of the system.
For fitting and using ISOFIX child restraints, ob‐ 2. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors have
serve the operating and safety instructions of snapped into place.
the system’s manufacturer, as the protective ef‐
fect could otherwise be impaired.◀ Fitting ISOFIX child restraint
systemsElectrically adjustable rear
Suitable ISOFIX child restraints seats*
The following ISOFIX child restraints may be 1. Before mounting, set the default position,
used in the rear seats. The corresponding see page 49, of the seats.
classes are located on the child seats as letters
2. For better accessibility, incline the backrest
or ISO specifications.
slightly towards the rear.
On the rear seats 3. Fit the child restraint system, see instruc‐
tions of the system.
Mobility
A - ISO/F3 C - ISO/R3
4. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors have
B - ISO/F2 D - ISO/R2 snapped into place.
B1 - ISO/F2X E - ISO/R1 5. After mounting, move the backrest slightly
forwards so that the child restraint system
leans lightly against the backrest.
Reference
59
Upper ISOFIX retaining strap Attach the upper retaining strap to the
mounting point
Mounting points 1. Remove the cover of the mounting point.
2. Raise the head restraint. Do not change the
position of the centre head restraint*.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
head restraint mounts.
4. Engage the hook of the retaining strap in the
securing eyelet.
5. Pull the restraining strap firmly down.
6. Lower the head restraint.
There are two mounting points for the upper re‐
taining strap of ISOFIX child restraints.
Securing doors and windows
ISOFIX securing eyelets
Only use the fastening eyes of the upper Rear doors
ISOFIX holding belt for fastening child restraint
systems, otherwise the fastening points may be
damaged. ◀
Guide of the retaining strap

Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
guided to the upper mounting point without
touching sharp edges and it is not twisted, oth‐
erwise the seat belt cannot secure the child re‐
Push down the locking levers on the rear doors.
straint system appropriately in the event of an
accident.◀ The door in question can now only be opened
from the outside.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver’s door if
children are travelling in the rear.
Various functions are blocked and cannot be

operated in the rear, safety switch, see
page 42.
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for the upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eyelet
5 Rear parcel shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
60
Driving
Overview
Start/stop button Transmission position P with the ignition
switched off
Principle With the ignition switched off, transmission po‐
The ignition is switched on or off sition P is engaged automatically. Make sure
and the engine is started by that in a car wash, for example, the ignition is not
Controls
pressing the start/stop button. switched off inadvertently.◀
Pressing the start/stop button When the vehicle is locked via the central locking
while the brake is pressed starts system, the ignition switches off automatically.
the engine.
Driving hints
Radio ready state
Ignition on This is only reached when the start/stop button
Press the start/stop button, but do not press the is pressed to stop the engine with the engine
brake. running.
All systems are ready to operate. Individual electrical systems remain ready to op‐
erate.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster are illuminated for different Radio ready state switches off automatically:
Navigation
lengths of time. ▷ After approximately eight minutes.
To save battery power when the engine is off, ▷ When locking via the central locking system.
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems.
Engine start
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ When locking, if the low-beam headlights
are switched on. General
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged so Enclosed spaces
that an engine start remains possible. Never run the engine in enclosed spaces,
▷ If the engine is switched off and the ignition as inhaling the exhaust gas can lead to loss of
is switched on, the radio ready state will be consciousness with fatal consequences. The
automatically activated when the door is exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which is
opened if the light is not illuminated or the colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.◀
daytime driving lights are illuminated. Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
Ignition off the engine running, as this constitutes a hazard.
Press the start/stop button again, but do not Before leaving the vehicle when the engine is
press the brake. running, apply the parking brake and engage
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster ex‐ gearbox position P or idle position, otherwise
Mobility
tinguish. the vehicle may move.◀

To save battery power when the engine is off, Frequent starting in quick succession
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary Avoid starting, stopping and restarting the
electronic systems. engine in rapid succession as well as repeated
attempts to start the engine if it does not fire.
Reference
Otherwise unburned or only partially combusted
61
Before entering a car wash
Driving fuel could reach the catalytic converter, which
could overheat and sustain damage as a re‐ The vehicle can roll if the following steps are
sult.◀ carried out:
Do not warm up the engine with the car at a
1. Press the brake.
standstill; it is preferable to set off straight away,
driving at moderate engine speeds. 2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake or deactivate Au‐
Diesel engine tomatic Hold.
With the engine cold and at temperatures below 4. Stop the engine.
approximately 0 ℃, 32 ℉, the starting operation Transmission position P with the ignition
can be delayed slightly due to automatic pre‐ switched off
heating.
With the ignition switched off, transmission po‐
A message is displayed. sition P is engaged automatically. Make sure
that in a car wash, for example, the ignition is not
Starting the engine switched off inadvertently.◀
Press the brake and press the Transmission position P is automatically en‐
start/stop button. gaged:
Starting is done until the engine ▷ With the ignition switched off.
fires.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes if the vehicle is not
moved.
Stopping the engine

Parking brake
General
Removing the remote control Principle
To avoid the risk of children injuring them‐ The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
selves by operating the power windows, always from rolling when it is parked.
take the remote control with you when you leave ▷ Engine switched off: the parking brake acts
the car.◀ on the rear wheels.
Apply the parking brake and further secure ▷ Engine running: the parking brake acts on
the vehicle as required the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels
When parking, apply the parking brake firmly to via the hydraulic brake system.
prevent the car from rolling. On steep upward The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐ matically:
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in ▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.
the direction of the curb. ◀
▷ Automatically: by activating Automatic
Hold.
Stopping the engine
1. With the car stationary, engage transmis‐
sion position P.
2. Press the start/stop button.
The engine is switched off.
Radio ready state is switched on.
3. Apply the parking brake.
62
Before manually releasing the parking brake and
every time the vehicle is parked with the parking
Overview
brake released, ensure that position P of the au‐
tomatic transmission is engaged.
Adapt the way the vehicle is secured on inclines,
for example with a chock, as otherwise there is
a danger that the vehicle will roll.◀
If the automatic transmission’s interlock has
Controls
also to be released manually, observe the
following sequence:
Engaging
Pull switch. 1. Protect the car against rolling.
LED is illuminated. 2. Unlock the parking brake manually.
Driving hints
3. Release the transmission interlock, see
The indicator light illuminates red. The
page 70, of the automatic transmission
parking brake is engaged.
manually.
While the vehicle is in motion
Unlocking
Use while the vehicle is in motion:
1. Take the release tool from the on-board tool
Pull and hold the switch. The vehicle brakes kit.
Navigation
strongly for as long as the button is pulled.
The indicator light illuminates red, a sig‐

nal sounds and the brake lights illumi‐
nate.
If the vehicle is braked to approximately 3 km/h,
2 mph, the parking brake remains engaged.
Releasing
Press the switch with the brake pressed or
transmission position P engaged. 2. Fold the floor panel in the boot upwards.
LED and indicator turn off.
Parking brake is released.
Removing the remote control

To avoid the risk of children releasing the
parking brake, always take the remote control
with you when you leave the car.◀
Manual release
Mobility
In the event of a power supply interruption or

electrical fault, the parking brake can be re‐
leased manually.
Before releasing, prevent the car from roll‐
ing away
Reference
63
Driving 3. Remove the carpet in the boot. To do so, use Only if the parking brake was manually released
the release tool to loosen the screws, see due to power failure is it possible to put it back
arrows. into in operation. Otherwise, the function of the
parking brake is not ensured.◀
Initial operation
1. Switch on ignition.
2. Press the switch with the brake

pressed or transmission position P en‐
gaged.
It can take a few seconds to put the brake into
operation. Any sounds that occur are normal.
4. Apply the release tool to the unlocking point,
arrow. The indicator light in the instrument
cluster extinguishes when the parking
brake is operational again.
Automatic Hold
Principle
This system automatically applies and releases
the parking brake, for example in stop-and-go
traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held at a standstill.
5. Pull the release tool firmly upwards against
the resistance until a significant rise in force On upward inclines, rolling back is prevented
becomes noticeable and the parking brake when driving off.
can be clearly heard to unlock.
For your safety

Have the fault repaired
Automatic Hold is automatically disabled and
If the parking brake has been released
the parking brake is engaged when:
manually due to a fault, it can only be re-saved
to operation by expert personnel. ▷ The engine is switched off.
Have your Service Centre repair the fault.◀ ▷ A door is opened and the seat belt of the
driver is unfastened.
After a power failure ▷ The parking brake is used to brake to a
Returning to operation only after a power standstill while the vehicle is in motion.
supply interruption
64
Indicator light changes from green to red Deactivate Automatic Hold, as otherwise the
parking brake is applied when the vehicle is sta‐
Overview
and the lettering AUTO H is deactivated.
tionary and the vehicle can no longer roll.◀
Before driving off:
▷ Release the parking brake manually. Parking
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold. The parking brake is automatically applied when
Leaving the vehicle with engine running the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold and the
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine engine is switched off.
Controls
running, engage position P of the automatic The indicator light changes from green to red.
transmission and ensure that the parking brake The parking brake is not applied if the engine
is engaged. The car could otherwise start to was switched off while the vehicle was still roll‐
move.◀ ing. Automatic Hold is disabled.
The parking brake can also be released manually
Driving hints
Activating after stopping the engine, for example in a car
Press the button. wash.
The LED and lettering AUTO H are illu‐
Removing the remote control
minated.
To avoid the risk of children releasing the
Indicator light is illuminated. parking brake, always take the remote control
Automatic Hold is activated. with you when you leave the car.◀
Navigation
Deactivating Malfunction
Press the button again. If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure
The LED and lettering AUTO H are de‐ the vehicle against rolling away, for example with
activated. a chock, if you leave the vehicle.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being kept stationary by Auto‐ Turn indicators, high-beam
matic Hold, apply the brake to deactivate. headlights, headlight flasher
If the parking brake, see page 62, is applied
manually, Automatic Hold is automatically disa‐ Turn indicator
bled.
Driving
When Automatic Hold is activated, the vehicle is
automatically secured against rolling whenever
it stops.
The indicator light illuminates green.

To move off, press the accelerator.
Mobility
The brake is released automatically. Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
Indicator light turns off. To cancel the signal manually, press the lever as
Before entering a car wash far as the resistance point.
If the indicator light flashes more rapidly than

usual, a turn indicator bulb has failed.
Reference
65
Wiper system
Driving During trailer towing, the light might also indi‐
cate failure of one of the turn signal lights of the
trailer. Switching the wipers on/off and flick-
wiping
Triple turn signal
No wiper operation in the event of frost
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
Do not switch on the wipers when they are
The turn indicator flashes three times. frozen, as otherwise the wiper blades and wind‐
This function can be enabled or disabled. screen wiper motor can be damaged.◀
1. "Settings"
Switch on
2. "Lights"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Press the wiper lever upwards.

The lever returns to the default position when
released.
Indicating a turn briefly
▷ Normal wiping speed: press upwards once.
Press the lever as far as the resistance point and
hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers
turn. switch to intermittent operation.
▷ Rapid wiping speed: press upwards twice or
High-beam headlights, headlight press once beyond the resistance point.
flasher When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers
switch to normal speed.
Switching off and flick-wiping
▷ High-beam headlights, arrow 1

▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2
Press the wiper lever downwards.

The lever returns to the default position when
released.
▷ Flick-wiping: press downwards once.
66
▷ Switching off normal mode: press down‐ Cleaning the windscreen, headlights
wards once.
Overview
▷ Switching off fast mode: press downwards
twice.
Rain sensor
The system automatically regulates the wind‐
screen wipers in accordance with the rain inten‐
Controls
sity.
The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Pull the lever.
Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
Driving hints
onto the windscreen and the wipers are oper‐
ated briefly.
When the vehicle’s lights are switched on, the

headlights are also cleaned simultaneously at
practical intervals.
Do not use the washer system in the event
of frost
Navigation
Only operate the washer systems and cleaning
equipment if you are certain that the fluid will not
Press the button on the wiper lever. freeze on the windscreen and interfere with the
view ahead. Therefore, use anti-freeze.
On activation, the wipers move once across the
Do not use the washer systems if the fluid res‐
windscreen.
ervoir is empty, or the washer pump will be dam‐
The LED in the steering-column lever is illumi‐
aged.◀
nated.
Disable the rain sensor in car washes Windscreen washer jets

Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic Both windscreen washer jets are automatically
car wash to prevent the wipers from being acti‐ heated* when the ignition is switched on.
vated inadvertently and damaged.◀
Fold-out position of the wipers
Rain sensor, sensitivity This is important, for example for replacing the
wiper blades or folding them out in the event of
frost.
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. If there is a risk of frost, make sure that the
wiper blades are not frozen.
Mobility
3. Press the wiper lever upwards beyond the

resistance point and hold it there for approx‐
imately three seconds until the wipers come
to a standstill in a nearly vertical position.
Turn the knurled wheel.
After folding the wipers in, the wiper system, see
Reference
page 66, must be reactivated.
67
Capacity
Driving Folding the wipers onto the windscreen
Before switching on the ignition, fold the Approximately 5 litres, 8.8 pints
wipers onto the windscreen, as otherwise dam‐
age can occur when the wipers are switched
on.◀ Automatic transmission with
1. Switch on ignition. Steptronic
2. Press the wiper lever downwards. The wip‐
ers move to the rest position and are opera‐
Transmission positions
tional once again.
D Drive, automatic position
Use this position for all normal driving. All for‐
Washer fluid ward gears are selected as necessary.
General R Reverse
Anti-freeze protection for washer fluid Engage this position only when the car is sta‐
tionary.
Anti-freeze is flammable. This is why it
should be kept away from naked flames.
N Neutral
Only store in the sealed original container and
Select this in a car wash, for example. The car
out of reach of children.
will be able to roll.
Comply with the instructions on the container.◀
With the ignition off, see page 61, transmission
position P is engaged automatically.
Reservoir for washer fluid
Topping up washer fluid P Park
Only top up washer fluid when the engine Engage this position only when the car is sta‐
has cooled down and then fully close the lid to tionary. The driven wheels are locked.
prevent washer fluid from making contact with
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
hot engine components.
cally:
Otherwise, if the fluid is spilled, there is a risk of
▷ After stopping the engine in the radio ready
fire and personal safety is endangered.◀
state, see page 61, or ignition off, see
page 61, when position R or D is engaged.
▷ Position N is engaged and ignition is off.
▷ The driver’s seat belt is unfastened and the
driver’s door is opened when the vehicle is
stationary and transmission position R or D
is engaged.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum
All washer jets are supplied from one tank.
performance. Press the accelerator pedal down
When filling with water, to which anti-freeze has beyond the regular full-throttle position; resist‐
been added if required, always follow the man‐ ance will be felt.
ufacturer’s instructions.
Before topping up, mix the washer fluid to com‐
ply with the mixture ratio.
68
Engaging transmission positions Engaging P
Overview
▷ It is only possible to move from transmission
position P with the engine running and the
brake pressed.
▷ Before shifting from P or N when the vehicle
is stationary, first press the brake, otherwise
the desired gearshift will not be performed:
shiftlock.
Controls
Apply the brake until you are ready to
move off
Press button P.
Apply the brake until you are ready to move
off; this will prevent the car creeping when a
Sport program and M/S manual-shift
Driving hints
gear is selected.◀
mode
Engage D, R, N
Activating the Sport program
Navigation
Briefly press the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, possibly overcoming a resistance point. Press the selector lever out of position D to the
left.
When you let go of the selector lever, it returns
to the central position. DS is shown in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Activating M/S manual-shift mode

Press the selector lever out of position D to the
left.
Press the selector lever forwards or backwards.
Manual operation becomes active and the gear
is shifted.
Press the unlock button to: The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐
Mobility
▷ Engage R. ment cluster, for example M1.

▷ Shift from P. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
wards.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
wards.
Reference
69
Unlocking
Driving The gears are only shifted up or down with the
appropriate engine speed and road speed. If the 1. Open cover of the cupholder.
engine speed is too high, there are no downward
shifts.
The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐
ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in
use.
Switching off the Sport program/

manual operation
Press the selector lever to the right.
D is shown in the instrument cluster.
2. Tilt the cupholder insert backwards and re‐
move.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The gear position is displayed, for
example P.
Manual release and application of the

transmission interlock*
In the event of a power supply interruption, un‐
lock the transmission lockout manually, as oth‐
erwise the drive wheels are blocked and the ve‐ 3. Remove the floor mat of the cupholder.
hicle cannot be towed.
On unlocking, press the brake

When unlocking the transmission lockout
manually, press the brake, as otherwise the ve‐
hicle could begin to roll.◀
Only unlock the transmission lockout in the
event of a defect, for example when towing.
After parking the vehicle, engage the transmis‐
sion lockout again.
4. Use the screwdriver from the on-board tool
If the parking brake also has to be unlocked kit to unclip the cover panel and remove the
manually, comply with the following sequence: lock cylinder using the integrated key.
1. Protect the car against rolling.
2. Unlock the parking brake, see page 63, man‐
ually.
3. Unlock the transmission lockout manually.
70
5. Take the release tool from the on-board tool
kit.
Overview
Controls
6. Insert the release tool in the opening.
Driving hints
Navigation
7. Turn the release tool as far as it will go and
then press downwards. The transmission
lockout is unlocked and position P is no lon‐
ger engaged.
Locking the transmission lockout again

After parking the vehicle, engage the
transmission lockout again, as otherwise the ve‐
hicle could begin to roll.◀
Mobility
Locking
Pull out the release tool. The transmission in‐
terlock is locked again.
Reference
71
Displays
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 6 Outside temperature

2 Speedometer 7 Electronic displays
3 Indicator and warning lights 8 Kilometres, trip odometer
4 Revolution counter 9 Clock
5 Oil temperature 10 Display/reset kilometres
Odometer and trip distance recorder Outside temperature

▷ Odometer, arrow 1
Outside temperature warning
▷ Trip distance recorder, ar‐
row 2 If the display falls to +3 ℃/+37 ℉,
a signal sounds.
A message will appear on the in‐
Press the button. strument cluster.
▷ When the ignition is off, the There is an increased risk of black
time, outside temperature ice.
and odometer are displayed.
Danger of icy roads
▷ When the ignition is on, the
Even at temperatures above +3 ℃/+37 ℉,
trip distance recorder is re‐
there can be an increased danger of icy roads.
set.
72
To reduce the risk of an accident, you should al‐ Engine oil temperature
ways drive carefully in potentially icy areas, for
Overview
example bridges and shaded roads.◀
Time
The time is shown at the bottom
of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format,
Controls
see page 77.
Date ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is located at a low

The date is displayed on the in‐ temperature value. Drive at moderate en‐
strument cluster. gine and road speeds.
Driving hints
Setting the time date and date ▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
format, see page 78. is located in the centre or right-hand half of
the temperature display.
Revolution counter ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is located at a high
temperature value. Switch the engine off im‐
mediately and allow to cool down.
Navigation
Check engine oil level, see page 273.
Current fuel consumption

Shows the momentary fuel con‐
sumption. It is possible to check
the economy and environmental
compatibility of your driving style.
It is vital to avoid engine speeds in the red warn‐
ing zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine. Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Coolant temperature 1. "Settings"
If the coolant and therefore the engine become 2. "Info display"
too hot, a warning message is displayed. 3. "Additional indicators"
Check coolant level, see page 274.
Mobility
The bar gauge for the current fuel consumption

is shown in the instrument cluster.
Reference
73
Energy recuperation
Displays 2. "Info display"
Kinetic energy of the vehicle is 3. "Additional indicators"
converted into electrical energy
in coasting mode. The vehicle
battery is partially charged and
fuel consumption can be low‐
ered.
Fuel gauge
The range is shown in the instrument cluster.
Selection lists in the

instrument cluster
Principle
Petrol engine:
Fuel tank capacity is approximately 82 litres,
18 gal
Diesel engine:
Fuel tank capacity is approximately 80 litres,
17.6 gal
Vehicle incline can lead to fluctuations in the
display.
Notes on refuelling, see page 264.
The buttons and the knurled wheel on the steer‐
ing wheel, as well as the display in the instru‐
Range ment cluster, can be used to operate the
Once the reserve level is reached: following:
▷ A message appears briefly. ▷ Current audio source
▷ The on-board computer ▷ Repeat dialling for telephone*
shows the remaining range. ▷ Activating the voice control system*
Below a range of approximately 50 km, 30 miles,
the message is displayed permanently.
Refuel in good time
If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles,
you should refuel as soon as possible, or engine
functions may be impaired and damage may oc‐
cur.◀
Displaying the range

1. "Settings"
74
Activating the list and entering a ▷ Date*.
setting
Overview
▷ Speed Limit Information*
▷ Time of arrival*.
After entering the distance or with active
route guidance in the navigation system
▷ Distance to destination*
After entering the distance or with active
Controls
route guidance in the navigation system
▷ Arrow display of the navigation system*.
With activated route guidance in the naviga‐
On the right-hand side of the steering wheel, tion system
press a button or turn the knurled wheel to ac‐
Driving hints
tivate the corresponding list. Setting displays for the information
Use the knurled wheel to enter the desired set‐ display
ting. It can be set which displays of the on-board
computer can be called up on the information
display in the instrument cluster.
On-board computer 1. "Settings"
Navigation
2. "Info display"
Calling up information on the
information display 3. Select the desired displays.
Press the on-board computer button on the turn
Detailed information
indicator lever.
Information is displayed on the information dis‐ Range
play in the instrument cluster.
Displays the estimated range available with the
remaining fuel.
Overview of the information
It is calculated based on your driving style over
Repeated pressing of the button the last 30 km, 20 miles. If the fuel provides a
on the turn indicator lever shows
Mobility
range of less than 80 km, 45 miles, the colour of

the information on the informa‐ the display changes.
tion display in the following order:
▷ Range Average fuel consumption
▷ Average fuel consumption Calculated for the period since the engine was
▷ Average speed last started.
Reference
75
Average speed Arrival time
Displays
The calculation ignores any stationary periods The estimated time of arrival is
where the engine was switched off. displayed if the following was en‐
tered before the start of the jour‐
Resetting average values ney:
Keep the button pressed on the turn indicator ▷ A distance in the on-board
lever. computer.
▷ A destination in the navigation system*.
Distance to destination
A precondition is that the time is correctly set.
The remaining distance to the destination is dis‐
played if (before the start of the journey): Speed Limit Information*
▷ A distance was entered in the on-board Description of speed limit information, see
computer. page 82.
▷ A destination was entered in the navigation
The following displays are possi‐
system*.
ble:
The distance to the destination is automat‐
▷ Speed limit exists.
ically adopted.
▷ Speed limit cancelled - for
The distance entered in the on-board com‐
German motorways.
puter is overwritten after approximately
500 m, approximately 1640 ft. ▷ Speed limit information unavailable.
A speed limit is displayed.
Setting the distance to the destination
manually
Speed limit
1. "Vehicle information" Display of a speed limit where a warning is to be
2. "On-board computer" issued when reached.
3. "To dest." Repeat warning if the set speed limit was un‐
dershot once by at least 5 km/h/3 mph.
Displaying, setting or altering limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired distance

is displayed.
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is

displayed.
76
The speed limit is saved. "Reset automatically": all values are reset if
the vehicle is at a standstill for approximately
Overview
Activating/deactivating the speed limit four hours.
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
Controls
Saving actual speed as limit value
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
Driving hints
Display on the control display
Display the on-board computer or journey com‐
The current driving speed is saved as the puter on the control display.
limit.
1. "Vehicle information"
Resetting values 2. "On-board computer" or "Journey
Values for the average fuel consumption and computer"
Navigation
speed can be reset.
Keep the on-board computer button pressed on Resetting fuel consumption and speed
the turn indicator lever. 1. "Vehicle information"
2. "On-board computer"
Journey computer
3. "Cons." or "Speed"
Two types of on-board computer are available.
▷ "On-board computer": values can be reset
any number of times.
▷ "Journey computer": values deliver an over‐
view of the current trip.
Resetting the journey computer

2. "Journey computer"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the control

display
Mobility
Time
Setting the time zone*

3. "Reset": all values are reset. 1. "Settings"
Reference
77
Setting the time format
Displays 2. "Clock/Date"
1. "Settings"
2. "Clock/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is saved.
Date
Setting the date

3. "Time zone"
1. "Settings"
4. Select desired time zone
2. "Clock/Date"
The time zone is saved.
3. "Date:"
Setting the time 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
1. "Settings" displayed.
2. "Clock/Date" 5. Press the controller.
6. Make the setting for month and year accord‐
ingly.
The date is saved.
Setting the date format

1. "Settings"
2. "Clock/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
3. "Time:"
The date format is saved.

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
Language
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes Setting the language
are displayed. To set the language on the control display:
1. "Settings"
The time is saved.
78
2. "Language/Units" Units of measure
Overview
Setting the units of measure
To set the units of measure for fuel consump‐
tion, distance covered/remaining range, and
temperature:
1. "Settings"
Controls
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
3. "Language:"
Driving hints
4. Select the desired unit.
Navigation
4. Select the desired language. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
rently in use.
Brightness
Setting the speech dialogue
Adjusting brightness
Toggle between a standard and short dialogue.
Adjusting brightness of control display:
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
2. "Control display"
3. "Speech mode:"
3. "Brightness"
4. Select the desired dialogue.
Mobility
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is obtained.
rently in use.
Reference
79
Displays Depending on the lighting conditions, bright‐ Essential maintenance routines and any
ness control might not be immediately recog‐ statutory inspections required are dis‐
nisable. played.
Service requirements
Display
The distance to be driven or time
to the next maintenance is dis‐
played briefly after switching on
the ignition.
The current service require‐ 4. Select an entry to display more detailed in‐
ments can be read by the service advisor from formation.
the remote control.
The data regarding the service status of your Symbols
vehicle or regarding legally prescribed inspec‐
tions are transferred automatically before the Symbols Description
due date to the Service Centre, Automatic Serv‐
No servicing is currently nee‐
ice Notification, see page 239.
ded.
Detailed information on service Servicing or an inspection re‐

requirements quired by law is due soon.
More detailed information on the scope of main‐ Please schedule a service ap‐
tenance can be displayed on the control display. pointment.
1. "Vehicle information" Servicing is overdue.
2. "Vehicle status"
Entering deadlines
Enter deadlines for prescribed statutory inspec‐
tions.
Ensure that the date and time of the vehicle are
set correctly.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
80
3. "Service required" Indicator and warning lights
Overview
Controls
4. "§ vehicle inspection" Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a
5. "Date:" variety of combinations and colours.
Driving hints
6. Make the settings. When the engine starts or the ignition is
switched on, the functionality of some lights is
7. Confirm.
briefly checked.
The date input is saved.
Text messages
Automatic Service notification
Text messages and symbols in the instrument
Data on the service status or on statutory in‐
cluster explain the meaning of a Check Control
spections for the vehicle are transmitted to the
Navigation
message.
Service Centre automatically when a service or
inspection is imminent.
Supplementary text messages
It can be checked when the Service Centre was
Via Check Control, you can call up additional in‐
notified.
formation on the control display, including the
1. "Vehicle information" cause of the fault and any action required.
2. "Vehicle status" In the case of urgent messages, the text is dis‐
3. Call up "Options". played automatically.
4. "Last Teleservice Call"

Hiding Check Control messages
Check Control
Principle
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys‐
tems.
A Check Control message is shown as a com‐
bination of indicator and warning lights and text
Press the on-board computer button on the turn
Mobility
messages in the instrument cluster and Head-

indicator lever.
Up Display*.
If applicable, the text message shown in the con‐ ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
trol display is accompanied by an additional played permanently and remain until the
acoustic sound. fault has been repaired. If there are a number
of malfunctions simultaneously, the mes‐
Reference
sages are displayed in succession.
81
Displays These messages can be hidden for approx‐ The system is no substitute for your personal
imately eight seconds. They are then dis‐ assessment of the traffic situation.
played again automatically. The Speed Limit Information supports the driver
▷ Other Check Control messages are auto‐ and does not replace the human eye.◀
matically hidden after approximately 20 sec‐
onds. They remain saved and can be dis‐ Switching on/off
played again. 1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
Displaying Check Control messages
saved in memory 3. "Speed limit information"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
If Speed Limit Information is switched on, this

can be displayed through the on-board com‐
puter to the information display in the instru‐
ment cluster.
4. Select a text message.
Display
Messages displayed at the end of The following appears in the in‐
a journey strument cluster:
Malfunctions which have been indicated during ▷ Speed limit exists.
a journey are displayed again when you switch
▷ Speed limit cancelled - for
off the ignition.
German motorways.
▷ Speed limit information unavailable.
Speed Limit Information* The Speed Limit Information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-Up-Display, see page 123.
Principle
Speed Limit Information shows the currently System limits
valid maximum speed in the instrument cluster. The function may be disabled or inaccurate un‐
The camera in the foot of the interior mirror der certain conditions, for example:
monitors the road signs at the side of the road ▷ In thick fog and heavy rain or snow.
and takes account of information from the navi‐ ▷ If road signs are obscured.
gation system.
▷ If the vehicle is moving too close to the ve‐
For example, in built-up areas the valid speed is hicle ahead.
displayed, even without road signs.
▷ With bright light from oncoming traffic.
Personal assessment
82
▷ When the windscreen in front of the interior
mirror is covered with condensation, dirt,
Overview
stickers, labels, etc.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ If there are deviations in relation to the nav‐
igation, for example due to changes in the
road routing.
Controls
▷ On overtaking buses or trucks with speed
stickers.
Camera
Driving hints
Navigation
The camera is located on the front side of the
inside mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior mirror free.
Mobility
Reference
83
Lights
Lights
Overview Welcome lights

On parking the vehicle, leave the switch in posi‐
tion or : the side lights and interior light
illuminate briefly when unlocking the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome lights

1. "Settings"
2. "Lights"
3. "Welcome light"
1 Rear fog lights*

2 Front fog lights
3 Automatic driving lights control/Adaptive
Headlights*/high-beam assistance*/wel‐
come light
4 Lights off/daytime driving lights*
5 Side lights
6 Low-beam headlights/welcome light
7 Instrument lighting rently in use.
Headlight courtesy delay feature

Side lights/low-beam If the headlight flasher is activated after switch‐
headlights, driving lights ing off the ignition, with the lights switched off,
control the low-beam headlights illuminate and remain
on for a certain time.
Side lights
Switch position : the vehicle is illuminated Setting the duration
all around, for example when parking. 1. "Settings"
You should not leave the side lights on for longer 2. "Lights"
periods of time, since the battery could dis‐ 3. "Home lights: s"
charge and you might not have enough power to
start the engine.
To park, it is better to switch on the one-sided
parking light, see page 85.
Low-beam headlights
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: low-beam headlights are illuminated.
4. Set the duration.
84
The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ Parking lights
rently in use.
Overview
Automatic driving lights control
Switch position : depending on ambient light
conditions, the system switches the low-beam
headlights off and on automatically, for example
in a tunnel, at twilight and in rain or snow. The
Controls
indicator light in the instrument cluster is illumi‐
nated.
The headlights may also come on when the sun The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
is sitting low in a blue sky.
The low-beam headlights always remain on Switch on
Driving hints
when the fog lights are switched on. With the ignition switched off, push the lever
Personal responsibility upwards or downwards beyond the resistance
point for approximately 2 seconds.
The driving lights control function is no
substitute for your individual judgement of when
Switching off
it is necessary to switch on the lights.
Press the lever briefly in the opposite direction
The sensors are unable, for instance, to recog‐
as far as the resistance point.
Navigation
nise fog or hazy weather. In such situations,
switch on the lights manually to avoid any safety
risk.◀
Adaptive Headlights*
Daytime driving lights*
Principle
The daytime driving lights illuminate in switch
Adaptive Headlights is a variable headlight con‐
position 0 or .
trol system that makes it possible to illuminate
the road surface responsively.
Activating/deactivating
The beams from the headlights follow the road
1. "Settings"
ahead on the basis of the steering angle and
2. "Lights" other parameters.
3. "Daytime driving lights" During sharp turns at speeds up to approxi‐
mately 70 km/h, 44 mph, for example in hairpin
bends or when cornering, a cornering light is
added that illuminates the inside area of the
bend.
Depending on the speed, the variable light dis‐
tribution ensures even better illumination of the
roadway.
Mobility
The light distribution is automatically adapted to

the speed. The city light is active as of a speed
The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ of less than 50 km/h, 30 mph. The motorway
rently in use. light is switched on at a speed higher than
110 km/h, 68 mph after approximately 30 sec‐
onds or as of a speed of 140 km/h, 87 mph.
Reference
85
Controls Activating high-beam assistance
Lights
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
A cornering light is activated automatically de‐
pending on the steering angle or use of the turn
indicators.
So as not to dazzle oncoming traffic, the adap‐
tive cornering light is shown as a status on the
front seat passenger side. 1. Turn the light switch to position or
When reversing, only the cornering light is active .
and illuminates the zone on the outside of the 2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever,
bend. arrow.
The indicator light in the instrument
Adaptive Headlight beam throw cluster is illuminated.
adjustment
When the lights are on, the beam is dip‐
The adaptive headlight beam throw adjustment ped and returned to full beam automatically.
is a form of light distribution adapted to the
The system responds to light from oncoming
course and shape of the road.
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
The light distribution is lowered on humps so equate illumination, for example in built-up
that drivers of oncoming vehicles are not as dis‐ areas.
turbed by glare, and raised in hollows for a longer
visual range. Raising and dipping manually
Malfunction
A message is displayed.
Adaptive Headlights are faulty or have failed.
Have the system checked as soon as possible.
High-beam assistance*
Principle ▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.
When the lights are on, this system switches the
▷ High-beam headlights off / headlight flasher,
high-beam headlights on and off automatically.
arrow 2.
This process is controlled by a sensor on the
front of the interior mirror. The assistant ensures To reactivate high-beam assistance, press the
that the high-beam is switched on whenever the button on the turn indicator lever.
traffic situation allows. You can also control the
lights yourself at any time and switch them on System limits
and off as usual. Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistance cannot replace
the personal decision to use the high beam. In
such situations you should dip the headlights
86
manually in order not to create a safety haz‐ Press the button. The green indicator
ard.◀
Overview
light is illuminated.
In the following situations, the system will not If automatic driving lights control, see page 85,
operate or its operation will be impaired and your has been activated, the low-beam headlights il‐
intervention may be required: luminate automatically when the front fog lights
▷ During extremely unfavourable weather are switched on.
conditions such as fog or heavy precipita‐
tion. Guiding fog lights*
Controls
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such In switch position , a guide fog light for a
as pedestrians, cyclists or horseback riders wider light distribution is also activated up to a
or carts, and when trains or ships are close speed of 110 km/h, 68 mph.
to the road, or when game are passing
across the road. Rear fog light*
Driving hints
▷ On narrow bends, steep uphill or downhill The low-beam headlights or front fog lights
gradients, at traffic junctions or if your view must be switched on.
of oncoming vehicles on a motorway is ob‐
Press the button. The yellow indicator
structed.
light is illuminated.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and where there are very
reflective signs.
Navigation
▷ At low road speeds.
Instrument lighting
▷ When the windscreen in front of the interior
mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, Adjusting
You can adjust the brightness of
the instrument lighting only when
Camera the side lights or the low-beam
headlights are switched on.
The lighting intensity can be set
using the knurled wheel.
Interior light
General
The interior light, the footwell lights, door entry
The camera is located on the front side of the
lighting and the courtesy lighting are controlled
inside mirror.
automatically.
Keep the area in front of the interior mirror free.
The brightness of some equipment is influenced
by the knurled wheel for the instrument lighting.
Mobility
Fog lights
Front fog lights*
The side lights or low-beam headlights must be
switched on.
Reference
87
Lights
1 Interior light
2 Reading light
Switching the interior light on and off

manually
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approximately three seconds.
To cancel this state: press the button.
Reading lights
Press the button.
There are reading lights located at the front and

in the rear beside the interior lights.
88
Security
Overview
Airbags
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Head airbags
2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Side airbag
Front airbags Information for optimal protective effect of

Front airbags protect the driver and front pas‐ the airbags
senger in the event of a head-on collision where ▷ Keep your distance from the airbags.
the action of the seat belts alone would be in‐
▷ Always grip the steering wheel on the rim,
sufficient.
with your hands in the 3 o’clock and
9 o’clock positions, to minimise the risk of
Side airbags
injury to the hands or arms in the event of the
In a side-on crash, the side airbag supports the airbag being triggered.
upper body from the side.
▷ No other persons, pets or objects should be
held or permitted to remain between the air‐
Head airbags
bag and yourself.
The head airbag supports the head in the event
▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the front
Mobility
of a side-on collision.
passenger’s side as a tray.
Protective effect ▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen in the
area of the passenger’s side free, i.e. do not
Airbags are not activated by every collision, for
attach adhesive foil or covers and do not fit
example not in more minor accidents and rear-
brackets, for example for navigation devices
end collisions.
Reference
or mobile phones.
89
Security ▷ Make sure that the front passenger adopts Any careless or unskilled interference with the
a correct seated position, i.e. leaves his or system could lead to its failure or to accidental
her feet in the footwell and does not rest feet triggering with the risk of injury.◀
or legs on the instrument panel, otherwise
he/she could sustain leg injuries in the event Key switch for front passenger
of the front airbag being triggered. airbags*
▷ Do not fit seat covers, cushions or other ob‐
jects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats.
▷ Do not hang items of clothing such as coats
or jackets over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag and do not
lean against the head airbag. Otherwise they
could be injured should the airbags deploy.
▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system. The front and side airbags for the front passen‐
ger can be deactivated and reactivated using the
▷ Do not dismantle the steering wheel.
integrated key from the remote control.
▷ Never attach any material to the airbag cov‐
ers with adhesive; never place material over
Deactivating the front passenger
them or modify them in any way.
airbags
▷ Do not modify individual components of the
Insert the key and press inwards
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
where necessary.
the covers on the steering wheel, instrument
panel, seats and roof posts as well as the While the key is pressed inwards,
sides of the roof lining.◀ turn it to the OFF position as far
as it will go. Once the stop posi‐
Even if all these instructions are complied with,
tion has been reached, remove the key.
depending on the circumstances in which an
accident occurs, certain injuries as a result of Key switch in end position
contact with the airbag cannot be entirely ruled Make sure that the key switch is in the cor‐
out. responding end position. Otherwise the airbags
The noise caused by the deployment of an air‐ are not activated/deactivated.◀
bag may lead to brief and generally temporary The front passenger airbags are deactivated.
hearing loss in vehicle occupants sensitive to
The driver’s airbags remain active.
noise.
If a child restraint system is no longer fitted in the
In the event of faults, taking the airbags out
front passenger’s seat, reactivate the front pas‐
of use and after they have been triggered
senger airbags so that they are triggered as in‐
Avoid touching the system’s components im‐ tended in the event of an accident.
mediately after it has been triggered, as there is
a risk of sustaining burns. Activating the front passenger airbags
Only commission your Service Centre or au‐ Insert the key and press inwards
thorised workshops with checking, repairing or where necessary.
dismantling and scrapping airbag generators, as
While the key is pressed inwards,
your Service Centre or authorised workshops
turn it to the ON position as far as
have the required legal permits for handling ex‐
plosives.
90
it will go. Once the stop position has been If a tyre loses pressure, its diameter changes.
reached, remove the key. This in turn alters the rotational speed of the
Overview
corresponding wheel. This is detected and re‐
Key switch in end position
ported as a flat tyre.
Make sure that the key switch is in the cor‐
responding end position. Otherwise the airbags Operating requirements
are not activated/deactivated.◀
The system must have been initialised with cor‐
The front passenger airbags are reactivated and rect tyre inflation pressure, otherwise reliable
Controls
can deploy correctly if the need arises. signalling of a flat tyre cannot be assured. Each
time the tyre pressure is adjusted or a tyre or
Indicator light for front passenger wheel is changed, initialise the system again.
airbags
System limits
Driving hints
Sudden tyre damage
No warning can be given of extreme, sud‐
den tyre failure caused by external factors.◀
A natural, even loss of pressure in all four tyres
that occurs over time is not detected. Conse‐
quently, check the tyre pressures at regular in‐
tervals.
Navigation
In the following situations, the system could be
The indicator light for the front passenger air‐ slow to respond or operate incorrectly:
bags shows the operating status of the front
▷ If the system has not been initialised.
passenger airbags.
▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery
After switching on the ignition, the light indi‐
surfaces.
cates whether the airbags are activated or de‐
activated. ▷ When driving enthusiastically, causing the
driven wheels to spin, high lateral accelera‐
▷ When front passenger air‐ tion.
bags are deactivated, the in‐
▷ Driving with snow chains*.
dicator light remains illumina‐
ted.
Status display
▷ When front passenger air‐
The current status of the run-flat indicator can
bags are activated, the indi‐
be shown on the control display, for example
cator light is not illuminated.
whether the run-flat indicator is active.
Run-flat indicator, RPA 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"
Principle
The status is displayed.
Mobility
The system does not measure the tyre pres‐

sures as such.
Initialising
It detects a pressure loss on the basis of a com‐
On initialisation, the current tyre pressures are
parison between the speeds at which the indi‐
stored as a reference for detection of a flat tyre.
vidual wheels rotate while the vehicle is in mo‐
The initialisation is started by confirming the
tion.
Reference
correct inflation pressures.
91
Security When driving with snow chains* fitted, do not 2. Fix the puncture.
initialise the system.
Run-flat tyres*
If a tyre has punctured you can continue your
2. "Vehicle status"
journey, driving at speeds up to a maximum of
3. "Confirm tyre pressure" 80 km/h, 50 mph.
4. Start the engine – do not drive off.
Do not continue a journey without run-flat
5. Start the initialisation with "Confirm tyre tyres
pressure".
Do not continue your journey if the vehicle is not
6. Drive off. equipped with run-flat tyres, otherwise a serious
Initialising is completed while the vehicle is in accident could occur.◀
motion; this process can be interrupted at any
time. Continuing a journey with a flat tyre
Initialising resumes automatically when you If you continue a journey with a flat tyre:
continue your journey.
1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steering
manoeuvres.
Indication of a flat tyre
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph
The yellow warning light and car symbol
any longer.
are illuminated. A message is shown on
the control display. An acoustic signal 3. As soon as you get an opportunity, check
also sounds. the tyre pressure in all four tyres.
There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
pressure. pressures, the run-flat indicator might not
have been initialised. In this case initialise
1. Reduce your speed and cautiously stop the the system.
car. Avoid violent or sudden braking and
Maximum possible distance with tyres entirely
steering manoeuvres.
deflated:
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
▷ With low load: 1 - 2 persons without luggage:
standard tyres* or run-flat tyres*.
approximately 150 km, approximately
The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, see 90 miles.
page 269, is the circle with the letters RSC
▷ At medium load: 2 persons, boot full, or
on the tyre sidewall.
4 persons without luggage: approximately
80 km, approximately 50 miles.
What to do in the event of a flat tyre
▷ With full load: 4 persons, boot full: approxi‐
Standard tyres* mately 50 km, 30 miles.
1. Identify the damaged tyre. In the case of minor damage, in particular to the
tyre tread surface, the distance that can be trav‐
Do this by checking the tyre pressure in all
elled can be extended.
four tyres.
For this purpose, after the message take the
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
next opportunity to inflate the damaged tyre to
pressures, the run-flat indicator might not
a maximum of 3.5 bar.
have been initialised. In this case initialise
the system. Do not reinitialise the run-flat indicator. In this
way, the existing message indicating the flat tyre
If it is not possible to identify, contact a Serv‐
continues to remind you that the tyre is dam‐
ice Centre.
92
aged. This procedure can be repeated several Press the button.
times.
Overview
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre ▷ On: LED is illuminated.
Drive with care and do not exceed a speed ▷ Off: LED turns off.
of 80 km/h, 50 mph. The system can issue warnings as of approxi‐
If tyre pressure has fallen, vehicle handling mately 65 km/h, 40 mph.
changes, for example reduced directional sta‐ The status is saved for the remote control cur‐
Controls
bility when braking, longer stopping distance rently in use.
and modified self-steering behaviour.◀
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre and Display
trailer
When a trailer is being towed, heavy trailers in
Driving hints
particular can start to snake. For this reason, do
not exceed 60 km/h, 35 mph, as otherwise there
is a danger that accidents might occur.◀
Final tyre failure
Vibration or loud noises while driving may
be an indication that the tyre has finally failed.
Reduce your speed and stop, otherwise sec‐
Navigation
tions of the tyre could become detached and ▷ Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated.
cause an accident. Do not drive the car any fur‐ ▷ Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane boundary
ther; contact your Service Centre instead.◀ line has been detected and warnings can be
issued.
Lane departure warning* Output of the warning
If the vehicle leaves the driving lane and a lane
Principle boundary line is detected, the steering wheel
This system issues warnings as of approxi‐ starts to vibrate.
mately 65 km/h, 40 mph if the vehicle is about to
If the turn indicator is set before changing lanes,
leave the driving lane on roads with lane boun‐
no warning is issued.
dary lines.
The steering wheel starts to vibrate slightly. Cancellation of the warning
The system does not issue a warning if the driver The warning is cancelled:
indicates before leaving the driving lane.
▷ Automatically after approximately
three seconds.
Switching on/off
▷ On returning to the correct lane.
▷ With strong braking.
▷ On indicating.
Mobility
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system is no substitute for your per‐
sonal assessment of the road ahead and the
Reference
traffic situation.
93
Lane change warning*
Security If a warning is issued, do not move the steering
wheel in an unnecessarily violent manner, as
otherwise you could lose control of the vehi‐ Principle
cle.◀
The function can be restricted, for example in
the following situations:
▷ In thick fog and heavy rain or snow.
▷ With worn, poorly visible, merging/separat‐
ing or ambiguous boundary lines, for exam‐
ple in areas where there are road works.
▷ If boundary lines are covered by snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads. Two radar sensors under the rear bumper mon‐
itor the area behind and beside the vehicle as of
▷ If the boundary lines are not white.
approximately 50 km/h, 30 mph.
▷ If boundary lines are obscured.
The system indicates when vehicles are in the
▷ If the vehicle is moving too close to the ve‐ blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from the
hicle ahead. rear on an adjacent lane, arrow 2.
▷ With bright light from oncoming traffic. The light in the body of the exterior mirror comes
▷ When the windscreen in front of the interior on dimmed.
mirror is covered with condensation, dirt,
Before changing lanes with the turn indicator
switched on, the system issues a warning the
above situations.
Malfunctions
The light in the housing of the exterior mirror
Steering wheel vibration flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Frequent triggering of the steering wheel vibra‐

Switching on/off
tion leads to the system overheating.
Lane departure warning is deactivated.
Allow the system to cool down and re-enable by
pressing the button.
Camera
Press the button.

The system can issue warnings as of approxi‐
The camera is located on the front side of the mately 50 km/h, 30 mph.
inside mirror. The status is saved for the remote control cur‐
Keep the area in front of the interior mirror free. rently in use.
94
Display Malfunctions
Overview
Steering wheel vibration
Frequent triggering of the steering wheel vibra‐
tion leads to the system overheating.
Lane change warning is disabled.
Allow the system to cool down and re-enable by
Controls
Radar sensors
Information level
The dimmed light in the mirror housing indicates
Driving hints
when vehicles are in the blind spot or are ap‐
proaching from the rear.
Warning
If the turn indicator is set while the vehicle is in
the critical area, the steering wheel vibrates
briefly and the light in the mirror housing flashes
Navigation
The radar sensors are located under the rear
brightly.
bumper.
The warning is terminated when indicating is
completed or the other vehicle has left the crit‐
ical area.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or covered with ice.
System limits ▷ If labels have been attached to the bumper.
Personal responsibility ▷ When towing a trailer.
The system is no substitute for your per‐ If the function is restricted, a message is dis‐
sonal assessment of the traffic situation. played.
If a warning is issued, do not move the steering
wheel in an unnecessarily violent manner, as
otherwise you could lose control of the vehi‐ Dynamic brake lights*
cle.◀
The function can be restricted in the following Principle
situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is
very much higher than that of your own
speed.
Mobility
▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.
▷ Normal braking: brake lights illuminate.

Reference
▷ Severe braking: brake lights flash.
95
Security Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill,
the hazard warning system is activated.
Deactivating the hazard warning system:
▷ Press the accelerator.
▷ Press the hazard warning system button.
96
Driving stability control systems
Overview
Anti-lock Brake System, ABS Adapting driving style to the prevailing
conditions
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the
brakes are applied. It is therefore the driver’s responsibility to adopt
a suitable driving style in every situation.
Steering control is retained even in the event of
Controls
full braking, enhancing active road safety. Not even DSC can overcome the laws of phys‐
ics.
ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is
started. Do not limit the additional safety afforded by this
system by taking driving risks.◀
Driving hints
Brake assist Deactivate DSC: DSC OFF
DSC can be deactivated. You do this by activat‐
When the brake is pressed quickly, this system ing the DSC OFF program.
automatically applies maximum braking power
assistance. With full braking, this keeps the This is done by Driving Dynamic Control, see
braking distance as short as possible. It also page 100.
makes full use of the advantages offered by
ABS. Indicator and warning lights
Navigation
Maintain pressure on the brake during the entire If indicator light is flashing: DSC is reg‐
brake application. ulating the acceleration and braking
forces.
If indicator light is illuminated: DSC has failed.
Adaptive brake assist
In conjunction with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brake responds even Dynamic Traction Control,
more quickly when braking in critical situations. DTC
See also forward alert, see page 110.
Principle
The DTC system is a variant of the DSC opti‐
Dynamic Stability Control, mised for forward momentum.
DSC In particular road conditions, for example roads
on which snow has not been cleared, the system
Principle ensures maximum forward momentum but limi‐
DSC prevents the driven wheels losing traction ted driving stability.
when you pull away from rest or accelerate. Therefore, drive with the appropriate caution.
DSC is also able to detect unstable driving con‐ In the following exceptional situations it may be
ditions such as loss of traction at the rear or ve‐ best to activate DTC for a short time:
Mobility
hicle slip over the front wheels. DSC reduces ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
engine output and applies the brakes at individ‐ snow-covered roads.
ual wheels, helping, within the limits imposed by
▷ If the car has to be rocked out of or started
the laws of physics, to keep the car safely on
in deep snow or on a loose surface.
course.
▷ Driving with snow chains.
Reference
97
Deactivating/activating Dynamic
Traction Control, DTC
The system can be deactivated/activated in the
programs TRACTION and SPORT+ of the Driv‐
ing Dynamic Control, see page 100.
xDrive*
xDrive is the four-wheel drive system available ▷ Press the rocker switch upwards until the
in your vehicle. The combination of xDrive and resistance point is reached: the speed is in‐
DSC further optimises traction and driving dy‐ creased in increments.
namics. The xDrive four-wheel drive system dis‐
▷ Press the rocker switch upwards beyond the
tributes the acceleration forces variably to the
resistance point: the speed continues to in‐
front and rear axles based on the driving situa‐
crease as long as the rocker switch is
tion and the condition of the road.
pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch downwards until the
Hill Descent Control HDC* resistance point is reached: the speed is de‐
creased in increments.
The Hill Descent Control function automatically
▷ Press the rocker switch downwards until the
regulates the speed when driving along steep
resistance point is reached: when driving
inclines. The vehicle moves at a speed approxi‐
forwards, the speed is reduced to approxi‐
mately twice that of walking speed, without the
mately 10 km/h, 6 mph. When driving back‐
driver having to brake.
wards, it is reduced to approximately 6 km/
You can activate HDC at speeds under approx‐ h, 4 mph.
imately 35 km/h, 22 mph. When driving downhill
at speeds under approximately 35 km/h, 22 mph Activating HDC
the vehicle reduces the speed to a constant level
of more than twice that of walking speed.
While the brakes are pressed manually, the sys‐
tem switches to standby. As a result, system
braking does not take place.
Increasing or reducing speed

Using the rocker switch for Cruise Control on the
steering wheel, you can set a speed of between
approximately 6 km/h, 4 mph to approxi‐
Press the button. The LED above the but‐
mately 25 km/h, 15 mph. You can vary the speed
ton is illuminated.
of the vehicle by pressing lightly on the acceler‐
ator.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again. The LED turns off.
HDC is automatically deactivated at
speeds above approximately 60 km/h, 37 mph.
98
Display in the instrument cluster Depending on the condition of the road and the
driving style, this enhances driving dynamics
Overview
The speedometer shows the se‐
lected set speed. and driving comfort.
▷ Green: the system brakes the

Programs
vehicle.
The system provides three different programs.
▷ Orange: system in standby.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Malfunction Dynamic Control, see page 100.
Controls
A message will appear on the instrument clus‐
SPORT
ter. HDC is not available, for example due to a
high brake temperature. Resolute sports configuration of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater agility when driving.
Driving hints
Dynamic Drive* NORMAL
Balanced configuration between the COM‐
Principle FORT and SPORT programs.
Dynamic Drive reduces the side incline of the
vehicle body that occurs when cornering at high COMFORT
speed or taking sudden evasive action. Comfort-oriented configuration of the shock ab‐
sorbers for optimal travel comfort.
Navigation
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
creased in all driving conditions. The system is
based on active stabilisers on the front and rear
axles and it regulates continuously in fractions Integral Active Steering*
of a second while the vehicle is in motion.
Principle
Programs The integral active steering is a combination of
The system provides two different programs. active steering and rear-wheel steering.
The programs can be selected via the Driving Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
Dynamic Control, see page 100. wheels depending on speed and based on
steering wheel movement.
SPORT At speeds up to approximately 60 km/h, 37 mph,
Resolute sports configuration for greater agility for example on cornering, the steering angle is
when driving. reinforced, i.e. the steering becomes more di‐
rect.
NORMAL The rear-wheel steering increases agility in that
Comfort-oriented configuration for optimal the rear wheels are turned slightly in the oppo‐
travel comfort. site direction to the front wheels.
With increasing speed, on the other hand, the
steering angle is gradually reduced.
Mobility
Dynamic Damper Control* The rear wheels are turned in the same direction
as the front wheels.
Principle In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
The system reduces unwanted vehicle move‐ Steering can stabilise the vehicle by specifically
ments when a dynamic driving style is used or steering the front and rear wheels before the
on uneven roads.
Reference
driver intervenes, for example when braking on
99
Self-levelling suspension*
Driving stability control systems road conditions that are different on the left and
right.
Principle
Initialising
The self-levelling suspension ensures that the
In rare cases, it can be necessary to initialise the vehicle height and ground clearance remain
Integral Active Steering. constant. To achieve this, the height of the ve‐
A warning light is illuminated. A mes‐ hicle at the rear axle is maintained at a specified
sage is shown on the control display. target level under all load conditions.
The system ensures consistent comfort, as the
1. With the engine running, turn evenly a num‐ full spring travel is kept constant in all driving
ber of times to the left and right up to the situations.
steering lock until the warning light turns off.
2. If the warning light does not extinguish after Malfunction
approximately six steering wheel move‐ A message is shown on the control display. The
ments or the steering wheel is at an angle, self-levelling suspension is malfunctioning. The
have the system checked. vehicle handling has changed or driving comfort
is noticeably restricted. Call into the nearest
Operation with snow chains Service Centre.
During operation with snow chains, see
page 270, make sure that the rear-wheel steer‐
ing is disabled. Driving Dynamic Control*
Programs Principle
The system provides two different programs. Driving Dynamic Control can be used to adapt
The programs can be selected via the Driving the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Various pro‐
Dynamic Control, see page 100. grams can be selected, activated via the two
Driving Dynamic Control buttons.
SPORT
Operation of the programs
Resolute sports configuration of the Integral Ac‐
tive Steering for greater agility when driving.
Press the button Program
NORMAL DSC OFF

Balanced configuration of the Integral Active TRACTION
Steering for optimal travel comfort.
SPORT+
Malfunction SPORT
In the event of a malfunction, greater steering NORMAL
wheel movements are necessary; at high COMFORT*
speeds the vehicle response is more sensitive
to steering wheel movements.
In the case of Dynamic Damper Control*, the
The stabilising intervention may also be deacti‐ lower button is labelled with COMFORT.
vated.
Drive cautiously and think well ahead. Automatic program change
Have the system checked. In the following situations, there is an automatic
switch to NORMAL:
100
▷ Failure of the Integral Active Steering*. The indicator light for DSC in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
Overview
▷ Failure of the Dynamic Damper Control*.
▷ In the event of a flat tyre.
Deactivating TRACTION
DSC OFF Press the button again.
Driving stability is limited on accelerating and TRACTION and the DSC indicator light
cornering. extinguish.
Controls
Stabilising interventions of the Integral Active
Steering* now only come from the rear-wheel Indicator and warning lights
steering. TRACTION is displayed in the revolution coun‐
To support the driving stability, activate DSC as ter if TRACTION is activated.
soon as possible.
If indicator light is illuminated: TRAC‐
Driving hints
TION has been activated.
Activating DSC OFF
Press and hold down the button - but
for no longer than approxi‐ SPORT+
mately 10 seconds - until the DSC indicator light Sporty driving with optimised chassis with re‐
in the instrument cluster is illuminated and DSC stricted driving stability.
OFF appears in the revolution counter.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
Navigation
The DSC system is switched off.
Driver assumes part of the task of stabilising the
vehicle.
Deactivating DSC OFF
Press the button. Activating SPORT+
The DSC and DSC OFF indicator lights Press the button until SPORT+ ap‐
turn off. pears in the revolution counter and the
indicator light for DSC is illuminated in the in‐
strument cluster.
Indicator and warning lights
DSC OFF is displayed in the revolution counter
if DSC OFF is activated. Indicator and warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed briefly in the revolution
If indicator light is illuminated: DSC OFF counter.
has been activated.
If indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic
Traction Control, DTC, is activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. Dy‐
namic Traction Control, DTC, is switched on. SPORT
Driving stability is limited on accelerating and Resolute Sports configuration of the chassis for
cornering. greater agility when driving, with maximum driv‐
Mobility
ing stability.
Activating TRACTION The program can be configured individually.
Press the button. The configuration is saved for the remote con‐
TRACTION is displayed in the revolu‐ trol currently in use.
tion counter.
Reference
101
Activating SPORT COMFORT*
Press the button repeatedly until Comfort-oriented configuration of the shock ab‐
SPORT is displayed in the revolution sorbers for optimal travel comfort with maximum
counter. driving stability.
Configuring SPORT Activating COMFORT

If the display is activated on the control display, Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
see page 102, the Sport program can be set to FORT is displayed in the revolution
individual requirements. counter.
After activating the Sport program, select

"Configure SPORT mode" on the screen that Displays in the instrument cluster
appears and configure the program.
Selected program
The Sport program can also be configured be‐
fore it is activated: The selected program is dis‐
played in the revolution counter.
1. "Settings"
2. "SPORT mode"
Program selection
3. Configure the program.

This configuration is called up when the Sport
program is activated.
On pushing the button, a list of programs that
can be selected is displayed.
NORMAL
For a balanced configuration with maximum
driving stability. Display on the control display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
Activating NORMAL the control display.
Press the button repeatedly until the Make the following setting:
program display in the revolution coun‐
1. "Settings"
ter is deactivated.
In certain situations, there is an automatic switch

into the NORMAL program, automatic program
change, see page 100.
102
2. "Control display"
Overview
Controls
3. "Vehicle dynamic info"
Driving hints
Navigation
Drive-off assistent
The system provides support when driving off
on upward inclines. It is not necessary to use the
parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by pressing the foot

brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
The car is held for approximately 2 seconds after
the foot brake has been released.
Depending on the vehicle’s load or when towing
a trailer, the vehicle may roll backwards a little.
Drive off immediately
After releasing the foot brake, move off
swiftly, as the starting assistance will no longer
hold the car after approximately 2 seconds and
Mobility
it will start to roll back.◀

Reference
103
Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Active Cruise Control with Overview of buttons

Stop & Go function, ACC*
Principle
This system can be used to select a desired
speed which the vehicle automatically maintains
when the road ahead of you is clear.
Within the limits of its capability, the system au‐
tomatically adapts the car’s speed to that of a
slower vehicle in front of you.
1 System on/off, interrupt
You can vary the distance maintained by the
system between your car and the car in front. 2 Resume speed
It is dependent on speed for safety reasons. 3 Set speed*
To maintain distance, the system automatically 4 Reduce distance
decelerates, brakes slightly if necessary, and 5 Maintaining/saving, changing the current
accelerates again when the vehicle in front of speed
you starts to move more quickly. 6 Increase distance
If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill, the
system can comprehend this within the given Switching the Cruise Control on/off and
framework. If the vehicle ahead moves off again interrupting
from the standstill, your vehicle is also acceler‐
ated again if you have set the corresponding Switch on
commands. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Even if it takes slightly longer before the vehicle
ahead moves off, the BMW can be automatically Indicator lights are illuminated in the instrument
accelerated very easily. cluster and the speedometer marker is set to the
As soon as the road in front of you is clear, the current speed.
car accelerates to your desired speed. Cruise Control can be used.
This speed will also be maintained on downhill When cruise control is activated it is possible
slopes, but may be under-run on uphill slopes if that Dynamic Stability Control, DSC, see
engine output is insufficient. page 97, is also activated.
Switching off
Disabled or interrupted system
When the system is disabled or interrup‐
ted, intervene actively by braking and manoeu‐
vring the vehicle yourself, as otherwise there is
a danger that accidents might occur.◀
When switching off with the vehicle stationary,
press the brake at the same time.
104
Press the button. as otherwise there is a danger that accidents
might occur.◀
Overview
▷ When activated: press twice. Speed differences
▷ When interrupted: press once. High differences in speed to vehicles
ahead, for example when approaching a lorry at
The indicators extinguish. The saved desired
high speed or when another vehicle pulls out
speed and distance are deleted.
into your driving lane, cannot be neutralised by
the system.◀
Controls
Interrupting
When the system is activated, press the
button.
If you interrupt when the vehicle is stationary,

press the brake at the same time.
Driving hints
The system interrupts automatically if:
▷ The brake is applied.
▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control, DTC is activated
Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards or
or DSC is disabled.
downwards until the desired speed is set.
▷ DSC intervenes.
Navigation
With the system active, the speed that is then
▷ The vehicle is stationary and the seat belt shown is saved and will be achieved on a clear
and driver’s door are opened. road.
▷ The system does not detect any objects for ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
a lengthy period of time, for example on in‐ lightly towards the resistance point, the de‐
frequently driven roads without defined sired speed is increased or decreased by
boundaries. approximately 1 km/h, 1 mph.
▷ Due to dirty radar sensors. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
yond the resistance point, the desired speed
Maintaining speed, saving is increased or decreased to the next multi‐
Press the button*. ple of 10 km/h on the speedometer display.
Hold the rocker switch in one position to repeat
With the system switched on, the driven speed the corresponding action.
is maintained and saved as the desired speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in Spacing
the instrument cluster, Displays in the instru‐ Selecting the distance
ment cluster, see page 106.
Adapt the distance to traffic and weather
conditions as otherwise there is the risk of an
Maintaining/saving, changing the accident. Observe the prescribed safety dis‐
current speed tance.◀
Mobility
The current driving speed can also be main‐

tained and saved by pressing the rocker switch Reduce distance
without interruption.
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
Adapting the desired speed sired distance is set.
Adapt the desired speed to the traffic con‐
Reference
ditions and always be prepared to apply brakes,

105
Driving comfort The selected distance, see page 107, is dis‐ 3. Briefly depress the accelerator and press
played in the instrument cluster. the RES button or the rocker switch if the
vehicle ahead of you drives off.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐ Switching between Cruise Control
sired distance is set. with/without distance control
Traffic moving ahead
The selected distance, see page 107, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The Cruise Control does not react to traffic
travelling in front of you, but maintains the
Recalling the desired speed and stored speed. Bear this circumstance in mind
distance and react accordingly, as otherwise there is a
danger that accidents might occur.◀
While the vehicle is in motion Switching to Cruise Control:
With the system switched on, press the Press and hold the button or
button.
The saved speed value is deleted and can no Press and hold the button.
longer be called up in the following instances:
▷ When the system is switched off. To switch back to Active Cruise Control, briefly
▷ When the ignition is switched off. press one of the two buttons.
When the vehicle is at a standstill Displays in the instrument cluster

Before leaving the vehicle, secure it to pre‐
vent it rolling away
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. The car
could otherwise start to move.◀
▷ The system was braked to a complete stop
by the system:
Orange marking in the speedometer:
1 Display of desired speed
Vehicle ahead moves off: to accelerate
2 Indicator light
briefly depress the accelerator and press the
RES button or the rocker switch. The mark‐ 3 Vehicle distance
ing becomes green again and your vehicle 4 Vehicle symbol
follows the vehicle ahead. 5 Brief status display
Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that
the vehicle ahead of you has moved off. Desired speed
▷ Your vehicle has been actively braked to a
standstill by pressing the brake and is now Marker in the speedometer
behind another vehicle: ▷ Marker illuminates green: the
system is active.
1. Press the button to call up a saved ▷ Marker illuminates orange:
desired speed. the system is interrupted.
2. Release the brake.
106
▷ Marker does not illuminate: Distance indicator
the system is inactive.
Overview
Distance control disabled because the
Brief status display accelerator is pressed while a vehicle
Selected desired speed is detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven

off.
If the symbol appears in the display for Check
Controls
Control messages, it is possible that the condi‐
tions for operation may have not been met. Indicator and warning lights
Switching between Cruise Control Indicator and warning lights do not release
with/without distance control you from your responsibility to adapt your de‐
Driving hints
Display in the instrument cluster sired speed and driving style to prevailing driv‐
ing conditions.◀
Switching over to Cruise Control without
distance control. Vehicle symbol illuminates orange:
Preceding vehicle detected.
Switching over to Active Cruise Control
with distance control. Vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The requirements for operation of the
Navigation
system are no longer being met.
Vehicle distance
The system was deactivated but will continue to
The selected distance to the vehicle ahead is brake until you actively take over by depressing
displayed. the brake or the accelerator.
Distance indicator Vehicle symbol flashes red and an
Distance 1 acoustic signal sounds:
System indicates that you must brake
and/or manoeuvre the vehicle yourself.
Distance 2
System limits
Distance 3 Speed range

Set after switching on the system. The system is optimised for use on wide dual
Corresponds to approximately half of carriageways and motorways. The desired
the value in the speedometer display, speed can be selected between 30 km/h/
expressed in metres. 20 mph and 180 km/h/110 mph.
Distance 4 The system can also be activated when the ve‐
hicle is at a standstill.
When you use the system, comply with the le‐
Mobility
System interrupted or distance con‐ gally prescribed maximum road speed.

trol disabled because the accelerator
After toggling the Cruise Control without dis‐
is pressed although a vehicle is not de‐
tance control, even higher desired speeds can
tected.
be selected.
Reference
107
Detection range Vehicles pulling out
Driving comfort
The detection capability of the system and au‐ A vehicle driving ahead of you is only detected
tomatic braking capacity are limited. when it is fully in your driving lane.
For example, two-wheeled vehicles in front may Vehicles pulling out
possibly not be detected.
If another vehicle suddenly pulls out in
Limited detection capability front of you, the system might not be able to re-
The limited detection capability means establish the selected distance of its own ac‐
that you must pay full attention so that you are cord. The same applies when you are driving
able to intervene actively at any time. Otherwise significantly faster than the vehicle in front of
there is the risk of an accident.◀ you, for example when you are rapidly approach‐
ing a lorry. If a vehicle is clearly detected in front
Deceleration of you, the system requires that you intervene
by braking, and if necessary by taking evasive
The system does not decelerate your car when
action. You must react accordingly, otherwise
a standing obstacle is in the same lane, for ex‐
there is the risk of an accident.◀
ample a vehicle at a red light or at the end of a
traffic jam.
Unexpected lane changes
The system also does not respond in the case
of:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow road users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross-traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
No warnings
Under certain circumstances, no warning If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly changes
is issued on approaching a stationary or very lane to avoid a stationary vehicle, you must react
slow moving obstacle. You must react accord‐ accordingly, as the system does not respond to
ingly, otherwise there is the risk of an acci‐ stationary vehicles.
dent.◀
108
Cornering Automatic deactivation
Overview
In the proximity of radio-astronomy stations, le‐
gal regulations require that the system is disa‐
bled at speeds below 30 km/h, 20 mph.
Radar sensors
Position
Controls
If the desired speed is too high for cornering, it
will be reduced slightly in the corner. However,
the system does not detect corners in advance.
Driving hints
For this reason, moderate your speed when cor‐
nering.
Due to the system’s limited detection range,
tight bends may lead to vehicles ahead being
detected only later or not at all. ▷ Long-range sensor, arrow 1.
▷ Field of view of the short-range sensors be‐
hind the bumper, arrow 2.
Navigation
Dirty or covered sensor
A sensor that is dirty or covered can restrict the
detection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor and
bumper in front of the short-range sensors.
Take care when removing any layers of
When your car is approaching a bend, the angle snow or ice from the sensor.
of the bend may cause the system to respond ▷ Do not cover the field of view of the short-
temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. A pos‐ range sensors with labels or similar.
sible reduction in the vehicle’s speed by the sys‐
tem can be compensated for by briefly acceler‐ Malfunction
ating. When the accelerator is released again, The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
the system will resume control of the car’s not correctly aligned, for example following
speed. parking damage.
A message is displayed if the system has failed.
Starting
In some situations, the vehicle cannot move off Note
automatically, for example on steep upward in‐ Always use correctly and in accordance with the
Mobility
clines, with a heavy trailer or in front of obstruc‐ instructions, in order to reduce the electromag‐
tions in the road. netic effect.
The accepted SAR limit is 2.0 W/kg; this product
has been tested at 0.751 W/kg.
NCC statement:
Reference
109
Warning levels
Driving comfort 1. Companies and persons not duly authorised
should not attempt to change the frequency,
increase the power or change characteris‐ Advance warning
tics or functions of the original design of low- Warning, for example if a danger of collision is
power radio-frequency devices. anticipated or there is a very short distance to a
2. Low-power radio-frequency devices should vehicle ahead.
not impair legal communication or air-traffic
safety. If impairment of this nature is discov‐ Acute warning
ered, the device should be shut down forth‐ Warning in the event of an immediate collision if
with. In cases of this nature you are reques‐ the vehicle approaches an object with relatively
ted to contact the manufacturer and not to high differential speed.
use the product until the problem has been
rectified. Switching the warning function on/off
3. "Legal communication" as stated above re‐
fers to communication in compliance with
the regulations pertinent to telecommuni‐
cation. Low-power devices should with‐
stand the impairing influence of legal com‐
munication and ISM devices.
Forward alert*
Press the button.
Principle
The system warns as of approximately 15 km/h,
10 mph in two stages that there might be a dan‐
ger of collision. ▷ Off: LED turns off.
The forward alert is also available if the Cruise The status is saved for the remote control cur‐
Control is disabled. rently in use.
Configuring the advance warning

After switching on the warning function, the
following can be set using iDrive:
▷ Switching the advance warning on/off.
▷ Setting the timing of the advance warning.
These settings have no influence on the point in
time of the warning where the Active Cruise
Control* asks the driver to intervene or brake.
Here, moving objects are taken into account if
they are located within the detection range of Display
the radar. The forward alert can be output in the instru‐
When deliberately approaching an object, the ment cluster, in the Head-Up Display* and
collision warning is activated later to avoid un‐ acoustically.
justified warnings.
110
Instrument cluster Sensitivity of the advance warning
Overview
Vehicle illuminates red: advance warn‐ With a sensitive advance warning setting, false
ing alarms can occur frequently.
Vehicle flashes red and an acoustic sig‐

nal sounds: acute warning Cruise Control
System indicates that you must brake
and/or manoeuvre the vehicle yourself. Principle
Controls
Adapting speed and driving style The system is operational as of approximately
30 km/h, 20 mph.
The display does not release you from
your responsibility to adapt your speed and driv‐ The speed set using the control elements on the
ing style to prevailing driving conditions.◀ steering wheel is maintained.
Driving hints
On downhill gradients, the system will brake the
System limits car if the braking action of the engine alone is
Your own attentiveness insufficient.
System limitations mean that it can occur Unfavourable conditions

that warnings are not issued, are issued too late, Do not use the system if unfavourable
or are issued incorrectly. This means that you conditions do not permit driving at constant
must pay full attention so that you are able to speed, for example:
Navigation
intervene actively at any time. Otherwise there
▷ On stretches with a great many corners and
is the risk of an accident.◀
bends.
Detection range ▷ In heavy traffic.
The detection capabilities of the radar sensor ▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog, snow, rain or
and the forward alert are limited. a loose road surface.
This is why it can occur that no warnings are is‐ Otherwise you could lose control of the car and
sued or they are issued late. cause an accident as a result.◀
It is possible that the following are not detected:
Controls
▷ Slow-moving object when approaching at
high speed. Overview of buttons
▷ Vehicles that cut in suddenly.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.
▷ Pedestrians.
Restrictions of the function

Mobility
▷ On sharp bends.
1 System on/off, interrupt
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
2 Resume speed
3 Set speed*
4 Maintaining/saving, changing the current
Reference
speed
111
Switch on Change/maintain speed
Driving comfort
Press the button on the steering wheel. By pressing the rocker switch without interrup‐
tion, the current driven speed can also be main‐
The speedometer marker is set to the current tained and saved.
speed. Adapting the desired speed
Cruise Control can be used. Adapt the desired speed to the traffic con‐
When activating the speed limit it is possible that ditions and always be prepared to apply brakes,
Dynamic Stability Control, DSC, see page 97, is as otherwise there is a danger that accidents
activated. might occur.◀
Switching off
Disabled or interrupted system
When the system is disabled or interrup‐
ted, intervene actively by braking and manoeu‐
vring the vehicle yourself, as otherwise there is
a danger that accidents might occur.◀
Press the button.
▷ When activated: press twice. Press the rocker switch repeatedly upwards or
downwards until the desired speed is set.
▷ When interrupted: press once.
With the system active, the speed that is then
The indicators extinguish. The saved desired
shown is saved and will be achieved on a clear
speed is deleted.
road.
Interrupting ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
lightly towards the resistance point, the de‐
When the system is activated, press the
sired speed is increased or decreased by
button.
The system interrupts automatically if: ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
▷ The brake is applied. yond the resistance point, the desired speed
▷ The transmission is moved from position D. is increased or decreased to the next multi‐
ple of 10 km/h on the speedometer display.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control, DTC is activated
or DSC is disabled. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch until the resist‐
ance point is reached and holding acceler‐
▷ DSC intervenes.
ates or slows down the vehicle without
pressing the accelerator. The speed is main‐
Maintaining and saving the current tained after letting go of the rocker switch.
speed Pressing beyond the resistance point re‐
Press the button. sults in greater vehicle acceleration.
By pressing the rocker switch without interrup‐
With the system switched on, the driven speed tion, the current driven speed can also be main‐
is maintained and saved as the desired speed. tained and saved.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument cluster, displays in the speed‐ Calling up the desired speed
ometer, see page 113. Press the button.
112
The saved speed is regained and maintained. ▷ Audible warning signals.
Overview
▷ Visual display.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Measurement
Ultrasonic sensors in each bumper measure the
distance.
The range is approximately 2 m, 6 ft.
Controls
An acoustic warning is only issued:
▷ From the front* sensors and the two rear
corner sensors at approximately 60 cm,
24 in.
1 Display of desired speed ▷ For the centre rear sensors at approximately
Driving hints
1.50 m, 5 ft.
2 Indicator light
3 Brief status display System limits
Also monitor the traffic situation
Desired speed
PDC is no substitute for your personal as‐
Display in the speedometer:
sessment of the traffic situation. Also monitor
▷ Marker illuminates green: the the traffic situation around the vehicle by ob‐
Navigation
system is active. serving it directly. Otherwise, there is a danger
▷ Marker illuminates orange: that accidents might occur due to other road
the system is interrupted. users or objects located outside of detection
range of the PDC, for example.
▷ Marker does not illuminate:
the system is inactive. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car
can drown out the PDC signal.◀
Brief status display Avoid driving fast with PDC active
Brief display in the speedometer: Avoid approaching an object at speed.
Selected desired speed Avoid moving off at speed while PDC is not yet
active.
Due to physical conditions the system could
If the display --- appears briefly, it might be that warn when it is too late.◀
the conditions necessary for operation are cur‐
rently not being met. Limits of the ultrasound measurement
Detection of objects might not be possible if the
physical limits of the ultrasonic measuring prin‐
Park Distance Control, PDC* ciple are exceeded, for instance by:
▷ Trailer noses and hitches.
Principle
▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects.
Mobility
In addition to the Park Distance Control, PDC,

the rear-view camera*, see page 115, can be ▷ Low objects.
activated. ▷ Objects with corners and sharp edges.
PDC assists you with parking. Slowly approach‐ Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,
ing an object in front of or behind your vehicle is may enter the sensors’ blind areas before or af‐
signalled by means of: ter a continuous audible signal is given.
Reference
113
Switching on/off manually
Driving comfort Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detectable.
False alarms
Under the following conditions, PDC can issue
a warning although there is no obstacle in the
detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ If the sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ If the sensors are covered with snow. Press the button.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large, rectangular buildings with smooth
walls, for example underground car parks. ▷ Off: LED turns off.
▷ Due to dense exhaust gas.

Audible warning signals
▷ Due to other ultrasonic sources, for example
An intermittent sound indicates the position of
sweeping machines, steam-jet cleaners or
an object as the car approaches it. For instance,
neon lights.
if an object is identified to the rear left of the car,
▷ If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor‐ the warning signal sounds from the rear left
rectly seated. loudspeaker.
The shorter the distance to an object becomes,
Towing a trailer the shorter the intervals become.
The rear sensors are unable to perform any
If the distance to a detected object is less than
meaningful measurements. They therefore do
approximately 30 cm, 12 in, a continuous tone
not switch on.
sounds.
A message is shown on the control display.
If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐
hicle, an alternating continuous tone sounds.
Automatic activation
An intermittent continuous tone is interrupted
While the engine is running, engage transmis‐
after approximately three seconds:
sion position R.
▷ If you remain in front of an object that was
Switching off automatically detected by only one of the corner sensors.
System switches off and the LED turns off: ▷ If you are driving parallel to a wall.
▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards after The sound signal is switched off:
approximately 50 m, 160 ft. ▷ If the vehicle is more than approximately
▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards after 10 cm, 4 in away from an object.
approximately 36 km/h, 22 mph. ▷ If gearbox position P is engaged.
If required, switch on the system again.
Volume control
You can set the volume of the PDC sound signal,
see page 177.
rently in use.
114
Visual warning Malfunction
Overview
When the vehicle is approaching an object it will A Check Control message, see page 81, is dis‐
be shown on the control display. Objects that played in the instrument cluster.
are further away from the car will appear on the
control display before an audible warning signal
is given.
A display is superimposed as soon as PDC is
activated.
Controls
If the image from the rear-view camera was last
selected, this is displayed again. To switch over
to PDC:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
Driving hints
on the control display. The areas in front of and behind the vehicle are
shown as shaded on the control display. PDC
has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure correct functionality:
rently in use.
▷ Keep sensors clean and free from ice.
Zoom image* ▷ Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure
In the left part of the screen the vehicle is shown cleaners for an extended period of time and
Navigation
enlarged. maintain a distance of at least 30 cm, 12 in.
Surround view*
Principle
Surround view contains the following systems:
▷ Rear-view camera, see page 115.
▷ Side view, see page 118.
▷ Top view, see page 119.
▷ Gearbox position D engaged: front vehicle
It supports during parking, manoeuvring and
area.
when at unclear exits or junctions.
▷ Gearbox position R engaged: rear vehicle
area.
Rear-view camera*
Principle
Switching on the rear-view camera
The rear-view camera offers assistance when
using the iDrive
reversing into a parking space or manoeuvring.
Mobility
With PDC activated: To achieve this, the area behind the vehicle is
1. "Rear view camera" displayed on the control display.

System limits
The image from the rear-view camera is dis‐
played. The setting is saved for the remote con‐
Reference
trol currently in use.
115
Assistance functions
Driving comfort Also monitor the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle by observing it directly. Otherwise, there is
a danger that accidents might occur due to other Operating requirements
road users or objects located outside of the ▷ The rear-view camera is switched on.
screen area of the rear-view camera, for exam‐
▷ The boot lid is completely closed.
ple.◀
Detection of objects Driving lane lines
Higher, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detectable by the rear-view cam‐
era.◀
Automatic activation
While the engine is running, engage transmis‐
sion position R.
played if the system was switched on using the
iDrive. ▷ These can appear in the image from the
rear-view camera in transmission position R.
Switching off automatically
▷ They help to estimate the required space
System switches off and the LED turns off: when parking and manoeuvring on a level
▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards after road surface.
approximately 10 m, 33 ft. ▷ They are dependent on the current steering
▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards above angle and are continuously adapted to
approximately 15 km/h, 9 mph. steering wheel movements.
If required, switch on the system again. Displaying parking assistance lines, see
page 117.
Turning circle lines
Press the button.

▷ They can appear in the image from the rear-
▷ On: LED is illuminated. view camera.
▷ Off: LED turns off. ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐
sible turning circle on a level road surface.
PDC is displayed on the control display.
▷ When the steering wheel is fully turned, only
Switching on the rear-view camera via iDrive,
a turning circle line is displayed.
see page 118.
Displaying parking assistance lines, see
page 117.
116
Parking with the help of driving lane
and turning circle lines
Overview
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines are on the limit of the parking space.
Controls
The distance between the trailer and the trailer
tow hitch can be estimated with the aid of two
static semicircles.
A docking-on line dependent on the steering
Driving hints
angle helps you to aim at the trailer with your
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the driving
trailer tow hitch.
lane line covers the corresponding turning
circle line. The zoom function can be enabled when the
camera is switched on.
Displaying the trailer tow hitch via iDrive, see
page 117.
Navigation
Activating assistance functions
A number of assistance functions can be active
simultaneously.
The zoom function for towing a trailer can only
be activated individually.
Obstacle marking Displaying parking assistance lines

1. "Parking help lines"
Driving lane and turning circle lines are dis‐
played.
Displaying obstacle marking

1. "Obstacle marking"
▷ Spaced markings can appear in the image Spatially shaped markings are displayed.
from the rear-view camera.
Its colour incrementation corresponds to the Displaying the trailer tow hitch*
Mobility
markings of PDC. It is easier to estimate the dis‐ 1. "Trailer tow bar - zoom"
tance to the displayed object. 2. Press the controller.
The zoom to the trailer tow hitch is displayed.
Zoom to trailer tow hitch*
To facilitate connecting up a trailer, the picture
Reference
area around the trailer tow hitch can be zoomed.
117
Display on the control display Side View*
Driving comfort
Switching on the rear-view camera Principle
using the iDrive
Side View provides you with an advance view of
With PDC activated: crossing traffic at blind entrances. Road users
1. "Rear view camera" hidden by obstacles at the side are only detec‐
ted very late from the driver’s seat. In order to
improve the view, two cameras in the front area
The image from the rear-view camera is dis‐ of the vehicle scan the area to the side.
trol currently in use. System limits
The pick-up range of the cameras is a maximum
Brightness of 100 m, 330 ft.
With rear-view camera switched on:
1. "Brightness" Display
The camera pictures are shown simultaneously
on the control display.
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast When coming out of blind entrances, also
With rear-view camera switched on: monitor the traffic situation around the vehicle
by observing it directly. Otherwise road users or
1. "Contrast"
objects outside the range of the Side View cam‐
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting eras, for example, could pose an accident risk.◀
Camera
The system switches off: above approximately
15 km/h, 9 mph.
If required, switch on the system again.
The lens of the camera is located in the handle

strip of the boot lid. Dirt can impair the quality of
the picture.
Clean the lens, see page 292.
Press the button.

The area to the side is shown on the control dis‐
play.
118
Top View*
Overview
Principle
Top View assists you with manoeuvring and
parking. To achieve this, the area around the
door and road is displayed on the control dis‐
play.
Controls
Detection
Artificial lines on the lower screen edge show the
The two cameras in the exterior mirrors and the
position of the vehicle front.
rear-view camera are used to view the area
around the car.
Brightness
The range is:
Driving hints
With Side View switched on:
▷ To the side, approximately 3 m, 10 ft.
1. "Brightness" ▷ To the rear, approximately 2 m, 7 ft.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
is reached and press the controller. terior mirror are detected early.
Contrast System limits
Navigation
With Side View switched on: Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
1. "Contrast" tions:
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting ▷ With a door open.
is reached and press the controller. ▷ With the boot lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
Cameras
▷ In poor light conditions.
In some of these situations a Check Control
message is displayed.

Also monitor the traffic situation around
the vehicle by observing it directly. Otherwise,
there is a danger that accidents might occur due
to other road users or objects located outside of
the screen area of the cameras, for example.◀
Both lenses of the cameras are located at the
side of the bumper. Automatic activation
Dirt can impair the quality of the picture. While the engine is running, engage transmis‐
sion position R.
Mobility
The images from Top View and PDC are dis‐

played if the system was switched on using the
iDrive.

System switches off and the LED turns off:
Reference
119
Driving comfort ▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards after 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
approximately 50 m, 160 ft. on the control display.
▷ When the vehicle is moving forwards after 2. Press the controller.
If required, switch on the system again. rently in use.
Switching on/off manually Display on the control display
Switching on the rear-view camera

using the iDrive
With Top View switched on:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol.

Press the button. trol currently in use.

Brightness
With Top View switched on:
If Top View is displayed, switch on the rear-view 1. Select the symbol.
camera via iDrive, see page 120. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Visual warning
When the vehicle is approaching an object it will Contrast
be shown on the control display. With Top View switched on:
If there is a short distance to an object at the 1. Select the symbol.
front, a red bar in front of the vehicle is displayed
in the same way as for the PDC display. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Displaying the turning circle and

driving lane line
▷ The static red turning circle line indicates
the space requirement to the side with full
steering angle.
▷ The variable green driving lane line helps to
estimate the actual space requirement to
the side.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated. The driving lane line depends on the current
steering angle and is continuously adapted
If the image from the rear-view camera was last to steering wheel movements.
selected, this is displayed again. To switch over 1. Select the symbol.
to Top View:
120
The turning circle and driving lane lines are dis‐ Thermal image
played.
Overview
Cameras
Controls
The heat radiated by objects in the camera’s
field of view is shown.
Driving hints
Warm objects appear light, and cold objects
The lenses of the Top View cameras are located dark.
in the base of the exterior mirror housings. Dirt
The recognition depends on the temperature
can impair the quality of the picture.
differential in relation to the background and on
Clean the lens, see page 292. the natural heat radiation of the object. Objects
with a low temperature difference in relation to
the environment or low heat radiation can there‐
Night vision with person fore only be detected to a limited degree.
Navigation
recognition* For safety reasons, as of approximately 5 km/h,
3 mph and low surrounding brightness, the im‐
Principle age is only shown when the low-beam head‐
Night Vision with person recognition is a night lights are switched on.
vision system. A still image is intermittently displayed for a frac‐
An infrared camera scans the area in front of the tion of a second.
car and shows the picture on the control display.
This is a thermal image. The system has Person recognition
integrated person recognition that can detect
pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects with a
shape similar to human beings are detected by
the system.
Night Vision is no substitute for your per‐
sonal assessment of the visibility conditions and
traffic situation. Always base your responses on
what you can actually see in front of you and ad‐
just your speed in line with the actual visibility Person recognition and warning are only opera‐
tional when it is dark and only when the thermal
Mobility
conditions, to avoid safety risks.◀

image is also displayed.
Warm objects with a shape similar to human be‐
ings are detected by the system.
Persons detected by the system are shown col‐
oured in light yellow.
Reference
121
Warning zone in front of the vehicle
Driving comfort With good environmental conditions, the person
detection works in a distance range of 15 m, 50 ft
up to approx. 100 m, 330 ft.
The warning zone in front of the vehicle consists

of two parts.
Environmental influences can restrict the avail‐ ▷ Central zone 1 directly in front of the car.
ability of person recognition.
▷ Extended zone 2 at right and left.
If person recognition is not available, a symbol is
The entire zone follows the direction of the ve‐
shown in the thermal image.
hicle according to the steering angle and
Once the function is available again, the symbol changes with vehicle speed. With increasing
is deactivated. speed the range, for example, is longer and
wider.
Warning in the case of endangered
persons Symbols
Symbol is displayed if a person is detec‐
ted in the central zone, arrow 1, directly
in front of the vehicle.
Symbol is displayed if a person detected

in the extended zone, arrow 2, is moving
from the left or right towards the central
zone.
Display in the Head-Up Display*

If the system detects a person in a defined area
in front of the vehicle and there is a risk of colli‐ The warning appears in the Head-Up
sion with this person, a warning symbol appears Display, see page 123, at the same time
in the control display and in the Head-Up Dis‐ as it appears in the control display. The
play*. symbol can vary, depending on the person or
persons detected by the system. If there are
Although the shape and heat radiation are eval‐
persons in the central zone, the size of the sym‐
uated, false alarms are not excluded.
bol also indicates the distance to those persons.
System limits
Basic limits
The system operates less effectively in situa‐
tions such as the following:
▷ On steep crests or dips and on tight bends.
122
▷ If the camera is dirty or the windscreen is ▷ "Contrast"
damaged.
Overview
▷ "Person recognition"
▷ In thick fog and heavy rain or snow. The settings are saved for the remote control
▷ At very high outside temperatures. currently in use.
Limits of person recognition Camera

Animals are not detected by the person recog‐
nition, even if they can be clearly seen in the im‐
Controls
age.
Restricted person recognition:
▷ Where persons are partly or wholly covered,
in particular their head.
Driving hints
▷ Where persons are not standing upright, for
example prone.
▷ Cyclists on non-conventional cycles, for ex‐
Rain, dirt, snow and ice can impair the camera’s
ample recumbent cycles.
functioning.
▷ Following mechanical effects on the sys‐
At low outside temperatures, the camera is au‐
tem, for example after an accident.
tomatically heated.
Navigation
Activating/deactivating The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlights.
Head-Up Display*
Principle
Press the button.
Display
Night Vision with person recognition is not avail‐
able at the rear screen*.
Adjustment using the iDrive The system projects important information into
When the Night Vision is switched on: the field of vision of the driver, for example
Mobility
speed.
1. Activate Night Vision with person recogni‐
tion. This enables the driver to register this informa‐
tion without having to divert attention from the
2. Press the controller. road.
3. Open the desired menu item.
▷ "Brightness"
Reference
123
Visibility of the display
Driving comfort Check Control messages are displayed briefly if
The visibility of information in the Head-Up Dis‐ required.
play is influenced by:
Selecting displays in the Head-Up
▷ Certain seat positions.
Display
▷ Objects resting on the Head-Up Display’s
1. "Settings"
cover.
2. "Head-up display"
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.
3. "Information displayed"
▷ Wet road.
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-Up
▷ Unfavourable lighting conditions.
Display.
If the image is shown distorted, have the basic
settings checked.
Switching on/off
The settings are saved for the remote control

currently in use.
Adjusting brightness
Press the button.
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient light.
Display The base setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
Brightness is set.
With the low-beam headlights switched on, the
base setting can be made via the instrument
lighting, see page 87.
1 Speed Limit Information* The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐
2 Lane departure warning* rently in use.
3 Active Cruise Control*
Adjust height
4 Desired speed
1. "Settings"
5 Navigation system*
6 Speed
3. "Height"
The forward alert* warnings, the person-alert
4. Turn the controller.
warning from the Night Vision* system and
124
The height is set.
Overview
rently in use.
Special windscreen
The windscreen constitutes part of the system.
The shape of the windscreen enables a precise
projection.
Controls
A film in the windscreen prevents double images
occurring.
For this reason, have the special windscreen re‐
placed only by Service centre.
Driving hints
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
125
Climate
Climate
Automatic air conditioning*
1 Air distribution, left 11 Air distribution, right

2 Temperature, left 12 Seat heating*, right 47
3 AUTO program, left 13 Active seat ventilation*, right 47
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, residual heat, left 14 AUC/recirculated-air mode
5 Remove ice and condensation 15 Cooling function
6 Maximum cooling effect 16 Heated rear window
7 Display 17 ALL program
8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right 18 Active seat ventilation*, left 47
9 AUTO program, right 19 Seat heating*, left 47
10 Temperature, right
Air conditioning functions in detail Adjusting the air distribution manually

Press button repeatedly to select a pro‐
Note gram:
In order to protect the battery the air flow rate of
▷ Upper body area
the automatic air conditioning is reduced, if nec‐
essary. ▷ Upper body area and footwell
▷ Footwell
126
▷ Windows and footwell: only on the driver’s The selected intensity is shown on the display
side for automatic air conditioning.
Overview
▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell:
only on the driver’s side Adjusting the air flow manually
If there is condensation on the window, press To be able to regulate the air flow manually, first
the AUTO button in order to use the condensa‐ switch off the AUTO program.
tion sensor. Pressing the button on the left or right
reduces or increases the air flow.
Controls
Temperature
The selected air flow is shown on the display for
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
automatic air conditioning.
sired temperature.
Defrosting windows and removing
Driving hints
condensation
Press the button.
The automatic air conditioning sets this tem‐
perature as quickly as possible, using maximum This removes ice and condensation
cooling or heating power if necessary. The tem‐ quickly from the windscreen and from the front
perature is then maintained. side windows.
Avoid switching between different temperature The air flow can be adapted when the program
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air is active.
Navigation
conditioning will otherwise not have sufficient If there is condensation on the window, switch
time to establish the temperature selected. on the cooling function as well or press the
AUTO button to use the condensation sensor.
AUTO program
Press the button. Maximum cooling effect
The air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ Press the button.
ture are automatically regulated. System is set to the lowest tempera‐
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO ture, maximum air flow and recirculated-air
intensity and external influences, the air is di‐ mode.
rected towards the windscreen, side windows, The air flows from the outlets for the upper body
and upper body, and into the footwell. area. These should therefore be left open.
The cooling function, see page 128, is switched The air cools the most rapidly:
on automatically in the AUTO program.
▷ Above an outside temperature of approxi‐
A condensation sensor also controls the pro‐ mately 0 ℃/32 ℉.
gram so that condensation is avoided as much
as possible. ▷ With the engine running
The air flow can be adapted when the program
Intensity of AUTO program is active.
With the AUTO program switched on, the auto‐
Mobility
matic control of air flow and air distribution can Automatic air recirculation control,
be changed: AUC/air recirculation mode
If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odour
Pressing the button on the left or right or contains pollutants, the supply to the interior
reduces or increases intensity. of the car can be shut off. The air inside the car
is then recirculated.
Reference
127
All program
Climate Press button repeatedly to call up an
operating mode: Press the button.
▷ LEDs off: ambient air is constantly entering The current settings for the driver’s
the car. side for temperature, air flow, air distribution and
AUTO program are transferred to the passen‐
▷ Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor de‐
ger’s side and into the rear* on the left/right.
tects pollutants in the outside air and shuts
it out automatically. The program is switched off if the settings are
changed on the front passenger side and in the
▷ Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
rear*.
the ambient air supply is permanently shut
off.
Residual heat
If there is condensation on the window, shut
down the recirculated-air mode and press The heat stored in the engine is used to heat up
the AUTO button to use the condensation the interior.
sensor. Ensure that air can flow towards the
windscreen. Operating requirements
Continuous use of recirculated-air mode ▷ Up to 20 minutes after turning off the engine.
Recirculated-air mode should not be used ▷ Engine at operating temperature

continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality ▷ Adequate charge state of the battery
of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually ▷ Outside temperature below 25 ℃, approxi‐
deteriorate.◀ mately 77 ℉.
Cooling function Switching on

The interior can only be cooled when the engine 1. Switch the ignition off.
is running.
Press the button. 2. Press right of button on driver’s side.

Air is cooled and dried, then reheated to is shown on the display of the automatic air
suit the temperature setting. conditioning system.
With the ignition switched on, the interior tem‐
Depending on weather conditions, the wind‐
perature, air flow and air distribution can be ad‐
screen may mist over momentarily when the en‐
justed.
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ Switching off
cally in the AUTO program.
In the lowest blower setting, press left of button
When using automatic climate control, conden‐ on driver’s side.
sation water, see page 150, develops that exits
is deactivated on the display of the automatic
underneath the vehicle.
air conditioning system.
Heated rear window
Switching system on/off
Press the button.
The heated rear window is switched off Switching off
automatically after a certain time. ▷ Complete system:
In the lowest setting, press left of
button on driver’s side.
▷ On the front passenger side:
128
In the lowest setting, press left of Knurled wheel, arrow 3, in stage : air is
button on passenger’s side. partially fanned out and bundled. This ena‐
Overview
bles the maximum air supply.
Switching on ▷ Direct ventilation:
Press any button. Knurled wheel, arrow 3, in stage : air is
bundled and can be guided to a specific
Microfilter/activated charcoal filter point.
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
Controls
coming air. Setting the ventilation
The activated charcoal filter removes gaseous ▷ Ventilation for cooling:
pollutants from the outside air entering the car. Adjust the outlets so that air is directed to‐
This combined filter should be changed during wards you, for example if the car’s interior
routine maintenance work on your vehicle. has become hot.
Driving hints
More detailed information in the service require‐ ▷ Draught-free ventilation:
ment display, see page 80. Adjust the outlets so that the air flows past
you.
Ventilation Ventilation in the rear, centre
Ventilation at front
Navigation
▷ Knurled wheels* to vary the temperature,
arrow 1
▷ Knurled wheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
Towards blue: cooler
row 1
Towards red: warmer
Towards blue: cooler
▷ Lever to change the direction in which air
Towards red: warmer
flows, arrow 2
▷ Knurled wheels to open and close the air
flows, arrow 2
outlets continuously, arrow 3
▷ Knurled wheels to open and close the air
outlets continuously, arrow 3
Mobility
Ventilation stages*
▷ Draught-free ventilation:
Knurled wheel, arrow 3, in stage : air flow
is fanned out.
▷ Maximum air flow:
Reference
129
Ventilation, side* Switching the rear automatic heater/air
Climate
conditioner on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate control"
The rear automatic air conditioner is not opera‐
tional, if the automatic air conditioning is
switched off or the defrost windows and remove
condensation function is active.
▷ Knurled wheel to open and close the air out‐ AUTO program
lets continuously, arrow 1
Press the button.
The air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
flows, arrow 2
ture are regulated automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO

Rear automatic air intensity and external influences, the air is fed
conditioning* towards the upper body and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
Overview cally in the AUTO program.
Intensity of AUTO program

With the AUTO program switched on, the auto‐
matic control of air flow and air distribution can
be changed:
Pressing the button on the left or right

reduces or increases intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display

for automatic air conditioning.
1 Temperature
2 AUTO program Temperature
3 Air distribution Turn the wheel to select the de‐
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity sired temperature.
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling effect
7 Seat heating* 50
The automatic air conditioning sets this tem‐
8 Active seat ventilation* 50 perature as quickly as possible, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary. The tem‐
Note perature is then maintained.
In order to protect the battery the air flow rate of Avoid switching between different temperature
the automatic air conditioning is reduced, if nec‐ settings in rapid succession. The automatic air
essary. conditioning will otherwise not have sufficient
time to establish the temperature selected.
130
Adjusting the air distribution manually Air conditioner operation at the
headlining*
Overview
The air distribution can be adapted to take ac‐
count of individual needs.
Temperature
Press button repeatedly to select a pro‐
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
gram:
sired temperature.
▷ Upper body area
▷ Upper body area and footwell
Controls
▷ Footwell
Air flow
Adjusting the air flow manually
To be able to set the air flow manually, first reduces or increases the air flow.
Driving hints
switch off the AUTO program.
LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply.
reduces or increases the air flow. In order to protect the battery the air flow rate is
reduced, if necessary.
The selected air flow is shown on the display for
automatic air conditioning. Ventilation
Navigation
Switching off
In the lowest blower setting, press left
of button on driver’s side.
Switch on
Press any button.
Rotate knurled wheel to change the direction of
Maximum cooling effect air flow, arrow.
Press the button.
System is set to the lowest tempera‐
ture, maximum air flow and recirculated-air Independent ventilation/
mode. Auxiliary heating*
The air flows from the outlets for the upper body
area. These should therefore be left open. Principle
The air cools the most rapidly: The independent ventilation system ventilates
the passenger compartment and lowers its tem‐
▷ Above an outside temperature of approxi‐
perature under some circumstances.
mately 0 ℃/32 ℉
Mobility
The auxiliary heating system warms up the pas‐

▷ With the engine running
senger compartment; snow and ice can be re‐
moved more easily. With the ignition switched
off, the air is automatically directed towards the
windscreen, side windows and footwell.
Reference
131
Climate The systems can be switched on and off directly "Activate ind. ventilation"
or via two preselected switch-on times. They
remain switched on for 30 minutes.
Operation is possible using the iDrive or the re‐
mote control*.
Independent ventilation
▷ With remote control* or with a preselected
switch-on time: outside temperature above
approximately 15 ℃/59 ℉
▷ In the direct mode and if no auxiliary heating The system is switched on. The symbol
is installed: at any outside temperature on the automatic air conditioning system
Open the ventilation vents so the air can flow flashes.
out. The system continues to run for a short time af‐
ter it has been switched off.
Auxiliary heating
Auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces Preselecting the switch-on time
Never operate the auxiliary heating sys‐ 1. "Settings"
tem in enclosed spaces, as inhaling the harmful 2. "Climate"
exhaust gas can lead to loss of consciousness 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
with fatal consequences. The exhaust gas con‐
4. Enter the desired time.
tains carbon monoxide, which is colourless and
odourless, but highly toxic. Switch off auxiliary 5. Press the controller to apply the setting.
heating when filling up.◀
If ambient temperatures are below 0 ℃/32 ℉
Activating the switch-on time
water vapour condenses and wets the ground 1. "Settings"
underneath the vehicle. 2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
Operating requirements
The switch-on time is activated. The
▷ With remote control or with a preselected symbol is illuminated on the automatic air con‐
switch-on time: outside temperature below ditioning.
approximately 15 ℃/59 ℉
Symbol on the automatic air conditioning
▷ In the direct mode: at any outside tempera‐ system flashes when the system has cut in.
ture
The system switches on within the next
▷ Adequate charge state of the battery 24 hours only. Afterwards, it must be reactiva‐
▷ Fuel level is above the reserve volume ted.
If the auxiliary heating was not used for a number
of months, it can be necessary to switch it on
again after a few minutes.
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate ind. heating" or
132
Remote control* Frequencies
Overview
The remote control can malfunction due to
Overview nearby external systems or devices using the
same frequency.
Changing the batteries

Replace the batteries if a message is displayed
or the LED is no longer illuminated or flashes
Controls
when the remote control is activated.
No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, other‐
wise their contents can cause damage.◀
1 LED: transmission acknowledgement
Driving hints
2 Switching on/off
3 Activate independent ventilation/auxiliary
heating
4 Deactivate independent ventilation/auxiliary
heating
Navigation
Range of the remote control
Due to reception, the mean range is approxi‐
mately 150 m, 490 ft. 1. Use a suitable object to unclip the battery
The range is best when you hold the remote compartment, arrow 1.
control as high as possible, pointing upwards. 2. Remove the cover for the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
Switching on/off directly
3. Insert batteries of the same type.
1. Press the button until the green 4. Press the cover back into position.
LED is illuminated. Dispose of old batteries at an authorised
2. Within approximately five seconds, press collecting point or hand them in to a
the desired button until the green or red LED Service Centre.
is illuminated:
Switch on New remote control
A new remote control can be operated as a spare
Switching off remote control or in the event of loss. If required,
this can be initialised by your Service Centre.
Correct transmission to the system is confirmed Two remote controls can be used for the vehicle.
for approximately two seconds by the green
LED flashing rapidly.
Mobility
In the event of a transmission fault, the red LED

is illuminated for approximately two seconds.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
air conditioning system flashes.
Reference
133
Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Integrated universal remote Programming

control*
Principle
The system replaces up to three different hand-
held transmitters for various radio-remote-con‐
trolled facilities such as garage doors or lighting
systems.
The signal of a hand-held transmitter can be
programmed to one of the three memory but‐
tons. ▷ LED, arrow 1
After this, the programmed memory button will ▷ Memory buttons, arrow 2
operate the system in question.
Transmission of the signal is shown by the LED.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitter
When you sell the vehicle, delete the saved pro‐
grams for your own security. 2. Initial operation:
Press both of the outer buttons 1 and 3 for
During programming
approximately 20 seconds until the LED
During programming and before a system flashes.
is operated with the universal remote control,
All programs on the three memory buttons,
make sure that no persons, animals or objects
arrow 2, are deleted.
are within the pivoting or movement range of the
system in question, as otherwise injury or dam‐ 3. Keep hand-held transmitter 5 to 20 cm, ap‐
age could result. proximately 2 to 8 in away from the memory
buttons.
Comply also with the safety instructions sup‐
plied with the hand-held transmitter.◀ 4. Press the send button of the hand-held
transmitter and memory button of the uni‐
Compatibility versal remote control simultaneously.
If this symbol is depicted on the pack‐ The LED flashes slowly.
aging or in the instructions for the hand- 5. When the LED starts to flash rapidly, release
held transmitter, the radio-remote-con‐ both buttons.
trolled equipment is usually compatible with the If the LED does not start to flash rapidly after
universal remote control. approximately 15 seconds, change the dis‐
A list of compatible hand-held transmitters is tance and repeat the step.
available on the Internet: www.homelink.com. The equipment can be operated with the engine
running or ignition switched on using the mem‐
ory button.
Malfunction
If the device fails to function even after repeated
programming, check whether the hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system.
134
In this case: 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approximately
20 seconds, press the send button of the
Overview
▷ Consult the instructions for the hand-held
transmitter. hand-held transmitter.
▷ Press the memory button on the universal 5. When the LED starts to flash rapidly, release
remote control for a longer period. both buttons.
If the LED on the integrated universal remote If the LED does not start to flash rapidly after
control flashes rapidly for a short time and then approximately 15 seconds, change the dis‐
remains illuminated for approximately two sec‐ tance and repeat the step.
Controls
onds, the hand-held transmitter uses an alter‐
nating-code system. Deleting all saved programs
Then program the memory buttons as descri‐ Press the left and right memory buttons for ap‐
bed at alternating-code hand-held transmitter. proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly.
Driving hints
Alternating-code hand-held All saved programs are deleted.
transmitter It is not possible to clear programs individually.
Please find information on whether it is possible
to synchronise in the instructions for use of the
device to be set up. Ashtray/lighter*
Programming will be easier if another person is
Front
Navigation
available to assist you.
1. Park your car within the range of the radio- Opening

remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above for the fixed-
code hand-held transmitter.
3. Establish the location of the button on the
receiver of the device to be operated, for ex‐
ample on the drive system.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be operated. The next step must be
carried out within approximately 30 sec‐ Press the lid.
onds.
5. Press the programmed memory button on
the universal remote control three times.
The device can be operated with the engine run‐
ning or the ignition switched on.
Saving individual programs

Mobility
2. Keep hand-held transmitter 5 to 20 cm, ap‐
proximately 2 to 8 in away from the memory
buttons.
3. Press the memory button on the universal
Reference
remote control.
135
Emptying Lighter
Interior equipment
Insert your finger into the recess beside the ash‐ Press in the cigarette lighter.
tray, arrow, and push forwards and upwards si‐
Risk of sustaining burns
multaneously.
Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its
The ashtray can be removed.
knob, otherwise you may suffer burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the remote
Lighter
control so that children cannot operate the cig‐
Press in the cigarette lighter. arette lighter and burn themselves.◀
The cigarette lighter can be re‐ The cigarette lighter can be removed when it
moved when it pops back out. pops back out.
Risk of sustaining burns

Connecting electrical
Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its
knob, otherwise you may suffer burns. appliances
When leaving the car, always switch off the ig‐
Power sockets
nition and remove the remote control so that
children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and When the engine is running or the ignition is
burn themselves.◀ switched on, the cigarette lighter socket can
also be used as a power socket for a 12 V elec‐
trical appliance rated at up to approximately
Rear
200 W.
Opening To avoid damage to the socket, never attempt
to insert a plug of the wrong pattern.
Front centre console
Press the lid.
Emptying
Press the lid.
Lift out the insert.
136
Remove the cover or lighter*. Switching off automatically
Overview
If a low battery voltage is reached, the cooler box
Rear centre console is switched off automatically.
The LED flashes evenly.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the LED flashes
unevenly. Have the system checked.
Controls
Opening
Driving hints
Remove the cover or lighter*.
Inside the boot*

Remove the cover.
Rear cooler box*
Navigation
Pull the opener and fold the cooler box forwards.
Behind the centre armrest
Oddments table* in rear

passenger compartment
There is an oddments table in the back rest of
the front seat.
Folding down
Risk of jamming when folding up and down
The cooler box is located behind the centre arm‐ Ensure that the area of movement of the
rest in the rear. fold-down table and the side hinges is free when
folding up and down, otherwise it could lead to
Fold the centre armrest downwards.
injuries.◀
Switching on
The cooler box can be operated in two stages.
Mobility
2. Press the button once per cooling

stage.
Switching off
Press the button repeatedly until the LEDs ex‐ Pull on the handle, pull out the table upwards
and fold down.
Reference
tinguish.
137
Interior equipment Close the folding table while the vehicle is If necessary, open the zip fastener of the ski
in motion. bag to make loading easier or to dry the ski
bag.
If possible, close the folding table, as otherwise
there is a risk of injury from items on the folding 6. If your vehicle is not equipped with a multi‐
table or from the folding table itself.◀ function seat in the rear, insert the seat belt
latch in the belt buckle.
Ski bag*
Capacity
The ski bag enables transport of three pairs of
skis up to a length of 2.10 m or a snowboard up
to 1.60 m.
Preparing and loading the ski bag

1. Open up the centre armrest and cover inside 7. Pull the retaining strap taut.
the car.
2. Open the cover in the interior and boot by
Securing the ski bag

Secure the ski bag by tensioning the re‐
taining strap. Otherwise braking and evasive
3. Lay out the ski bag. manoeuvres could cause the contents of the
bag to endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
4. If your vehicle is equipped with a multifunc‐
tion seat in the rear, attach the belt with a
carbine spring hook to the bracket. Removing the ski bag
You can remove the ski bag for quick drying, for
example, or if you want to use other fittings.
5. Load the ski bag. Wrap protective material

around any sharp edges on the skis.
1. Pull the handle forwards and remove the ski
bag upwards.
138
2. Close the cover in the boot.
Overview
For more information on the various fittings
available, contact a Service Centre.
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
139
Storage compartments
Storage options After using the glove box while the vehicle is in
motion, close it without delay, so that it cannot
The following storage options are located in the cause injury in the event of an accident.◀
interior:
▷ Glove box on the driver and passenger side, Closing
see page 140. Swing lid up.
▷ Storage compartment in the centre console,
see page 142 Opening the upper lid
▷ Storage compartment in the front and rear
centre armrests, see page 141
▷ Storage compartment* between the seats,
see page 142
▷ Compartments in the doors
▷ Pockets on the back rests of the front
seats*
▷ Net in front passenger footwell*
No loose objects in the interior. Press the button.
Do not store any objects unsecured in the The upper lid opens automatically.
interior, otherwise they could endanger vehicle
occupants when braking or swerving, for in‐
Closing the upper lid
stance.◀
Press the cover back into position.
Glove box USB interface for data transfer
Front passenger’s side
Opening
Connection for importing and exporting data on

a USB medium, for example:
▷ Personal Profile settings, see page 31
▷ Music collection, see page 189
Pull the handle. When connecting, bear the following in mind:
The light in the glove box comes on. ▷ Do not insert the plug forcibly in the USB in‐
Close the glove box again immediately terface.
140
▷ Do not connect any devices such as fans or Opening
lights to the USB interface.
Overview
▷ Do not connect up USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface for
charging external devices.
Driver’s side
Controls
Opening
Press the buttons beside the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
Driving hints
Pull the handle.
Navigation
Close the glove box again immediately
After using the glove box while the vehicle
is in motion, close it without delay, so that it can‐
not cause injury in the event of an accident.◀ The storage compartment in the armrest can be
locked with a key, for example to secure the boot
Closing lid, see page 38, separately.
Swing lid up. After locking the storage compartment, the re‐
mote control can be handed over without the
integrated key, see page 30, for example in a
Centre armrest hotel.
This means it is not possible to access the stor‐
Front age compartment and boot.
There is a storage compartment in the centre
armrest between the front seats. Connection for external audio device
Mobility
An external audio device, for example a CD or

MP3 player, can be connected.
Reference
141
Storage compartment in the
Storage compartments ▷ AUX-IN port, see page 194.
▷ USB audio interface*, see page 195. centre console
Rear Opening
There is a storage compartment in the centre
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Depending on the equipment version, press ei‐
ther the button at the front of the recess of the
centre armrest or on top of the centre armrest.
Storage compartment To open: press the lid.

between the rear seats*
Additional storage compartment
To enlarge the storage compartment in the cen‐
tre console, you can remove the cupholder.
There is a storage compartment between the

two seat cushions.
To open: press the button.
Do not subject the cover to loads Tilt the cupholder insert backwards and remove.
Do not subject the cover of the storage
compartment to loads, for example by sitting on
it, as otherwise it can be damaged.◀ Cupholder
Notes
Unbreakable containers and no hot bev‐
erages
Use light and unbreakable containers and do not
transport hot beverages. Otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not force unsuitable containers into the
cupholder. Otherwise damage may result.◀
142
Front Boot
Overview
Net
Smaller objects can be stowed in the net at the
side of the boot.
To transport larger objects, this can be pushed
downwards.
Controls
Compartment under the floor panel
To open: press the lid.
Rear
Driving hints
In the front of the centre armrest.
Folding up the floor panel.
Navigation
Side storage compartment
To open: press the button.
To close: slide back.
Coat hooks
The clothes hooks are located on the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear. There is a storage compartment, for example to
Keep a clear view store the printed Owner’s Handbook, located
under the cover in the side area of the boot.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver’s view.◀ Remove the cover.
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks
as they could endanger the vehicle occupants,
for example in the case of braking or evasive
Mobility
manoeuvres.◀
Reference
143
Lashing eyes
For securing the load, see page 151, with nets

or tensioning bands there are lashing eyes in the
boot.
144
145
146
Driving hints
The Driving hints chapter provides you with
information that you may require in particular
driving situations or operating modes.
147
Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Running in above have to be renewed in the course of the

vehicle’s operating life.
General
Moving parts need a certain time to achieve
maximum operating efficiency as a unit. General driving notes
The following information helps to achieve max‐
Closing boot lid
imum service life and efficiency of the vehicle.
Drive with the boot lid closed
Engine and final drive Drive only with the tailgate closed, as oth‐
Please observe the valid speed limit in the re‐ erwise the car's occupants and other road users
spective country you are travelling in. could be at risk or the vehicle could be damaged
in the event of an accident or if you have to brake
abruptly or swerve to avoid an obstruction.
Up to 2000 km, 1200 miles
There is also the danger of exhaust fumes en‐
Drive with changing maximum engine speeds tering the passenger compartment.◀
and road speeds:
If there is no alternative to driving with the tail‐
▷ With petrol engine: 4500 rpm or 160 km/h, gate open:
approx. 100 mph
▷ With diesel engine: 3500 rpm or 150 km/h, 1. Maintain moderate speed.
93 mph. 2. Close all the windows and the glass roof*.
Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic 3. Turn up the blower to a high output level.
transmission kick-down.
Hot exhaust system
From 2000 km, 1200 miles onwards Hot exhaust system
Engine and road speeds can be gradually in‐ High temperatures occur in the exhaust
creased. system.
Never remove the heat shields fitted here, or ap‐
Tyres ply underseal to them. When driving, idling or
New tyres do not achieve their full road grip im‐ parking, ensure that no highly inflammable ma‐
mediately, for production reasons. terials, e.g. hay, foliage, grass etc. comes into
During the first 300 km, 200 miles, drive mod‐ contact with the hot exhaust system. It could ig‐
erately. nite and cause a fire, with the risk of severe in‐
juries or damage.
Brake system Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise
Brake pads and discs only achieve a favourable there is a risk of burns.◀
wear and contact pattern after approximately
500 km, 300 miles. Drive moderately during this Diesel particle filter
running-in period. The diesel particle filter collects soot particles
and burns them periodically at high tempera‐
After fitting new parts tures.
The same running-in procedures should be ob‐ During cleaning, which takes a few minutes:
served if any of the components mentioned
148
▷ The engine temporarily runs slightly less neither be steered nor the brakes properly ap‐
smoothly under certain circumstances. plied.
Overview
▷ The usual power output development re‐ Aquaplaning
quires a slightly higher engine speed.
On wet or slushy roads, reduce your speed
▷ The exhaust may cause some noise and in order to avoid aquaplaning.◀
emit a small amount of smoke, even after the
engine has been switched off. Wading
Controls
If the water is calm drive no faster than walking
Climate comfort windscreen
speed, approximately 10 km/h, 6 mph and only
up to a maximum water depth of approximately
25 cm, 9.8 inches.
Pay attention to the water depth and your
Driving hints
speed
Do not exceed the water depth and walking
speed, as otherwise the engine, electrical sys‐
tem and transmission could be damaged.◀
Safe braking
The marked area does not have a heat reflective
coating. Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as standard.
Navigation
Use this area for garage-door openers, devices Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
for electronic toll recording or similar. way of braking in situations in which this is nec‐
essary.
Climate comfort laminated safety glass The vehicle can be steered. Any obstacles can
be avoided with steering wheel movements that
The vehicle glazing offers full protection against
are as calm as possible.
the damaging effects of UV light on the skin.
A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic reg‐
Mobile communication equipment ulating sounds indicate that ABS is regulating.
Mobile communication equipment
Wet roads
It is advised that you use mobile radio de‐
In damp weather or heavy rain, apply the brakes
vices, for example, mobile phones, inside the
lightly every few kilometres/miles.
vehicle without a direct connection to an exter‐
nal aerial. Mutual interference between the ve‐ In doing so, do not obstruct other road users.
hicle’s electronics and such equipment cannot The resulting heat dries the brake discs and
be entirely ruled out. There is moreover no guar‐ pads.
antee that the radiation generated when such The braking force will be available immediately
devices are transmitting will be dissipated out of if needed.
the vehicle’s interior.◀
Downhill gradients
Mobility
Aquaplaning
When driving on long or steep downhill
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can stretches, use the gear in which the least braking
form between the tyres and the road. is required. Otherwise the brake system can
This situation, known as aquaplaning, means overheat and braking action is reduced.
that the tyre can actually lose contact com‐
pletely with the road surface and the car can
Reference
149
Left-hand/right-hand traffic
Driving precautions The braking action of the engine can be boosted
further by shifting down in the manual mode of
the automatic transmission, see page 68. Measures to prevent the headlights from daz‐
zling oncoming traffic are necessary if you take
Avoid excessive braking the vehicle into countries in which the opposite
Avoid excessive loads on the brake. Even rule of the road applies. Service can provide the
slight, continuous pressure on the brake pedal appropriate light benders that can be affixed to
could cause overheating, brake pad wear or the headlight lenses. Proceed in accordance
even brake system failure.◀ with the enclosed instructions when affixing the
Do not drive with the transmission in neu‐ light benders to the headlights.
tral
Never drive with the transmission in neutral or
with the engine switched off. Otherwise, the
Loads
braking action of the engine will either not be Overloading the vehicle
present, or there will be no power assistance to
the brakes or steering.◀ So that the permitted load capacity of the
tyres is not exceeded, do not overload the vehi‐
No objects in the range of movement of cle. The tyres could then overheat and sustain
the pedals internal damage. Under certain circumstances,
Make sure that pedal functions are not impaired sudden tyre pressure loss will be the conse‐
by floor mats, carpets or other objects.◀ quence.◀
No fluids in the boot
Corrosion of the brake disc
Ensure that fluid leakage does not occur
Corrosion of the brake discs and contamination in the boot. Otherwise the vehicle could be dam‐
of the brake pads increase with: aged.◀
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not Loading
used.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensate when vehicle is parked ▷ Heavy transported load: position low down
and as far forward as possible, ideally di‐
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
rectly behind the boot bulkhead.
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle. ▷ Very heavy transported load: with no pas‐
sengers on the back seat, insert both outer
Traces of water on the ground are therefore nor‐
seat belts into the respective opposite buck‐
mal.
les.
▷ Wrap protective material round sharp cor‐
ners and edges.
150
Securing the load Mounting points
Overview
Controls
▷ Small and relatively light objects: can be re‐ On the outside edge of the vehicle, press the line
tained with tensioning straps, a boot net* or of the cover.
other suitable straps.
Driving hints
▷ Relatively large and heavy objects: secure Fitting
with lashing straps*. Make sure that there is sufficient space to raise
Lashing straps can be secured to four lash‐ and open the glass roof*.
ing eyes fitted in the boot.
Securing transported loads Magnetic roof luggage racks
Accommodate and secure the transpor‐ Due to the aluminium roof, magnet roof luggage
Navigation
ted load as described above, otherwise it could racks cannot be attached.
endanger the vehicle occupants, for example,
when braking and swerving. Loads
Heavy and hard objects must not be stored un‐ A loaded roof rack alters the car’s road behav‐
secured in the interior, otherwise these could iour and steering response by shifting its centre
endanger the vehicle occupants, for example, of gravity.
when braking and swerving. When loading and driving, bear the following in
Do not exceed the permitted overall weight and mind:
permitted axle loads, otherwise the operational ▷ Do not exceed permitted roof/axle load and
safety of the vehicle can no longer be guaran‐ permitted overall weight, see page 298.
teed and the permit regulations are not met.◀ ▷ Distribute the roof load evenly.
▷ The roof load must not be spread over a
large area.
Roof rack
▷ Heavy items of luggage should be placed at
Rack system as special accessory the bottom.
A special roof rack system is available as an ac‐ ▷ Secure roof luggage correctly and safely.
cessory. ▷ Do not allow objects to protrude into the
Observe the directions contained in the instal‐ swing range of the boot lid.
lation instructions. ▷ Drive smoothly and avoid sudden accelera‐
Mobility
tion, braking or cornering.

Reference
151
Towing a trailer* Run-flat indicator
Driving precautions
Reinitialise the run-flat indicator, see page 91,
General after a trailer has been attached or detached or
The permitted trailer load is indicated in the the inflation pressure has been corrected.
technical data.
Exterior mirrors
Information on possibilities to increase the load
can be provided by any Service Centre. Two exterior mirrors which bring both rear cor‐
ners of the trailer into your field of view are re‐
The vehicle is equipped with reinforced springs
quired by law. Mirrors of this kind can be ob‐
on the rear axle and, depending on the type, with
tained from your Service Centre as optional
a more powerful engine cooling system.
accessories.
Before a journey
Power consumption
Nose weight The power output of the trailer’s rear lights must
not exceed the following values:
▷ Minimum nose weight: 25 kg, 55 lb.
▷ Turn indicators: 42 Watts per side
▷ Maximum nose weight: 90 kg, 198 lb.
▷ Rear lights: 60 Watts per side
Where possible, make full use of this weight.
▷ Brake lights: 84 Watts total
The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose
weight reduce the maximum load of your car. ▷ Rear fog lights: 42 Watts total
The nose weight increases the vehicle weight. ▷ Reversing lights: 42 Watts total
The total permitted weight of the towing vehicle, Keep the switch-on times of the current con‐
see Technical data, must not be exceeded as a sumer units in the caravan mode short in order
result. not to place an excessive load on the vehicle
battery.
Loads
Function of the rear lights
Stow the load as low as possible and as close as
Before beginning your journey, check the
possible to the axle.
function of the rear lights of the trailer, as other‐
A low centre of trailer gravity makes the vehicle wise this might endanger other road users.◀
combination much more stable and safe to drive.
The permitted total weight of the trailer and the Towing a trailer
permitted axle load of the vehicle (see Technical Appropriate speed when towing a trailer
data) may not be exceeded. The smaller value is
Keep to an appropriate speed when tow‐
the limit which should be adhered to.
ing a trailer. Speeds in excess of approximately
80 km/h, approx. 50 mph can be enough to pro‐
Tyre pressures
duce a swaying or fishtailing motion, depending
Check the vehicle’s and the trailer’s tyre pres‐ on the design of the trailer and the load it is car‐
sures carefully. rying.◀
On the vehicle, the tyre inflation pressure, see Maximum speed when towing a trailer
page 267, for higher loads applies.
If you are towing a trailer, increase tyre
For the trailer, the regulations of the manufac‐ pressures by 0.2 bar all round and do not exceed
turer apply. a top speed of 100 km/h / 60 mph, as the higher
axle load could result in damage to the tyres if
the car is driven at higher speeds. Note the max‐
152
imum possible tyre pressures stated on the bicycle carrier with lights, the system may be‐
tyres.◀ come active in extreme driving situations.
Overview
Counteracting snaking Operating requirements
If the trailer begins to snake, the vehicle combi‐ The system is operational when towing a trailer
nation can only be stabilised by braking hard im‐ and when using the trailer socket as of approxi‐
mediately. mately 65 km/h, 40 mph.
Make sure that the necessary steering correc‐
Controls
tions are carried out as cautiously as possible, System limits
taking other road users into consideration. ▷ The system cannot intervene if the trailer
veers instantly, for example on slippery or
Uphill gradients loose road surfaces.
In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up ▷ Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip
Driving hints
other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients over before a swinging motion is detected.
steeper than 12 % when towing a trailer. ▷ The system is not operational if DSC, see
If higher trailer loads are permitted later, the limit page 97, is deactivated or has failed.
is 8 %.
Downhill gradients Trailer tow hitch with

On downward inclines, a vehicle combination electrical swivel-mounted
Navigation
has tendency to snake at an earlier stage. ball head*
Before the downward incline, shift down to the
next-lowest gear and drive downwards slowly. General
The swivel-mounted ball head for the trailer tow
High loads and high outside
hitch is located on the underside of the vehicle.
temperature
Follow the operating instructions of the system
Long journeys with a high load and outside manufacturer.
temperature
With the ignition switched off, the system is dis‐
On long journeys with a high trailer load and high abled after 2 minutes at the latest.
outside temperature, make sure that the fuel
To re-enable the system:
tank is more than 1/4 full, as otherwise the en‐
gine output can decrease or engine damage can ▷ Close and reopen the boot lid.
occur.◀ ▷ Switch on ignition.
Trailer Stability Control*
Principle
The system helps you to neutralise a trailer’s
tendency to swing from side to side.
Mobility
It detects snaking movements and promptly

brakes the vehicle so that road speeds fall to
below the critical range and the vehicle combi‐
nation is stabilised.
The button for swinging the swivel-mounted
If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no ball head in and out is in the luggage compart‐
trailer is attached, for example during use of a ment.
Reference
153
Swivelling out the ball head
Driving precautions Pressing the button again moves the ball head
1. Open the boot. in the opposite direction up to the end position.
2. Step out of the swivelling area of the ball
Automatic interrupt of the swivel
head behind the vehicle.
movement
3. Press the button in the boot. The swivel movement is interrupted automati‐
cally if the current limit values are exceeded, for
The ball head swivels outwards. The LED in
example at very low temperatures or in the case
the button flashes in red.
of mechanical resistance.
To interrupt the swivel movement: press the
The LED in the button flashes in red.
button again.
4. Wait until the ball head has reached its end Press the button until the ball head has
position and the LED in the button illumi‐ reached its end position and the LED in the
nates green. button illuminates green.
Checking the interlock

Trailer socket
Before driving with a trailer or load carrier,
make sure that the ball head is properly locked,
as unstable driving conditions and/or accidents
can otherwise result.
If the ball head is not properly locked, the LED in
the button flashes in red.◀
Swivelling in the ball head

1. Uncouple the trailer or load carrier, remove
the fittings for the track-stabilising devices,
pull out the connector for the trailer’s power The trailer socket is located on the trailer tow
supply and, if applicable, pull the adapter out hitch.
of the socket. Fold the cover downwards.
LED in the button flashes green if the plug
or adapter have not yet been disconnected.
Saving fuel
2. Press the button in the boot.
The ball head swivels inwards. The LED in General
the button flashes in red. Your vehicle contains wide-ranging technolo‐
To interrupt the swivel movement: press the gies for reducing consumption and emission
button again. levels.
3. Wait until the ball head has reached its end Fuel consumption depends on various factors.
position and the LED in the button illumi‐ A number of measures, driving style and regular
nates green. maintenance, see page 275, can influence the
fuel consumption and the burden on the envi‐
Interrupting the swivel movement ronment.
manually
Press the button in the boot. Removing transported load that is not
required
Extra weight increases fuel consumption.
154
Removing add-on parts after use Switching off the engine when
stationary
Overview
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof racks and rear-
mounted racks after use. When you stop the car for longer periods, for
Add-on parts on the car interfere with its aero‐ example at traffic lights, railway crossings or in
dynamic performance and inflate fuel consump‐ traffic jams, switch off the engine.
tion. You save fuel even if the engine is off for no lon‐
ger than approximately four seconds.
Closing windows and the glass roof*
Controls
An opened glass roof or opened window increa‐ Switching off functions that are not
ses the drag coefficient and thus the fuel con‐ necessary at the moment
sumption. Functions such as seat heating or heated rear
window require a great deal of energy and con‐
Checking tyre pressures regularly sume additional fuel, especially in city traffic and
Driving hints
Check and, if necessary, correct tyre inflation stop/go traffic.
pressures, see page 267, at least twice a month For this reason, switch these functions off if they
and before setting off on a longer journey. are not required.
Insufficient tyre inflation pressure enlarges the
rolling resistance and thus increases fuel con‐ Having the car serviced
sumption and tyre wear. Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
optimal economy and service life. It is recom‐
Navigation
Driving off immediately mended to have maintenance work performed
Do not warm up the engine with the car at a by your Service Centre.
standstill; it is preferable to set off straight away, See also the BMW Maintenance System, see
driving at moderate engine speeds. page 275.
A cold engine will then reach its operating tem‐
perature faster.
Driving with foresight

Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily.
Keep an appropriate distance from the preced‐
ing vehicle.
Anticipating the road situation and adopting a
smooth driving style will reduce fuel consump‐
tion.
Making use of coasting

On approaching a red traffic light, take your foot
off the accelerator and allow the car to roll.
On downward stretches, take your foot off the
Mobility
accelerator and allow the car to roll.

The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Reference
155
156
Navigation
Various examples of how the navigation system
reliably guides you to your destination are shown
here.
157
Navigation*
Navigation
Navigation system 3. "Destination input"
General
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle by means of satellites
and vehicle sensors and guide you reliably to any
specified destination.
Navigation data is saved in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Inputs when the vehicle is stationary
4. Select "Country" or the country displayed.
Only enter data when the car is stationary,
and always obey the traffic regulations and road Entering a town/city
signs in the event of any contradiction between
1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed.
the traffic situation and the instructions given by
the navigation system. You could otherwise
commit an offence and put vehicle occupants
and other road users at risk.◀
Destination input
Manual destination input
General 2. Select letters, if applicable.

When you are entering a town/city or street The list is gradually narrowed down with
name, the system supports you with automatic each input.
name completion and input matching, see
3. Tilt the controller to the right.
page 22.
4. Select the name of a town/city from the list.
Saved town/city and street names can be called
up quickly. If there are several places with the same name:
▷ You can skip input of the country, town or 1. Move to the list of place names.
city if you wish to retain previous inputs. 2. Highlight the town/city.
▷ If only the town/city has been entered, route A preview map is shown in the split screen.
guidance to the town/city centre is started.
3. Select the town/city.
Country input
Entering the postcode
1. Press the MENU button.
1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed.
2. "Navigation"
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select digits.
158
4. Move to the list of postcodes and towns/cit‐ All the roads/streets of the selected country
ies. are offered. The respective town or city is
Overview
5. Mark entry. shown after the street name.
A preview map is shown in the split screen.

6. Select an entry.
Entering a street and junction
Controls
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street or junction in the same way
as the town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
6. Select the letters.
Driving hints
1. Move to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street. 7. Move to the list of street names.
A preview map is shown in the split screen. 8. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street. A preview map is shown in the split screen.

9. Select the street.
Alternatively, enter street and house
number Starting route guidance after
Navigation
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. destination input
2. Enter street in the same way as town/city. 1. "Accept destination"
3. "Building number" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.",

see page 164
4. Select digits.
▷ "Route criteria", see page 166,Adjusting
5. Move to the list of house numbers.
▷ "Points of interest at loc.", see page 161,
6. Select the house number or a range of house
Searching
numbers.
Address book
Road/street not in the destination
The desired road/street is not in the entered Selecting a destination from the
town/city because it is part of another city dis‐ address book
trict.
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book": contacts with addresses
2. "Destination input" are displayed if these addresses have been
checked as destinations.
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
If the contacts with addresses are not shown
4. Move to the list of street names.
by the mobile phone of the BMW Online ad‐
5. "In" select country listed.
Mobility
Reference
159
Navigation dress book* this must first be as destination 3. "Save position as a contact" or "Add
checked, see page 229. position to contact"
3. Select a contact from the list or use "A-Z 4. Select an existing contract from the list, de‐
search". pending on the selection. Select the type of
4. Select "Work address" or "Home address" address and enter first name and last name.
as appropriate. 5. "Save in car"
Saving a destination in the address Edit or delete the address

book 1. "Navigation"
After destination input, save the destination in 2. "Address book"
the address book.
3. Mark entry.
1. Call up "Options". 4. Call up "Options".
2. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
contact"
Accepting your home address as a
destination
The home address must be created. Specifying
the home address, see page 230.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home address"
3. If applicable, select an existing contact.

4. Select "Work address" or "Home address".
5. Enter "Surname" and, if applicable, "First
name".
6. "Save in car"
Saving position
The current position can be saved in the address
4. Start route guidance.
book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Call up "Options".
160
Last destinations Points of interest
Overview
Overview Calling up the search for points of
The last destinations reached are saved auto‐ interest
matically. Selection of points of interest, for example ho‐
These destinations can be called up and incor‐ tels or sights:
porated into route guidance. 1. "Navigation"
Controls
2. "Points of interest"
Calling up last destinations
Limit search for points of interest by location
1. "Navigation"
and category.
2. "Last destinations"
Location of the points of interest
Driving hints
1. "Search location"
Navigation
Starting route guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Select search location of point of interest:
2. "Last destinations" "At current location", "At destination", "At
3. Select destination. another place", "Along the route"
4. Call up "Start guidance".
Category of the points of interest
Editing a destination 1. "Category"
1. "Navigation" 2. Select "All" or a special category of the point
2. "Last destinations" of interest, for example hotels or restau‐
rants.
3. Highlight destination.
4. Call up "Options". Category details
5. "Edit destination" For a point of interest, other details can be dis‐
played which are available in the navigation data,
Deleting the last destinations e.g. restaurant type Italian.
1. "Navigation" "Category details"
2. "Last destinations"
Mobility
3. Highlight destination.
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Reference
161
Navigation 4. Call up "Options".
5. "Further info (BMW Online)"
Destination input via BMW Assist*

A connection to the information service, see
page 239, is established.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Destination input"
To exit category details: tilt the controller to the 3. Call up "Options".
left.
4. "BMW Assist dest. input"
Search by points of interest
Entering points of interest by name
"Start search"
1. "Navigation"
The list of points of interest is displayed.
▷ "At current location"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
Points of interest are sorted by distance and
shown with a directional arrow as a destina‐ 4. Select the letters.
tion. Depending on the distance, the search can
▷ "At destination", "At another place" and take some time. A maximum of 100 entries
"Along the route" can be displayed in the list.
Points of interest are sorted by distance 5. Move to the list of points of interest.
from point of search. 6. Highlight a point of interest.
▷ Destinations in the selected category are A preview map is shown in the split screen.
displayed as symbols in the map view. The 7. Select a point of interest.
display depends on the map scale and the
category.
9. "Start guidance"
Starting route guidance
Entering points of interest via Online
1. Highlight a point of interest.
search*
A preview map is shown in the split screen.
1. "Navigation"
2. Select a point of interest.
3. "Online search"
4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.",
4. Select a point of interest.
see page 164
If a phone number is saved, a telephone con‐
nection can be established. 6. "Start guidance"
Additional information via BMW Displaying points of interest in the map

Online* To show symbols for the points of interest in the
1. "Navigation" map view:
2. "Points of interest" 1. "Navigation"

3. Select a point of interest. 2. "Map"
162
3. Call up "Options". Additional functions
Overview
4. "Display points of interest" Press the controller to access the following ad‐
ditional functions available in the interactive
map:
Controls
5. Select the setting.
Driving hints
Destination input via map ▷ Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or
"Add as another dest.", see page 164
Selecting a destination ▷ "Exit interactive map": back to the map view.
1. "Navigation" ▷ Select "View north-oriented".
2. "Map" ▷ "Display destination": map section around
The map shows the current position of the the destination is displayed.
Navigation
vehicle. ▷ "Display current location": the map section
3. "Interactive map" around the current location is displayed.
▷ "Search for points of int.": search for points
of interest is started.
Destination input by voice control*
General
▷ Instructions for the voice control system,
see page 23.
▷ In the case of destination input using voice
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs. control, it is possible to switch between
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller. voice operation and iDrive.
▷ To move the map: tilt the controller in the ▷ Have possible voice commands read
corresponding direction. aloud: ›Voice commands‹
▷ To move the map diagonally: tilt the con‐

Voice commands
troller in the corresponding direction
and turn it. ▷ Example: to enter a town/city within Ger‐
many as an entire word, the language of the
Mobility
Specifying the street/road system must be German.
If the system is unable to identify a street/road, ▷ The town/city, street and house number can
a street name in the vicinity, the district or at the also be stated in one sentence.
co-ordinates of the destination is displayed. ▷ Countries, locations, roads and junctions
can be spoken as whole words in the lan‐
Reference
163
Entering house number on its own
Navigation guage of the system, see page 78, or spelled
out. House numbers up to number 999 can be en‐
▷ Spell out the input if the language spoken tered.
and the language of the system differ. ›Building number‹
▷ Pronounce letters fluently and avoid exces‐
sive intonation and pauses. Starting route guidance
›Start guidance‹
Entering address in a single sentence
Entering new destination
1. Briefly press the button on the
›Enter new destination‹
steering wheel.
2. ›Destination input‹ Saving a destination
3. Wait for the system prompt. The destination is automatically added to the list
4. Enunciate the address in a single sentence of last destinations.
and in the proposed sequence.
5. Continue input as specified by the system. Planning trip with intermediate
destinations
If required, say each part of the address sepa‐
rately, for example town/city.
New trip
Entering name of town/city on its own A trip can be planned using intermediate desti‐
nations.
When the destination input menu is open, you
have the option of entering the name of a town 1. "Navigation"
or city by enunciating it as a word or spelling it 2. "Map"
out.
3. If necessary, tilt the controller to the left.
1. ›City‹ or ›Spell name of city‹. 4. "Guidance"
2. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city. 5. "Enter new destination"
3. Say the name of the town/city or at least the 6. Select the mode of destination entry.
first three letters.
Depending on the input, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies are suggested.
4. Select the town/city.
▷ Selecting the suggested town/
city: ›Yes‹
▷ Selecting a different town/city: ›New
entry‹
▷ Select an entry, ›Entry ... ‹, for example
entry 2 7. Enter an intermediate destination.
▷ Spell the input: ›Spell name of city‹ 8. "Start guidance"
Entering street or junction on its own Entering a trip destination

Enter the street or junction in the same way as For one trip, a maximum of 30 intermediate des‐
the town/city. tinations can be entered.
1. "Enter new destination"
164
2. Select the mode of destination entry. Direction of trip
Overview
The direction of the trip is reversed: the inter‐
mediate destinations are shown in the list in re‐
verse order.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Options"
Controls
4. "Reverse stage dest. order"
3. Enter an intermediate destination. Options for the intermediate

destinations
4. Select "Add as another dest.". The inter‐
1. "Guidance"
Driving hints
mediate destination is added to the desti‐
nations list and is highlighted. 2. "Display all stage dest."
5. Select the point at which you want the in‐ 3. Select an intermediate destination.
termediate destination inserted: turn and ▷ "Edit destination"
press the controller.
▷ "Reposition stage dest.": move the in‐
termediate destination in the list.
Starting the trip
▷ "Delete stage destination"
Navigation
When you have entered all the intermediate des‐
tinations, highlight the first destination and ▷ "Go to the next stage dest."
"Start guidance".
If, for example, the second intermediate desti‐ Deleting a trip saved in memory
nation is the one highlighted when you start 1. "Saved journeys"
route guidance, the first intermediate destina‐ 2. Highlight the desired trip.
tion is skipped.
symbol indicates the active stage of the trip.
4. "Delete all journeys" or "Delete journey"
Saving a trip
Import trips using USB medium*
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips so that new trips
can be saved. 2. Insert USB medium in USB interface, see
page 140, in the glove box.
3. "Navigation"
2. "Save journey"
4. "Saved journeys"
3. Enter letters.
5. "Import journeys"
4. "OK"
6. "USB"
Selecting a trip saved in memory 7. "OK"

Mobility
1. "Navigation" The maximum number of routes that can be

saved on the USB medium and in the navigation
2. "Saved journeys"
system together is 30, otherwise import is not
3. Select trip. possible.
4. "Start guidance"
Reference
165
Importing trips via BMW Online* Route guidance
Navigation
1. "Navigation"
2. "Saved journeys" Starting route guidance
3. "Import journeys" 1. "Navigation"
4. "BMW Online" 2. Carry out destination input, see page 158.

3. "Accept destination"
Guided tours 4. "Start guidance"
▷ The route is displayed on the control display.
General
▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐
Recommended routes can be added to the
ate destination and the estimated time of ar‐
route guidance, for example a holiday route.
rival are shown in the map view.
Starting guided tours ▷ Arrow view is displayed in the instrument
cluster and Control Display as appropriate.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Saved journeys" Ending route guidance
3. "Guided Tour search" 1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing route guidance

If you did not reach your destination during the
last journey, route guidance may be continued.
"Resume guidance"
4. Select "Country" and "Region" or search
criteria: Route criteria
▷ "Search for name"
General
▷ "Search for nearest Tour"
▷ You can influence the route that is calcula‐
5. If applicable, "Start search" ted by selecting various criteria.
6. Select a guided tour. ▷ You can change the route criteria as often as
7. "Start guidance" you like during destination input or during
8. "Start guidance" route guidance.
▷ Road types form part of the navigation data
Terminate guided tours and are taken into account in route planning,
1. "Navigation" for example avoid motorways.
2. "Map" ▷ The suggested route can differ from your

personal experience.
3. "Guidance"
▷ The settings are saved for the remote con‐
4. "Stop guidance"
trol currently in use.
▷ The route criteria for guided tours cannot be
changed.
166
Altering route criteria ▷ Traffic information is still displayed on the
map.
Overview
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" ▷ Depending on the type of road and the na‐
ture and length of the traffic congestion, the
3. "Route criteria"
route can also be calculated so that it cuts
4. Select a criterion: across the traffic congestion.
▷ "Fast route": time-optimised route
resulting from a combination of a route Activating dynamic route guidance
Controls
as short as feasible and fast roads. 1. "Navigation"
▷ "Efficient route": optimised combi‐ 2. Call up "Options".
nation of the fastest and shortest route.
3. "Dynamic guidance"
▷ "Short route": short route, without
"Dynamic guidance" is activated.
regard to how fast or slow progress will
Driving hints
be.
Course of route
▷ "Alternative routes": alternative routes
Various views of the course of the route are
are suggested if possible when route
available during route guidance:
guidance is active. The individual sug‐
gestions are colour-coded. ▷ Arrow display in the instrument cluster and
the control display.
▷ List of roads and locations.
Navigation
▷ Map view, see page 168.
▷ Arrow view on the Head-Up-Display*, see
page 123.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
route guidance:
5. To select supplementary route criteria, if ▷ Large arrow: current heading.
necessary:
▷ Small arrow: indicator for next change of
▷ "Avoid motorways": motorways are heading.
avoided as far as possible.
▷ Junction view.
▷ "Avoid toll roads": routes with tolls are
▷ Driving lane information.
avoided as far as possible.
▷ Traffic information.
▷ "Avoid pre-paid roads": routes with
long-term tolls are avoided as far as pos‐ ▷ Distance to the next change of direction.
sible. ▷ Street name during the next change of di‐
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided as far rection.
as possible.
Driving lane information
Mobility
Dynamic route guidance In arrow view, a triangle indicates the recom‐

The route is automatically changed if a traffic mended lane on a multilane carriageway.
obstruction is encountered. ▷ Solid triangle: optimum lane
▷ The system does not indicate traffic ob‐ ▷ Hollow triangle: other lane, acceptable at the
structions on the original route. moment. But a lane change might soon be
Reference
necessary.
167
List of roads or towns/cities along the
Navigation 1. "Navigation"
route
2. "Route profile"
A list of streets/roads and places along the route
3. "Recommended refuel"
can be viewed once route guide has been star‐
ted. For each route stage, the distance to be A list of service stations is displayed.
driven and the traffic information are displayed. 4. Highlight the service station.
1. "Navigation" The position of the service station is shown
in the split-screen.
2. "Route profile"
5. Select the service station.
3. Highlight the route stage.
The route stage is displayed in the split
screen. 7. "Start guidance": route guidance to the
service station you selected is started.
Bypassing a section of the route "Add as another dest.": the service station
Calculate a new route for a route stage. is added to the course of the route.
1. "Navigation" Switching spoken instructions on/off

2. "Route profile" The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐
3. "New route for:" rently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Spoken instructions"
Repeating spoken instructions

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Spoken instructions"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the distance 4. Press the controller twice.
within which you want to return to the origi‐
nal route. Volume of spoken instructions
5. Press the controller. Turn the volume knob during the voice instruc‐
tions until the desired volume is obtained.
Cancel bypass
In case you no longer wish to bypass this section Saving voice instructions to favourites
of the route. buttons
1. "Navigation" The function Enable/disable voice instructions
can be saved to a favourites button, see
2. "Route profile"
page 21, for quick access.
3. "New route for:"
4. "Cancel new route"
Map view
Refuelling recommendation
The remaining range is calculated and service Displaying map view
stations along the way are recommended. The location is shown on the map.
168
After starting route guidance, the planned route Automatically set scale
is shown on the map.
Overview
In the north-facing map view, turn the controller
The settings are saved for the remote control in any direction until the scale shows AUTO. The
currently in use. map shows the complete route between the
current position and the destination.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" Settings for map view
The following functions are available directly in The map is displayed on the control display.
Controls
the map view:
Symbol Function
2. "Settings"
Start/stop route guidance. Set optimised map view.
▷ "Day/night mode"
Driving hints
Switch spoken instructions on/
off. Selecting by light ratios and making set‐
tings. This setting is not considered with ac‐
Change route criteria.
tivated traffic layer/grey map.
Search for point of interest. ▷ "Satellite images"
Show traffic information. Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images* are shown scaled to be‐
Navigation
Interactive map. tween 2 km to 1000 km, 1 mile to 600 miles.
Set map view. ▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
Shows a 3D view. Distinctive locations in the
Changes the scale.
navigation data are shown on the map in 3D.
▷ "Traffic situation/grey map"
In map view, roads are represented by different
colours and lines indicating their classification. Map is optimised to display traffic informa‐
Small triangles along the calculated route indi‐ tion. Symbols of points of interest are no
cate areas in which congestion can occur. longer displayed.
Press the controller to hide/show the following
information on the map:
Map view for split-screen
Regardless of the main screen, the map view can
▷ Time and entertainment details
be selected for the split-screen.
▷ Estimated time of arrival, distance from des‐
tination and status of traffic information 1. Call up "Options".
2. "Split screen"
Change map section Split screen is activated.
"Interactive map" 3. Tilt the controller repeatedly to the right until
▷ To move the map: tilt the controller in the the split screen is selected.
corresponding direction. 4. Select "Split screen display" or scale.
Mobility
▷ To move the map diagonally: tilt the control‐ 5. Select map view.
ler in the corresponding direction and turn it.
▷ "Arrow view"
Changing the scale ▷ "Map north-oriented"
1. Select the symbol. ▷ "Map indicating dir. of travel"
2. To change the scale: turn the controller. ▷ "Map perspective"
Reference
169
Traffic information in the map
Navigation ▷ "Position"
▷ "3D exit roads" With traffic situation/grey map activated, the
▷ "Traffic situation/grey map" display on the Control Display is toggled to grey
scales. This facilitates optimum traffic informa‐
6. To change the scale: switch to the split
tion display. Day/night mode is not taken into
screen and turn the controller.
consideration for this setting. Symbols or points
of interest are not displayed.
Traffic information* 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"
Overview 3. Call up "Options",
▷ Have traffic information from radio channels
4. "Settings"
displayed, which transfer the TMC (Traffic
Message Channel) of a traffic warning serv‐ 5. "Traffic situation/grey map"
ice. Information on traffic obstructions and
dangers is continuously updated. Symbols in the map view
▷ The traffic information is displayed in the Depending on the scale of the map and location
map. of the traffic obstruction in relation to the route,
the symbols for traffic obstructions are dis‐
Switching reception on/off played.
1. "Navigation"
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the scale, the length, direction
3. "Receive traffic info" and effect of a traffic obstruction are indicated
by road signs in the map or bars along the cal‐
Calling up traffic information culated route.
1. "Navigation" ▷ Red: traffic jam
2. "Map" ▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic
"Traffic information": traffic information ▷ Yellow: heavy traffic
for the area is listed here. The symbol turns
▷ Green: road clear
red if traffic information affects the route
computed by the system. ▷ Grey: deneral traffic information, e.g. road‐
works
3. "Traffic information"
The colours depend on the information trans‐
The traffic information affecting the compu‐
mitted by the traffic warning services.
ted route is shown first.
The various items of traffic information are Filtering traffic information
sorted by distance from the vehicle's current
Select the traffic information you want displayed
position.
on the map.
4. Select the item of traffic information.
1. "Navigation"
Select "More information" to view more
traffic information. 2. "Map"
5. If applicable, browse to the next or the pre‐ 3. Call up "Options".

ceding item of traffic information. 4. "Traffic info categories"
170
5. Set the filter. Country-specific information via BMW
Online*
Overview
Specific information on countries can be trans‐
ferred via BMW Online, see page 241, for ex‐
ample speed limits on B roads.
1. "Navigation"
Controls
3. "Country info (BMW Online)"
Traffic information in the selected category is

displayed on the map. Navigation data
Driving hints
▷ Traffic information affecting the route ahead
Information on navigation data
are always shown.
1. "Navigation"
▷ For the sake of safety, traffic information re‐
lating to potential hazards (vehicle driving in 2. Call up "Options".
wrong direction on motorway, for example) 3. "Navigation system version" Information re‐
cannot be hidden. garding the version of the data is displayed.
Traffic information during route Updating navigation data
Navigation
guidance
▷ "Dynamic guidance", see page 167 General
System behaviour varies accordingly. You can obtain navigation data and the activa‐
tion code from your Service Centre. Navigation
▷ During route guidance obstructions on the
data is saved in the vehicle and can be updated.
route are considered.
▷ Depending on the volume of data, updating
▷ Particular dangers are displayed independ‐
the data can take several hours.
ently of the setting.
▷ Update while the vehicle is in motion, to save
Traffic obstructions the battery.
The system calculates an optimised route de‐ ▷ Only the basic functions of the navigation
pending on traffic obstructions and road types. system are available while an update is in
progress.
Bypassing traffic obstructions ▷ You can check the status of the update proc‐
1. "Navigation" ess.
2. "Map" ▷ After updating, the system reboots.
3. "Traffic information" ▷ The device containing the navigation update

data can be removed following the update.
4. Items of traffic information affecting the
planned route are shown first. The various
Implement update
Mobility
items of traffic information are sorted by dis‐

tance from the vehicle's current position. 1. Insert navigation DVD into the DVD player
with the labelled side upwards.
5. If necessary, select "Recomm. detour".
2. Follow the instructions on the control dis‐
6. "Detour"
play.
Reference
171
Navigation 3. Enter the activation code of the navigation tem requires a few seconds to calculate a
DVD and, if necessary, change the DVD. new route.
After there has been an interruption to the trip,
follow the instructions on the control display.
Checking status

2. "Navigation update"
What to do if...
▷ The current position cannot be displayed.
The car is in an area not covered by the data,
is in a poor reception area or the system is
currently calculating the position. Reception
will normally be possible outdoors.
▷ A destination without a street is not trans‐
ferred to the route guidance system.
No city centre can be determined for the
place entered.
Enter any street in the place selected and
start route guidance.
▷ A destination is not transferred to the route
guidance system.
The data for the destination is not available
in the navigation data. Choose a destination
as close as possible to the original one.
▷ Letters cannot be selected for destination
input.
The data stored do not contain the destina‐
tion data.
Choose a destination as close as possible to
the original one.
▷ Map view shown in grey scales?
With traffic situation/grey map activated, the
display on the Control Display is toggled to
grey scales. This facilitates optimum traffic
information display.
▷ Spoken instructions cease to be given im‐
mediately before junctions during route
guidance?
Area is not fully recorded, or you have devi‐
ated from the suggested route and the sys‐
172
173
174
Entertainment
This chapter ensures your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations or when
playing CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music
collection.
175
Sound
Sound
General Setting the equaliser

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
The sound settings are saved for the remote
control currently in use. 2. "Tone"
3. "Equaliser"
4. Select the desired setting.
Treble, bass, balance, fader
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting the treble, bass, balance and

fader
2. "Tone"
5. Adjusting: turn the controller.

6. Saving: press the controller.
Multichannel reproduction,
surround*
Choice of stereo and multichannel reproduc‐
tion, surround.
3. Select the desired sound setting.
Setting multichannel reproduction,
surround
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"

Equaliser*
Setting for individual sound frequency ranges. When playing an audio track in stereo, multi‐
channel reproduction - surround - is simulated.
176
Multichannel playback is automatically activa‐
ted or deactivated depending on the audio track
Overview
selected.
Volume
▷ "Speed volume": adaptation of the volume
depending on speed.
Controls
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC sound signal rel‐
ative to the sound output from the enter‐
tainment system.
▷ "Gong": volume of the sound signal, for ex‐
Driving hints
ample for seat belt reminder, in relation to
the sound output from the entertainment
system.
Adjusting volumes
2. "Tone"
Navigation
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
Resetting the sound settings

2. "Tone"
Mobility
3. "Reset"
Reference
177
Radio
Radio
Controls Saving stations

1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
1 Switching entertainment sources

2 Changing station/track
3 Favourites buttons
4 On/off, volume 4. Press and hold down the controller.
5 Traffic reports on/off 5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are saved for the remote control
currently in use.
AM/FM stations The stations can also be saved on the favourites
buttons, see page 21.
Selecting station
1. "Radio" Manual station selection
2. "FM" or "AM" Station selection via frequency.
3. Select the desired station. 1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual search"
4. In the waveband "AM", select if necessary
between "MW", "SW".
5. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
The selected station is saved for the remote

control currently in use.
Changing stations using the button

Press the button.
To save a station: press and hold down the con‐

troller.
178
RDS* stations. If this happens, switch on the REG
function.
Overview
RDS broadcasts additional information in the
FM waveband, for example the station name.
For a station with a number of frequencies, an Switching REG function on/off
automatic changeover to the frequency with the 1. "Radio"
best reception quality takes place if required. 2. "FM"
Switching RDS on/off
Controls
4. "REG"
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
4. "RDS"
Driving hints
rently in use.
Navigation
The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ Digital radio, DAB*
rently in use.
Principle
Regional programmes* Up to 15 digital stations are combined into what
Certain FM stations broadcast regional pro‐ is known as ensembles. Some stations feature
grammes at certain times of day. The following additional programmes. Sports stations, for ex‐
settings are possible: ample, may broadcast various sports events at
the same time.
▷ REG function on:
Recommended setting. Station search*
The set regional programme is retained for Without Professional navigation system, the list
as long as possible. of stations that can be received is not automat‐
Reception quality may deteriorate when you ically updated. To perform an update, start the
go beyond its transmission area. If there is station search manually.
poor reception quality for a longer period,
1. "Radio"
there is a switch to a regional programme
with better reception. 2. "DAB"
▷ REG function off: 3. If necessary, select "All ensembles".
Mobility
When you leave the transmission area for 4. "Station search"

the regional station that is tuned, the radio
changes over to a new regional station if Cancelling the station search
available. Call up any saved station via:
When in an area with at least two regional ▷ Favourites buttons.
Reference
stations, the radio may switch between the

▷ "Saved stations"
179
Selecting station
Radio 3. Select the desired station.
1. "Radio"
2. "DAB"
3. Where applicable, select "All ensembles" or
the desired ensemble.
4. Press the controller again.

5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are saved for the remote control
currently in use.
4. Select the desired station. The stations can also be saved on the favourites
buttons, see page 21.
Displaying additional information

Some stations broadcast additional information
in text form.
1. "Radio"
2. "DAB"
3. Select the desired station.
Changing stations 5. "Station information"
Press the button.
Changing the ensemble

It is only possible to change the ensemble if the
following has been selected: "All ensembles".
Press and hold down the button.
Saving stations
1. "Radio" Automatic DAB/FM changeover*
2. "DAB" General
A station is automatically changed over if it is no
longer available and the DAB/FM changeover is
activated.
First of all, a search is run for the station in an‐
other ensemble. If it is not available in another
180
ensemble, the station’s analogue frequency is Saved stations
searched for.
Overview
Automatic changeover is only possible if the General
corresponding station’s signal is available in ad‐ Forty stations can be saved.
equate quality and the IDs of the stations match.
Calling up a station
Switching on automatic DAB/FM
1. "Radio"
changeover
Controls
2. "Saved stations"
1. "Radio"
2. "DAB"
3. Call up "Options". Saving stations
4. "Autom. DAB/FM changeover" The currently selected station is saved.
Driving hints
1. "Radio"
2. "Saved stations"
3. "Save station"
Navigation
Symbol beside the station name indicates
that a digital station is being played as analogue.
Symbol beside the station name indicates
that a digital station is being played as digital in
another ensemble. 4. Select the desired memory location.
The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐ The list of saved stations is saved for the remote
rently in use. control currently in use.
The stations can also be saved on the favourites
Additional programmes buttons, see page 21.
Symbol indicates that a selected station con‐
tains additional programmes. Sports stations, Deleting a station
for example, may broadcast various sports 1. "Radio"
events at the same time.
2. "Saved stations"
1. "Radio" 3. Select the desired station.
2. "DAB" 4. Call up "Options".
3. Select the desired station. 5. "Delete entry"
Mobility

5. Select the additional station.
Traffic reports*
Display in the status field
▷ TP: Traffic Program is switched on.
Reference
181
Radio ▷ No display: Traffic Program is switched off.
Switching Traffic Program on/off

Press the button.
The traffic report station with the stron‐
gest reception is chosen.

rently in use.
Interrupting a traffic report

Press one of the following buttons during a traf‐
fic radio report:
▷
Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume knob during a traffic report until
the desired volume is obtained.
182
CD/multimedia
Overview
Controls 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Controls
Driving hints
1 Changing entertainment source
Symbol Meaning
2 CD/DVD* player
3 Ejecting CD/DVD CD/DVD* player
4 Changing station/track ... DVD changer*

5 Favourites buttons CD/DVD player in the rear*
Navigation
6 On/off, volume
Formats that can be played
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
CD/DVD* RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL,
DVD-Audio (only video system), DVD-
Playback
Video*.
Loading into the CD/DVD* player ▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD*, SVCD*.
Insert the CD/DVD with the label side upper‐
most. ▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*,
M4A*.
The disk begins to play automatically.
It may take a few minutes to read compressed Playing audio tracks
audio files.
Selecting a track using button
Starting play
A CD/DVD is in the CD/DVD player or the DVD sired track is played.
changer*.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Mobility
Reference
183
Selecting a track using the iDrive Displaying track information
CD/multimedia
Audio CDs
If information is saved for a track, this is dis‐

played automatically:
Select the desired track to start playback. ▷ Artist.
▷ Album title.
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD*.
Depending on the data, it might occur that not
all characters on the CD/DVD are displayed cor‐ ▷ File name of the track.
rectly.
Random playback
1. Select the directory as appropriate.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
To change to a higher-level directory: tilt the
2. "CD/DVD"
controller to the left.
3. Select the desired CD or DVD*.
5. "Random"
2. Select the desired track to start playback.
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files: All

tracks within selected directory are played in
random order.
Random is switched off when the audio source
is changed and the ignition is switched off.
Fast forward/rewind
Keep button pressed.
184
Automatic repeat* 4. "DVD menu"
Overview
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are
repeated automatically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of your home region
Controls
can be played. See also the information on your
DVD.
Code Region
VCD/SVCD
1 USA, Canada 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Driving hints
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ 2. "CD/DVD"
rica 3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
3 South-East Asia 4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired title.
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
Video menu
Navigation
5 North-West Asia, North Africa To open the Video menu: turn the controller
while the DVD is playing.
6 China
If "Back" is displayed, press the controller.
0 All regions
Symbol Function
Playback Calls up the DVD menu.
The video image is shown on the front control Starts playback.
display up to a speed of approximately 3 km/h,
2 mph. In some countries, it is only shown with Pause
the parking brake engaged or in position P of the
Stop
automatic transmission.
Next chapter
DVD video
Previous chapter
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD" Fast forward
3. Select a DVD with video content. Rewind
For fast forward/rewind: each time the controller

is pressed, the speed increases. To stop, start
Mobility
playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to call up the
Video menu.
Reference
2. "DVD menu"
185
CD/multimedia The DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐ 4. Select the desired language or "Do not
pends on the contents of the DVD. display subtitles".
3. To select menu items: tilt and press the con‐
troller.
To change to the Video menu: turn and press the
controller.
Settings for DVD/VCD

For some DVDs, settings are only possible via
the DVD menu, see also information on your
DVD.
Selecting language* Setting the brightness, contrast, colour

The languages available depend on the DVD. 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Colour"
3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.
Selecting subtitles*
Selecting zoom
The available subtitles depend on the DVD.
Display video picture over full screen.
3. "Subtitles"
3. "Other options"
4. "Zoom mode"
186
Selecting title Controls and displays
Overview
DVD video:
1. With the DVD menu displayed, turn the con‐

troller.
3. "Other options"
4. "Select title"
Controls
VCD/SVCD:
1 Emptying the DVD compartments
1. "Select track" 2 LED on the DVD compartment
Driving hints
3 Buttons for DVD compartments
Select camera angle* 4 DVD compartment
The availability of an alternative camera angle 5 Filling the DVD compartments

depends on the DVD and the current track on
the DVD. Filling the DVD compartments
individually
Navigation
2. Call up "Options". 1. Press the button.
3. "Other options" The LED on the first vacant compartment
flashes.
4. "Viewing angle"
2. Select a different compartment if necessary.
5. Select the desired angle of view.
3. Wait until the LEDs on the DVD compart‐
Calling up the main menu, Back ment flash.
These functions are not included on every DVD. 4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the centre.
Therefore, they may not be available for use. The CD/DVD is pulled in automatically and
stored in the selected compartment.
DVD changer* Inserting CDs/DVDs
Via glove box Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs on the

DVD compartment are flashing, otherwise the
CD/DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not force the CD/DVD into the drive; it could
jam and you might not be able to eject it.◀
Filling all the available DVD

compartments
Mobility
1. Press and hold down the button.

The LEDs on the vacant compartments
Press the button.
flash.
The lid opens automatically.
2. Wait until the LEDs on the DVD compart‐
To close: press the cover back into position. ment flash and then insert a CD or DVD,
Reference
making sure it is centred.
187
CD/multimedia The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically Starting play
and stowed in the empty compartments. There is a DVD in the DVD changer.
Inserting CDs/DVDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs on the
2. "CD/DVD"
DVD compartment are flashing, otherwise the
CD/DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. 3. Select the desired DVD.
Do not force the CD/DVD into the drive; it could
Selecting a chapter using the button
jam and you might not be able to eject it.◀
It may take a few minutes to read the CDs/DVDs
sired chapter is played.
after loading.
Removing CDs/DVDs individually Selecting a chapter using iDrive

1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. Press the button. 2. "CD/DVD"
2. Select the DVD compartment. 3. Select the desired DVD.
The CD/DVD is pushed out slightly. 4. Select the desired chapter.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Fast forward/rewind
Removing all CDs/DVDs Keep button pressed.
1. Press and hold down the button.

2. Remove the CDs/DVDs. Selecting language*
The languages available depend on the DVD.
Faults
1. "CD/Multimedia"
A fault has occurred if all the LEDs on the DVD
changer are flashing quickly. 2. "CD/DVD"
Repairing the fault: 3. Select the desired DVD.
1. Press one of the two buttons:
5. "Audio/language"
▷
6. Select the desired language.
▷
Notes
The last CD/DVD inserted is pushed out
slightly. CD/DVD player and changer
2. Remove the CD/DVD. Do not remove the cover
When the LEDs are no longer flashing quickly, All BMW CD/DVD players and changers
the DVD changer is operational again. are Class 1 laser products. Do not operate when
the cover is damaged, otherwise it could cause
Playing audio tracks* severe eye injuries.◀
The audio track of a DVD can be played even if

CDs and DVDs
video playback is not possible in the vehicle.
Using CDs/DVDs
Only the main film is played, without intro or ex‐
tras. ▷ Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive
labels that have been affixed subse‐
188
quently, as these may peel off while in ▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a case.
the drive as a result of the tempera‐
Overview
▷ Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures
tures to which these media are ex‐ above 50 ℃/122 ℉, high levels of humidity
posed during playing. This could dam‐ or direct sunlight.
age the system irreparably.
▷ Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard CDs/DVDs with copy protection
diameter of 12 cm, 5 in and do not use CDs/ CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
DVDs in conjunction with adapters, for ex‐ manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs
Controls
ample CD singles. Otherwise the CDs or the being impossible to play, or only being playable
adapter could jam and be impossible to with restrictions.
eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, for exam‐ MACROVISION
ple DVD Plus, otherwise the CD/DVD could This product contains copyrighted technology
Driving hints
jam and be impossible to eject.◀ based on a number of registered US patents and
intellectual property of the Macrovision Corpo‐
General malfunctions ration and other manufacturers. The use of this
▷ The CD/DVD players and changers have copy protection must be approved by Macrovi‐
been optimised for operation in your vehicle. sion. Media with the corresponding protection –
In some instances, they may be more sen‐ unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision – may
sitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than devices for only be shown privately. It is prohibited to copy
Navigation
stationary use. this technology.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played back, first
check whether it has been inserted cor‐ DTS Digital Surround™
rectly. Manufactured under licence of US pat‐
ent numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
Atmospheric humidity 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other
The CD/DVD or the focussing lens can carry patents issued and applied for in the USA and
condensation due to high humidity and playback worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered
may temporarily not be possible. trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs rights reserved.
If malfunctions occur only with individual CDs/

DVDs, this can be due to one of the following:
Music collection*
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Music memory
▷ With self-recorded CDs/DVDs, possible
causes include inconsistent data-creation General
or burning process, low quality or high age
Tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB media can be
of the CD/DVD blank.
saved in the music collection on a hard disk in
▷ Only write on the upper side of CDs/DVDs
Mobility
the vehicle and played from there.

using a special marker pen.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. Information on the al‐
Damage
bum, for example artist, is saved, if applica‐
▷ Avoid causing fingerprints and protect ble.
against dust, scratches and moisture.
Reference
189
CD/multimedia ▷ CD/DVD or USB medium with compressed The music collection is displayed and the first
audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD track of the CD/DVD is played. The tracks are
or USB medium is saved as an album in the played in the normal order during saving.
vehicle. WMA, MP3, M4A* and AAC* for‐ During saving, bear the following in mind:
mats are saved. Tracks and directories can
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
be deleted later individually, Delete tracks
remove the CD from the CD/DVD player, as oth‐
and directory, see page 193.
erwise saving is interrupted. It is possible to
Tracks with copy protection, DRM, are change over to the other audio sources without
saved, but cannot be played. interrupting saving. Tracks of the current CD/
Backing up music data DVD that have already been saved can also be
Back up music data regularly, as otherwise called up.
it could be lost in the event of a fault in the hard
disk.◀ Interrupting saving
Music recognition technology and re‐ 1. "CD/Multimedia"
lated data are provided by Gracenote®. 2. "CD/DVD"
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐ 3. "Saving..."
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
ery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐ 4. "Cancel saving"
ing. Some services supplied under license from The saving process is interrupted and can be
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. continued at any time.
Saving from CD/DVD Resuming saving

1. Insert a CD or DVD in the CD/DVD player. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD"
3. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 4. "Continue saving"
5. "Save in car" CD/DVD saving is continued at the start of the
track for which saving was interrupted.
Information on the album

During the saving process, the information, for
example the name of the artist, is saved for the
tracks if this information is available in the data‐
base in the vehicle or on the CD.
To update the database, contact your Service
Centre.
190
If the titles do not stored any information, the 3. "Music search"
entire album information, see page 193, of the
Overview
CD may be updated using BMW Online*.
Saving from a USB medium

To save music, a suitable medium must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove box.
▷ Suitable media: USB mass storage facilities,
Controls
for example USB memory sticks or MP3
players with USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable media: USB hard disks, USB 4. Select the desired category.
hubs, USB memory card readers with a
number of bays, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music
Driving hints
from an Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via
the USB audio interface in the centre arm‐
rest.
1. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter‐
face in the glove box, see page 140.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
Navigation
3. "Music collection"
4. Call up "Options". 5. Select the desired entry.
5. "Music data import/export" ▷ Select "A-Z search", see page 22, and
make the desired entry.
6. "Import music (USB)"
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select further categories as appropriate.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. To
find, for example, all the tracks of a certain
artist, only call up the artist. All tracks by that
artist will be displayed.
7. "Start playback"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Playing music
Starting new music search
Music search
"New search"
All tracks for which information is saved can be
called up via music search. All tracks for which
Music search using voice control*
no information is saved can be called up via the
Mobility
corresponding album, see page 192. Instructions for the voice control system, see
page 23.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection" 1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Reference
191
CD/multimedia 2. ›Music search‹ 1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Call up the desired category, for exam‐ 2. "Music collection"
ple ›Select artist‹.
3. Select the desired album.
4. Say the desired entry from the list.
Depending on the album, the tracks or sub‐
5. Select further categories as appropriate. directories of the album are displayed. The
Selecting the track directly: ›Title ... ‹. first track will be played automatically if pos‐
Say the voice command and the name of the sible.
desired track in a single sentence.
Currently playing
List of tracks last generated by a music search,
or the last album selected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Current playback"
4. Change directories if necessary to select a
track.
To change to a higher-level directory: tilt the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All the tracks in the selection are played in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. If applicable, select the desired track.
Top 50 3. Call up "Options".
The 50 most played tracks. 4. "Random"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Top 50"
4. If applicable, select the desired track.
Albums
All saved albums, listed in the order of the date
of saving.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
192
Managing music 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Overview
Albums Album information*
If no information was saved for audio CDs during
Renaming album* saving, it can be updated later via BMW Online
If applicable, the name of the album is entered as required.
automatically during saving. If the name is un‐ The update takes place for each individual al‐
known it can also be changed. bum.
Controls
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Updating album information via BMW
Online
3. Highlight the desired album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Driving hints
5. "Rename album"
5. "Update album info online"
Navigation
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting album
It may not be possible to delete an album while If it was possible to save the album information,
a track from that album is being played. the name of the album is displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia" Free capacity

2. "Music collection" Display free capacity in the music collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
5. "Delete album"
Deleting directory and track 4. "Memory available"
It may not be possible to delete a track while it

Music collection
is being played,
or to delete a directory while a track from that
Mobility
Backing up music collection

directory is being played.
The entire music collection can be backed up on
1. "CD/Multimedia" a USB medium. Ensure that the USB medium
2. "Music collection" has adequate free capacity.
3. Highlight the directory or track. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up

the music collection can take several hours. This
Reference
193
CD/multimedia is why it is best to make the backup during a 3. Call up "Options".
longer journey. 4. "Delete music collection"
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter‐
face in the glove box, see page 140. External devices
3. "CD/Multimedia" Overview
5. Call up "Options". Symbol Meaning
6. "Music data import/export" AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*
Audio interface for mobile phone*
Bluetooth audio*
Rear seat entertainment: AUX-IN

port in the rear* left/right
Rear seat entertainment Profes‐

sional: AUX-IN port in the rear*
7. "Backup music on USB" left/right
AUX-IN port
Overview
▷ Connection of audio devices is possible, for
example MP3 players. The sound output is
via the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: medium sound and vol‐
ume settings on the audio device. The
Saving music collection to the vehicle sound might depend on the quality of the
audio files.
When music is saved from a USB medium, the
existing music collection in the vehicle is re‐ Connecting
placed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting music collection

1. "CD/Multimedia" The AUX-IN port is in the centre armrest.
194
Connect the headphones or line-out connection phones that are supported by the USB audio
of the equipment to the jack connector. interface.
Overview
▷ Connection is via snap-in adapter if your ve‐
Playback hicle is equipped with extended connectivity
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and of the music player in the mobile phone: Ap‐
select a track. ple iPhone or mobile phones.
2. "CD/Multimedia" Playback is only possible if there is no con‐
3. Any "External devices" nector in the USB audio interface.
Controls
4. "AUX front" Due to the large variety of the audio devices
available on the market, operation using the ve‐
Volume control hicle cannot be ensured for every audio device/
mobile phone.
The volume of the sound output depends on the
Ask at your Service Centre regarding suitable
Driving hints
audio device. If this volume differs significantly
from other audio sources, it makes sense to bal‐ audio devices/mobile phones.
ance the volumes.
Audio files
Adjust volume Playback of common audio files is possible:
1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ MP3.
2. Any "External devices" ▷ WMA.
Navigation
3. "AUX front" ▷ WAV (PCM).
4. "Volume" ▷ AAC*, M4A*.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via
USB audio interface
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume

setting is reached and press the controller.
USB audio interface*/audio interface,

mobile phone* USB audio interface in the centre armrest.
Use for connecting flexible adapter cable.
Overview
External audio devices can be connected, Op‐ Connect Apple iPod/iPhone to the
Mobility
eration is done using the iDrive. The sound out‐ USB interface.
put is via the vehicle loudspeakers. The menu structure of the Apple
iPod/iPhone is supported by the
Connection options for external devices USB audio interface.
▷ Connection is via USB audio interface: Ap‐
ple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, for example
Reference
MP3 player, USB memory sticks or mobile
195
Connection of USB device via USB
CD/multimedia 3. Select the or symbol.
audio interface
Playing starts with the first track.

USB audio interface in the centre armrest. When an Apple iPhone is connected via the
Connect using the flexible adapter cable. This snap-in adapter and an audio device is simulta‐
protects the USB interface and your USB device neously connected to the AUX-IN port, the audio
against mechanical damage. signal of the AUX-IN port is played.
Connect the USB device to the In the split-screen view, split-screen*, after a
USB interface. few seconds, the CD cover belonging to the title
is displayed.
Searching for tracks

After connecting for the first time Options via:
Information on all titles, e.g. interpretation on ▷ Playlists

type of music, as well as the playback lists are ▷ Information: music genre, artist, album,
transferred to the vehicle. This might take some tracks.
time, depending on the USB device and the ▷ Additionally in the case of USB devices: file
number of tracks. directory, composer.
During transfer, the tracks can be called up via The titles are displayed if they have been cre‐
the file directory. ated with Roman letters.
Number of tracks Starting the track search

The information from up to four USB devices or 1. "CD/Multimedia"
for a total of approximately 36,000 tracks can be
2. "External devices"
saved in the vehicle. If a fifth device is connected
or if more than 36,000 tracks are saved, the in‐ 3. Select the or symbol.
formation for existing tracks is deleted. 4. Select the desired category, for example
"Genre" or "Artist".
Copy protection All entries are shown in a list.
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐ ▷ Call up "A-Z search" and make the de‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played. sired entry. When you enter a character,
a filter is run on the basis of this charac‐
Playback ter as the first letter. When you enter
1. "CD/Multimedia" several characters, all the results that
2. "External devices" contain this character string are dis‐
played.
196
▷ Select the desired entry from the list. Fast forward/rewind
Overview
Keep button pressed.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, for example very high
temperatures, see the operating instructions of
Controls
the audio device.
Depending on the format of the audio files per‐
5. Select further categories as appropriate. fect playback cannot be ensured in every case;
Not all categories need to be selected. If, for for example bit rates higher than 256 Kbit/s.
Driving hints
example, all the tracks of a certain artist are
to be displayed, it is sufficient to call up only Notes on connecting
this artist. All tracks by that artist will be dis‐ ▷ The connected audio device is supplied with
played. a maximum of 500 mA if the device supports
6. "Start playback" this. For this reason, do not connect the de‐
vice to a socket in the vehicle.
Starting a new track search ▷ Do not insert the plug forcibly in the USB in‐
terface.
Navigation
"New search"
▷ Do not connect any devices such as fans or
Playlists lights to the USB audio interface.
Calling up playlists. ▷ Do not connect up USB hard drives.
1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Do not use the USB audio interface for
charging external devices.
3. Select the or symbol. Bluetooth audio*
4. "Playlists"
Overview
Currently playing ▷ Playback of music files from external devi‐
List of currently played tracks. ces such as audio devices or mobile phones
via Bluetooth is possible.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Using a mobile phone as an audio source,
2. "External devices" see page 220.
3. Select the or symbol. ▷ The sound output is via the vehicle loud‐
4. "Current playback" speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output depends on
Random playback the device. If applicable, change volume set‐
The current list of tracks is played in random or‐ tings on the device.
Mobility
der. ▷ Up to four external devices can be registered

1. "CD/Multimedia" with the vehicle.
Reference
4. "Random"
197
Requirements
CD/multimedia 6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
▷ Suitable device. Visit www.bmw.com/blue‐ the display of the device.
tooth for more information. Request using the iDrive or device to enter
▷ Device ready for operation. the same Bluetooth passkey.
▷ Ignition switched on. 7. Enter and confirm passkey.
▷ Bluetooth in the vehicle, see page 220, and

device activated.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
device, for example connect without confir‐
mation or visibility, see Owner’s Handbook
of the device.
▷ A number with a minimum of 4 and a maxi‐
mum 16 positions is specified as the Blue‐
tooth passkey. Only required for non-recur‐
ring registration. If connection was successful, the device is
shown as connected.
Connecting White symbol: device active as audio source.
Connecting the device If the connection was unsuccessful: what is and
Only connect the device when the vehicle when, see page 199.
is stationary. Otherwise, you may become dis‐
tracted and endanger the vehicle occupants and Connecting a certain device
other road users.◀ An already connected device can be connected
1. "CD/Multimedia" as an active audio source.
2. "Bluetooth (audio)" Connection not possible if a data exchange us‐
ing a Bluetooth-connected mobile phone has
3. If applicable, "Bluetooth audio"
already taken place.
4. "Add new device"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played. 2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
3. If applicable, "Bluetooth audio"
4. Select desired device from list of registered
devices.
5. To perform other operations on the device;

see the Owner’s Handbook of the device: for
example finding/connecting Bluetooth de‐
vice or new device. White symbol: device active as audio source.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown
on the display of the device.
198
Playback In the case of a mobile phone only the audio
connection is disconnected. All other connec‐
Overview
General tions are maintained.
▷ Displaying title information depends on the
device. Disconnecting a device
▷ Can be operated using the device or iDrive. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
▷ Playback is interrupted if a data interchange 2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

has taken place using a mobile phone con‐ 3. If applicable, "Bluetooth audio"
Controls
nected using Bluetooth. 4. Highlight the device to be disconnected.
Starting play
6. "Remove device from list"
1. Connecting a device.
Driving hints
2. "CD/Multimedia"
Navigation
What to do if...
Visit www.bmw.com/bluetooth for more infor‐
mation on compatible devices.
5. Select the desired track from the list. Compatible mobile phones, see page 218
▷ Device not supported by the vehicle.
Playback menu*
If applicable, perform a software update*,
Not all functions may be available, depending on see page 200.
the device.
▷ Device not registered or paired.
Symbol Function Do the Bluetooth passkeys for device and
Next track vehicle match. Enter the same passkey on
the device and using iDrive.
Fast forward: keep symbol pressed.
Duration for passkey input longer than
Previous title 30 seconds. Repeat the connection at‐
Rewind: keep symbol pressed. tempt.
Too many Bluetooth devices paired to the
Disconnecting audio connection device or the vehicle? If necessary delete
Mobility
the pairing information for some other de‐

1. "CD/Multimedia"
vice.
2. "Bluetooth (audio)"
Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
3. Select desired device from list of connected is the battery low? Charge the mobile phone
devices. using the snap-in adapter or the charging
cable.
Reference
199
CD/multimedia If appropriate, only one device can be con‐ Software updates and the related information
nected to the vehicle, depending on the mo‐ are posted on the website at www.bmw.com/
bile phone. De-register the device from the update.
vehicle and only register and connect one
device. Show current version
Is the device no longer responding. Switch The information about the version of the soft‐
the device off and on again. ware currently installed is displayed.
Repeat the connection attempt. 1. "Settings"
▷ No music can be played back. 2. "Software update"
Start the program for playing back music 3. "Show current version"
files on the device and if necessary, select a
track via the device. Updating software
Activate and then deactivate the mute func‐ Do not attempt to update the software unless
tion on the radio operating panel. the vehicle is at a standstill.
▷ Music files are played back, but only at low
1. Save the software update file in the main di‐
volume.
rectory of a USB storage device.
Adjust the volume controls on the device.
2. Connect the USB storage device to the USB
▷ Playback is disrupted when a button is interface of the USB audio interface in the
pressed on the device or if other messages centre arm rest. Updating via the USB inter‐
are issued via the device. face in the glove box is not possible.
Switch off keypad acknowledgement tones 3. "Settings"
and other audio output at the device.
4. "Software update"
▷ Playback is interrupted by phone calls or
5. "Update software"
traffic announcements and does not resume
automatically.
Activate and then deactivate the mute func‐
tion on the radio operating panel.
▷ Playback not possible if the mobile phone is
connected via both Bluetooth Audio and the
extended connectivity of the music player in
the mobile phone* option.
Disconnect one of the two pairing connec‐
tions, for example disconnect audio connec‐
6. "Start update"
tion, see page 199, and restart playback.
7. "OK"
If you have worked through all the points in the
list and the desired function is still unavailable, The software updates listed are installed.
contact hotline support or Service.
Restoring previous version
Software update* If necessary, the software can be restored to the
Depending on the current software, the vehicle status prior to the most recent software update.
supports different external devices. A software Do not attempt to restore the previous version
update may, for example, allow you to connect of the software unless the vehicle is at a stand‐
new mobile phones or external devices to the still.
vehicle.
200
1. "Settings" No symbol: analogue TV channels.
Overview
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK"
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
Controls
While a software update or a restore is in pro‐
gress, BMW services*, Office functions* and
paired devices are temporarily unavailable. Wait 4. Select the desired channel.
a few minutes until availability is restored. The
The navigation bar is displayed. It is hidden after
same applies when you view the information on
Driving hints
five seconds.
the currently installed version of the software.
To show the navigation bar: press the controller.
The selected channel is saved for the remote
Television, TV* control currently in use.
General Station search

For your safety, the TV image in the front is only The station search takes up to 3 minutes de‐
Navigation
displayed up to approximately 3 kph, and in pending on the number of channels offered. If
some national versions, only with the parking not all offered channels are listed, it might be
brake applied or with the automatic gearbox in necessary to reset the TV standard, see
the P position. page 203.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Selecting program
2. "TV"
All receivable analogue and digital TV channels
as well as digital radio stations appear in a list. 3. Call up "Options".
The radio stations are shown at the end of the 4. "Station search"
list.
In certain circumstances, the list of channels Cancelling the station search
that can be received might not be updated au‐ "Cancel station search"
tomatically. Update the list with station search,
see page 201, if necessary. Changing the channel
1. "CD/Multimedia" 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "TV" 2. "TV"
3. "All programs" 3. ▷ "Next program" or "Previous

program"
The channel last seen is displayed.
Digital TV channels.
Mobility
▷ Press the button.

Digital radio stations. ▷ Turn the controller.
The next program or the next program, as appli‐
cable, from the "All programs" or "Saved
programs" list, as selected beforehand, is dis‐
played.
Reference
201
Saving the channel
CD/multimedia 2. "TV"
1. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Saved programs"
2. "TV" 4. Highlight the channel to be deleted.
3. "All programs" 5. Call up "Options".
4. Select the desired channel. 6. "Delete"
Adjusting TV
6. "Save program"
7. Select the desired memory location. Brightness and contrast
The saved channels are stored for the remote 1. "CD/Multimedia"
control currently in use.
2. "TV"
Channel information 3. Select brightness or contrast.
Information on the currently selected channel.

For broadcasts that are starting, information is
available up to 4 hours in advance. The function
must be supported by the TV channel.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "TV"
3. "Program information"

Colour
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "TV"
4. "Colour"
Saved channels
Twenty-five channels can be saved.
Digital TV channels.
Digital radio stations.
No symbol: analogue TV channels.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "TV"
3. "Saved programs"
4. Select the desired channel.
Deleting channels
1. "CD/Multimedia"
202
5. Adjusting: turn the controller. Automatic analogue/digital
changeover
Overview
Automatic changeover between analogue and
digital reception of a station, if the digital recep‐
tion is not longer possible in a region. Require‐
ment: availability of the corresponding analogue
station.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Controls
2. "TV"
Zoom 5. "Auto. signal changeover"
Driving hints
Showing an enlarged TV image.
Selecting the audio track
1. "CD/Multimedia"
The range of audio tracks available depends on
2. "TV" the TV programme and time of day.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Zoom mode"
2. "TV"
Navigation
Select from country list 3. Call up "Options".
The TV format is not the same in every country. 4. "Audio track"
The TV receiver can be adjusted to all common
formats. Select the desired region.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "TV"
4. "TV standard"
5. Select the desired audio track.
Teletext
Calling up teletext
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "TV"
5. Select the desired region.
Mobility

rently in use.
Reference
203
CD/multimedia 3. "Videotext"
Selecting page
1. "Select page"
2. Turn the controller until the desired page

number is displayed.
If the contents are too long to be shown on a
single page the display is scrolled automatically.
Changing pages
Select the or symbol.
Zoom
The top or bottom half of the page can be en‐
larged.
Highlight "Zoom" and press repeatedly until
the desired view is displayed.
Automatic scrolling
A page may consist of several sub-pages which
are automatically scrolled through.
To prevent scrolling: select the symbol.
To permit scrolling: select the symbol.
204
Rear entertainment*
Overview
Controls The rear entertainment and screens are
switched on/off.
After the ignition is switched off the system
must be switched on again.
Controls
Screens
Adjusting
Driving hints
Risk of sustaining burns with the screen
1 Screen, left folded out
2 Screen, right Do not reach behind the screen; otherwise
3 Centre armrest, remote control burns could result. The back of the screen can
get very hot.◀
4 CD/DVD player
Navigation
CD/DVD player in the rear
▷ To fold out: pull the lower edge.
▷ To fold in: press against the lower edge.
Notes
1 CD/DVD compartment
▷ Do not cover the lower edge of the screen,
2 Ejecting CD/DVD
as the sensors and the infrared interface are
3 On/off, right installed there.
4 Headphone connection, right ▷ When loading the rear seats and adjusting
5 Cinch sockets the backrests of the front seat, fold in the
6 Headphone connection, left screens.
7 On/off, left ▷ To clean the screens, comply with the infor‐

mation regarding care, see page 292.
Mobility

Press the button on the left or right on
the CD/DVD player in the rear for the
relevant side.
Reference
205
Remote control
Rear entertainment The send time of the remote control is limited in
accordance with legal regulations. Pressing or
In the centre armrest in the rear turning the relevant button again allows a func‐
tion to be executed again.
Changing the batteries

No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, other‐
wise their contents can cause damage.◀
Horizontal storage in the centre armrest
Menu guidance
Press the but‐ Function

ton
Operating principle as front 1. Remove the cover. To do so, press the

controller. cover, arrow 1, and push forwards, arrow 2.
Turn the wheel: highlights a 2. Insert batteries of the same type.

menu item. 3. Close the cover.
Press middle button: con‐ Dispose of old batteries at an authorised
firm selection. collecting point or hand them in to a
Press the arrow buttons: Service Centre.
switches between screens.
Calls up the main menu.

Controls
Displays the previous menu. Almost all functions can be operated in the same
way as at the front. Special features of operation
in the rear are listed in the following section.
Calls up the "Options"
menu. Audio/video playback
Switches stations, tracks or
chapters. Audio
Keep button pressed: fast Audio can be played from every source in the
forward/rewind. vehicle via rear entertainment.
Operation is the same as for audio playback at
Adjusts the volume. the front, see page 183.
Switches over for left/right Video

volume adjustment. Video can be played in the rear from the
following sources:
▷ TV*
206
▷ DVD changer* Sound
Overview
▷ CD/DVD player in the rear In the rear, only treble and bass can be set. The
▷ External device in the rear setting is made separately for the headphones
on the left and right.
If a video is being played in the rear passenger
compartment, the CD/DVD player in the rear Operation is the same as for the sound settings
passenger compartment cannot be selected at the front, see page 176.
from the front.
Settings
Controls
Operation is the same as for video playback at
the front, see page 185. The following settings are possible:
▷ "Rear displays"
Radio ▷ "Language/Units": the language can be set
If the same radio source is selected at the front jointly for all screens.
Driving hints
and in the rear (for example FM/AM), the same ▷ "Tone"
radio station is played.
Operation is the same as for the radio at the Options menu
front, see page 178. No split screen possible, no integrated Owner’s
Handbook.
CD/multimedia
Operation is the same as for the options menu
at the front, see page 19.
Navigation
CD/DVD
If the same audio source (CD/DVD player at the
front, CD/DVD player in the rear, DVD changer)
is selected at the front and in the rear, the same
Enabling
source is played.
Enabling the rear
Operation is the same as for the CD/DVD at the
Only possible using the iDrive at the front.
front, see page 183.
Notes regarding CDs/DVDs, see page 188. 1. "Settings"
2. "Enable rear Controller"
Music collection* 3. Select the desired priority.
It is only possible to save music or export and
import data via the CD/DVD player at the front or
via the USB interface in the glove box.
If the music collection is selected at the front and
in the rear, playback is independent.
Operation is the same as for music collection at
the front, see page 189.
TV*
Mobility
If TV is selected at the front and in the rear, the

same channel is played. Enable options
Operation is the same as for TV at the front, see
Driver has priority
page 201.
▷ The source selected at the front with iDrive
is played over the vehicle loudspeakers. It
Reference
can be selected from the rear passenger
207
Rear entertainment compartment but it cannot be operated from front and switch on the system, see
there. Other audio or video sources may be page 205.
operated.
▷ Sound output in the rear is only possible via
headphones. Headphones, vehicle
▷ iDrive at the front can be used to select the loudspeakers
source that is to be displayed in the rear.
Setting the source in the rear using the iDrive at
Connecting headphones
the front:
Normal headphones
1. Call up "Options". Connection is via jack connector 3.5 mm, 1/8 in,
2. "Select rear source" see page 205, on the CD/DVD player in the rear
3. Select the desired audio or video source.
Infrared headphones
Same priority Connection is via the infrared interface at the
▷ All the audio and video sources can be op‐ bottom screen edge.
erated using the control centre in the front Suitable infrared headphones and information
or in the rear. on supported headphones can be obtained from
▷ Sound output in the rear via headphones: your Service Centre.
the source selected using the iDrive at the In the case of infrared headphones, make sure
front is output via the vehicle loudspeakers. that the connection between the headphones
▷ Sound output via loudspeakers: the source and infrared interface is not interrupted:
last selected using the iDrive at the front or ▷ Do not obstruct the area between the inter‐
in the rear is output via the vehicle loud‐ face and headphones.
speakers. ▷ Do not cover the interface.
▷ Do not scratch the interface.
Rear has priority
Fold up the screens for clear reception.
▷ The source that was selected in the rear can
be selected from the front using iDrive. Unfavourable lighting conditions, for example
However, it cannot be operated from there. very bright ambient light, can impair reception.
Other audio or video sources may be oper‐
ated. Sound output via headphones of
▷ Sound output in the rear via headphones:
vehicle loudspeakers
the source selected using the iDrive at the Operation is only possible in the rear.
front is output via the vehicle loudspeakers. 1. Call up "Options".
▷ Sound output via loudspeakers: the source 2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers"
selected in the rear is output via the vehicle
loudspeakers. No audio or video sources With the following setting, sound output in the
can be selected using the iDrive at the front. rear is not possible using the vehicle loud‐
speaker: "Driver has priority".
Switching off the rear DVD
▷ The rear entertainment is switched off.
▷ Switching on rear entertainment again: se‐
lect another priority using the iDrive at the
208
External devices 4. "Volume"
Overview
General
It is possible to connect external audio, video
devices or digital cameras via cinch sockets, see
page 205, on the CD/DVD player. The operation
is done via the external device.
Due to the large number of audio and video de‐
Controls
vices available on the market, faultless playback
via the screen cannot be ensured for every audio
and video device. 5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
Connecting an external device
Driving hints
1. Fold down the cover of the cinch sockets on
the CD/DVD player. What to do if...
2. Connect the external device to the cinch ▷ You can only see a black screen
sockets.
Switch on system.
▷ Video: yellow socket
▷ Nothing can be selected on the screen
▷ Audio: white and red socket
Change the batteries of the remote control.
Navigation
Starting play ▷ Radio or TV channels are greyed out and
cannot be selected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Function is restricted based on the selected
priority. Change priority.
3. Select the or symbol.
▷ DVD does not play back
Volume control The disk does not begin to play automati‐

callyStart DVD manually, see page 185.
The volume of the sound output depends on the
audio device. If this volume differs significantly ▷ Vehicle loudspeaker volume cannot be ad‐
from other audio sources, it makes sense to bal‐ justed in the rear
ance the volumes. Sound output in the rear is done over the
headphones. Change any priority and out‐
Adjust volume put the sound over the vehicle loudspeak‐
You can only adjust the volume if no external ers.
video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Mobility
Reference
209
Rear entertainment, Professional*
Rear entertainment, Professional
Controls The rear entertainment and screens are

switched on/off.
After the ignition is switched off the system
must be switched on again.
Screens
Adjusting
Risk of sustaining burns with the screen
1 Screen, left folded out
2 Screen, right Do not reach behind the screen; otherwise
3 Controller with buttons burns could result. The back of the screen can
get very hot.◀
4 CD/DVD player
CD/DVD player in the rear
▷ To fold out: pull the lower edge.

▷ To fold in: press against the lower edge.
Notes
1 CD/DVD compartment
▷ Do not cover the lower edge of the screen,
2 Ejecting CD/DVD
as the sensors and the infrared interface are
3 On/off, right installed there.
4 Headphone connection, right ▷ When loading the rear seats and adjusting
5 Cinch sockets the backrests of the front seat, fold in the
6 Headphone connection, left screens.
7 On/off, left ▷ To clean the screens, comply with the infor‐

mation regarding care, see page 292.

Press the button on the left or right on
the CD/DVD player in the rear for the
relevant side.
210
iDrive in the rear Operation is the same as for video playback at
Overview
Radio
If the same radio source is selected at the front
and in the rear (for example FM/AM), the same
radio station is played.
Operation is the same as for the radio at the
Controls
CD/multimedia
Operation is the same as for iDrive at the front,
see page 17.
CD/DVD
Driving hints
▷ To adjust the volume: turn, arrow 1.
If the same audio source (CD/DVD player at the
▷ Activate the controller and switch between front, CD/DVD player in the rear, DVD changer)
the screens: press the button, arrow 2. is selected at the front and in the rear, the same
A green LED indicates which side is active source is played.
and can be operated using the iDrive in the Operation is the same as for the CD/DVD at the
rear. front, see page 183.
Notes regarding CDs/DVDs, see page 188.
Navigation
Controls Music collection*
Almost all functions can be operated in the same It is only possible to save music or export and
way as at the front. Special features of operation import data via the CD/DVD player at the front or
in the rear are listed in the following section. via the USB interface in the glove box.
If the music collection is selected at the front and
Audio/video playback in the rear, playback is independent.
Operation is the same as for music collection at
Audio
Audio can be played from every source in the
vehicle via rear entertainment. TV*
Operation is the same as for audio playback at If TV is selected at the front and in the rear, the
the front, see page 183. same channel is played.
Operation is the same as for TV at the front, see
Video
page 201.
Video can be played in the rear from the
following sources: Sound
▷ TV* For headphones in the rear, only treble and bass
▷ DVD changer* can be set. The setting is made separately for
Mobility
▷ CD/DVD player in the rear the headphones on the left and right.
▷ External device in the rear Operation is the same as for the sound settings
If a video is being played in the rear passenger
compartment, the CD/DVD player in the rear
Telephone*
passenger compartment cannot be selected
Reference
from the front. An incoming call can be accepted or rejected.
211
Enabling
Rear entertainment, Professional Operation same as front telephone, see
page 221.
Enabling the rear
Navigation*
Only possible using the iDrive at the front.
Route planning is possible separately in the rear
left/right. It is only possible to start the route 1. "Settings"
guidance at the front. 2. "Enable rear Controller"
Operation is the same as for navigation at the 3. Select the desired priority.
Suggesting a destination
A destination or trip can be forwarded to the
front as a suggestion. The suggestion can be
accepted at the front and saved or cancelled.
This function is not available with the following
setting: "Driver has priority"
1. Enter destination.
2. "Suggest destination"
Enable options
Contacts
Driver has priority
Operation is the same as for contacts at the
▷ The source selected at the front with iDrive
front.
is played over the vehicle loudspeakers. It
can be selected from the rear passenger
BMW Services
compartment but it cannot be operated from
Operation is the same as for BMW Services at there. Other audio or video sources may be
the front, see page 239. operated.
▷ Sound output in the rear is only possible via
Settings
headphones.
The following settings are possible:
▷ iDrive at the front can be used to select the
▷ "Rear display" source that is to be displayed in the rear.
▷ "Language/Units": the language can be set Setting the source in the rear using the iDrive at
jointly for all screens. the front:
▷ "Tone"
▷ "Climate"
2. "Select rear source"
Vehicle information 3. Select the desired audio or video source.
Content of the on-board computer can be dis‐
Same priority
played. Operation is only possible at the front.
▷ All the audio and video sources can be op‐
Options menu erated via the iDrive in the front or in the rear.
No split screen possible, no integrated Owner’s ▷ Sound output in the rear via headphones:
Handbook. the source selected using the iDrive at the
front is output via the vehicle loudspeakers.
Operation is the same as for the options menu
212
▷ Sound output via loudspeakers: the source ▷ Do not obstruct the area between the inter‐
last selected using the iDrive at the front or face and headphones.
Overview
in the rear is output via the vehicle loud‐ ▷ Do not cover the interface.
speakers.
▷ Do not scratch the interface.
Rear has priority Fold up the screens for clear reception.
▷ The source that was selected in the rear can Unfavourable lighting conditions, for example
be selected from the front using iDrive. very bright ambient light, can impair reception.
Controls
However, it cannot be operated from there.
Other audio or video sources may be oper‐ Sound output via headphones of
ated. vehicle loudspeakers
▷ Sound output in the rear via headphones: Operation is only possible in the rear.
the source selected using the iDrive at the 1. Call up "Options".
Driving hints
front is output via the vehicle loudspeakers.
2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers"
▷ Sound output via loudspeakers: the source
selected in the rear is output via the vehicle With the following setting, sound output in the
loudspeakers. No audio or video sources rear is not possible using the vehicle loud‐
can be selected using the iDrive at the front. speaker: "Driver has priority".
Switching off the rear DVD

External devices
Navigation
▷ The rear entertainment is switched off.
▷ Switching on rear entertainment again: se‐ General
lect another priority using the iDrive at the
It is possible to connect external audio, video
front and switch on the system, see
devices or digital cameras via cinch sockets, see
page 210.
page 210, on the CD/DVD player. The operation
is done via the external device.
Due to the large number of audio and video de‐
Headphones, vehicle
vices available on the market, faultless playback
loudspeakers via the screen cannot be ensured for every audio
and video device.
Connecting headphones
Connecting an external device
Normal headphones
1. Fold down the cover of the cinch sockets on
Connection is via jack connector 3.5 mm, 1/8 in,
the CD/DVD player.
see page 210, on the CD/DVD player in the rear
2. Connect the external device to the cinch
Infrared headphones sockets.
Connection is via the infrared interface at the ▷ Video: yellow socket

bottom screen edge. ▷ Audio: white and red socket
Mobility
Suitable infrared headphones and information

on supported headphones can be obtained from Starting play
your Service Centre. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
In the case of infrared headphones, make sure 2. "External devices"
that the connection between the headphones 3. Select the or symbol.
and infrared interface is not interrupted:
Reference
213
Volume control
Rear entertainment, Professional put the sound over the vehicle loudspeak‐
The volume of the sound output depends on the ers.
audio device. If this volume differs significantly
from other audio sources, it makes sense to bal‐
ance the volumes.
Adjust volume
You can only adjust the volume if no external
video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume

What to do if...
▷ You can only see a black screen
Switch on system.
▷ Nothing can be selected on the screen
Toggling between the screens.
▷ Radio or TV channels are greyed out and
cannot be selected.
Function is restricted based on the selected
priority. Change priority.
▷ DVD does not play back
The disk does not begin to play automati‐
cally. Start DVD manually, see page 185.
▷ Vehicle loudspeaker volume cannot be ad‐
justed in the rear
Sound output in the rear is done over the
headphones. Change any priority and out‐
214
215
216
Communication
All of the possibilities available for mobile
communication with your family, friends, business
partners or service providers are summarised in
this chapter.
217
Telephone*
Telephone
Overview devices with Bluetooth interface that are sup‐

ported by the mobile phone preparation option.
Principle
Viewing vehicle identification number
Mobiles or other external devices, e.g. audio
(VIN) and software part number
player, can be connected to the vehicle by Blue‐
tooth. The vehicle identification number (VIN) and soft‐
ware part number are necessary so that you can
After registering once, these devices are auto‐
check which mobile phones are supported by
matically detected when the ignition is switched
the mobile phone preparation option. You might
on, as soon as they are in the vehicle and can
also need details about the mobile phone's soft‐
then be operated using iDrive, keys on the steer‐
ware version.
ing wheel or by voice*.
External devices can be used depending on 1. "Telephone"
functionality of the device as a telephone or as 2. "Options"
an audio source through the vehicle. The tele‐ 3. "Bluetooth Info"
phone functions are described below. Operation
4. "Display system information"
of audio functions, see page 197.
These suitable mobile phones have a certain
If the rear telephone* is registered, three more
software version that supports the functions of
external devices can be registered.
the vehicle described below.
It might be necessary to have certain functions
Malfunctions may occur when using other mo‐
enabled by the mobile phone service provider.
bile phones or software versions.
Using the telephone while the vehicle is in Do not operate a connected mobile phone with
motion the keypad of the phone to avoid malfunctions.
Only make inputs when traffic activity permits. You have the option of performing a software
As the driver, do not make telephone calls with update*, see page 200.
the mobile phone in your hand while the vehicle
is in motion; use the hands-free speaking sys‐
tem. The vehicle occupants and other road
users could otherwise be endangered.◀
Connecting/disconnecting
the mobile phone
Snap-in adapter*
Overview
The snap-in adapter enables:
The following functions are available:
▷ Storage of the mobile phone.
▷ Using a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Charging of the battery.
▷ Using a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Connection to the external aerial of the ve‐
hicle. ▷ Using an audio device as an audio source,
see page 198.
This ensures better network reception and
uniform reproduction quality. Functions supported by the mobile phone are
shown as a symbol when registering.
Compatible mobile phones White symbol: function is active.
Visit www.bmw.com/bluetooth for detailed in‐ Grey symbol: function is inactive.
formation about the mobile phones and external
218
Symbol Function Perform the connection in full at either the front
or rear control display.
Overview
Telephone
1. "Telephone"
Data exchange 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
Audio source 3. "Add new device"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
Requirements played.
Controls
▷ Suitable mobile phone.
▷ Mobile phone operational.
▷ Bluetooth in the vehicle, see page 220, and
mobile phone activated.
Driving hints
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
mobile phone, for example connect without
confirmation or visibility; see Owner’s
Handbook of the device.
▷ Any audio connection is to be deactivated,
4. Perform other operations on the mobile
see page 219.
phone, see the Owner’s Handbook of the
▷ A number with a minimum of 4 and a maxi‐ mobile phone: for example finding/connect‐
Navigation
mum 16 positions has been specified as the ing Bluetooth device or new device.
Bluetooth passkey. Only required for non-
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown
recurring registration.
on the display of the mobile phone.
▷ Ignition switched on.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the display of the mobile phone.
Audio connection
Request using the iDrive or mobile phone to
If you intend using the mobile phone as a tele‐
enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
phone and as an audio device in the vehicle, ac‐
tivate the audio connection before starting the 6. Enter and confirm passkey.
pairing procedure.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
4. "Bluetooth audio"
If you want to use the mobile phone only as a
telephone in the vehicle, deactivate the function
and reconnect the mobile phone.
If the registration was successful, the mobile
Connecting phone is displayed at the top of the mobile
Mobility
Connecting the mobile phone phone list.
Only connect the mobile phone when the Four mobile phones can be connected in the
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you may be‐ vehicle at the same time. Two mobile phones
come distracted and endanger the vehicle oc‐ can be connected to the vehicle at the same
cupants and other road users.◀ time.
Reference
219
Telephone If the connection was unsuccessful: what is and 3. Select the mobile phone to be connected.
when, see page 221.
After connecting for the first time

▷ Mobile phone is detected/paired in the ve‐
hicle after a short delay when the engine is
running or the ignition switched on.
▷ After it has been detected, telephone book
entries are transferred from the SIM card
and/or mobile phone to the vehicle, depend‐
ing on the mobile phone.
▷ Four mobile phones can be connected. If the Using a mobile phone as an audio
rear telephone* is registered, three more source
mobile phones can be registered. Using a mobile phone with audio capability as an
▷ For a few mobile phones, certain settings audio source. Activate audio connection, see
are needed, for example, authorisation or page 219.
secure connection, see instruction manual Connecting a mobile phone to the vehicle, see
of the mobile phone. page 219.
A mobile phone is used as an audio source if an‐
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth other device is not yet connected as an audio
connection source.
Bluetooth use is not permitted everywhere. If a device is already connected as an audio
Comply with relevant local laws. source:
1. "Telephone" 1. Connecting a mobile phone to the vehicle,
2. Call up "Options". see page 219.
3. "Bluetooth" 2. "Use for audio"
Mobile phone is connected as an audio
source. Previous audio source is no longer
connected to the vehicle.
Disconnecting a mobile phone

1. "Telephone"
All connected mobile phones are listed.
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be discon‐
Connecting a certain mobile phone nected.
If the vehicle detects more than one mobile 4. Call up "Options".
phone, it connects with the mobile that is high‐
est on the list. If another mobile phone is to be
connected, this can be selected.
1. "Telephone"
All connected mobile phones are listed.
220
5. "Remove device from list" ▷ Transfer of the phone book entries has not
completed.
Overview
▷ Under certain circumstances only the phone
book entries saved in the mobile phone or
on the SIM card* are transferred.
▷ It might be that phone book entries with spe‐
cial characters cannot be displayed.
▷ Too many phone book entries to be saved.
Controls
Quality of the phone connection is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal is ad‐
What to do if... justable; the procedure varies from mobile
phone to mobile phone.
Information about suitable mobile phones, see
Driving hints
page 218. ▷ Place the mobile phone in the snap-in
adapter or close to the centre console.
Mobile phone not registered or paired.
If you have worked through all the points in the
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and the
list and the desired function is still unavailable,
mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the ve‐
contact hotline support or Service.
hicle and the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys for the mobile
Navigation
phone and vehicle match. Enter the same
Controls
passkey on the mobile phone and using
iDrive.
Adjusting the volume
▷ Duration for passkey input longer than
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
30 seconds. Repeat the connection at‐
reached.
tempt.
Volume for incoming call and volume for phone
▷ Too many Bluetooth devices paired to the
conversation can be adjusted independently of
mobile phone or the vehicle? If necessary
each other.
delete the pairing information for some
other device. The setting is saved for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
▷ Audio connection is activated. Deactivate
audio connection.
Incoming call
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
is the battery low? Charge the mobile phone Receiving a call
using the snap-in adapter or the charging
If the number of the caller is saved in the tele‐
cable.
phone book and is transferred from the network,
▷ If appropriate, only one device can be con‐ the name of the contact is displayed.
nected to the vehicle, depending on the mo‐
If a contact is no longer assigned to a telephone
bile phone. De-register the device from the
number, the name of the caller is transferred.
vehicle and only register and connect one
Mobility
device.
Accepting a call
▷ Is the mobile phone no longer responding.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Via button on the steering wheel
Repeat the connection attempt.
Press the button.
Not all phone book entries are displayed.
Reference
221
Entering phone numbers
Telephone Via instrument cluster
"Accept"
Dialling a number
Via iDrive 1. "Telephone"
"Accept" 2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
Rejecting a call
Via instrument cluster The phone number can also be entered using
the voice control system.
"Reject"
Via iDrive
Calls with a number of participants
"Reject" General
It is possible to switch between calls and merge
Ending a call
two calls to set up a conference. The functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
Via button on the steering wheel
service provider.
Press the button.
Accepting a call during another call
If possible, this functions must be released by
Via instrument cluster
the service provider and the mobile set for it.
"Hang up"
If there is a second call during an ongoing call
you hear a call waiting signal, if applicable.
Via iDrive
"Accept"
1. "Telephone"
The call is accepted and the existing call is held.
2. "Active calls"
3. Select the active call. Setting up a second call
Set up another call during a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
222
The current call is held. 3. "Microphone muted"
Overview
Controls
4. Dial a new phone number or select from a The mute microphone is automatically activa‐
list. ted:
Driving hints
▷ When a new call is set up.
Switching between two calls,
▷ When alternating between call parties.
alternating
Active call: highlighted with red handset. Phone book
Held call: highlighted with green handset.
To switch to the call on hold, select this handset. Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and lists
Navigation
Setting up a conference all contacts for which a phone number has been
Two calls can be merged to set up a telephone entered. The entries can be selected and a call
conference. set up.
1. Setting up two calls. 1. "Telephone"

2. "Conference call" 2. "Phone book"
All contacts with a telephone number are dis‐
played. A symbol indicates the storage location
of the contacts, see page 236.
On termination, both calls are always termina‐

ted. If one call is terminated by another sub‐
scriber, the other call is continued, if required.
Setting the microphone to mute Calling a contact

Mobility
When a call is active, the microphone can be 1. Select the desired contact.
muted. Select the symbol. Contact with a tele‐
phone number. The connection is estab‐
1. "Telephone"
lished.
2. "Active calls"
Reference
223
Telephone 2. Select the symbol. Contact with more 2. "Last number redial"
than one telephone number. Select tele‐
phone number and the connection is estab‐
lished.
Call not possible, mobile phone without re‐
ception or network or TeleService Call active.
Editing contacts
Changing the entries in the "Contacts" menu. If
a contact is changed, the changes are not saved
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is saved 3. Select the desired entry and telephone
in the vehicle. number as necessary.
1. Highlight the contact. The connection is established.
Deleting an individual entry or all
3. "Edit entry"
entries
The contact can be edited.
1. Mark entry.
Redialling 2. Call up "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
General
The list of numbers dialled in the mobile phone Saving an entry in Contacts
is transferred to the vehicle, depending on the 1. Mark entry.
mobile phone. The last 20 numbers dialled are 2. Call up "Options".
displayed. The sort sequence varies from mo‐
3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing
bile phone to mobile phone.
contact"
Dialling numbers via the instrument 4. Select the type of number: "Home",
cluster "Work", "Mobile" or "Others"
Possible if no call is currently active. 5. If necessary, complete the entries.
6. If applicable, "Save contact"
1. Press key on the steering wheel.
Incoming calls
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established. Displaying calls
The list of numbers dialled in the mobile phone
Dialling numbers using the iDrive
is transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
1. "Telephone" mobile phone. The last 20 incoming calls are
displayed. The sort sequence and the way in
which numbers are displayed vary from mobile
phone to mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
224
2. "Received calls" Depending in the mobile phone, there is an au‐
tomatic switch to the hands-free mode.
Overview
If it is not automatically toggled, follow what is
displayed on the mobile phone screen, and also
see the instruction manual for the mobile phone.
From the hands-free system to the

mobile phone
Controls
Calls taken via the hands-free system can also
be continued via the mobile phone, depending
on the mobile phone.
Calling a number from the list Then follow what is displayed on the mobile
Select an entry. phone, and also see the instruction manual of
Driving hints
The connection is established. the mobile phone.
Deleting an individual entry or all

entries Voice control operation*
1. Mark entry.
Principle
▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
Navigation
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" taking your hand from the steering wheel.
▷ The inputs are supported in many cases by
Saving an entry in Contacts
announcements or questions.
1. Mark entry.
▷ ›...‹ Identifies commands for the voice con‐
trol system.
3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact" Issuing voice commands
4. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Work", "Mobile" or "Others" Activating the voice control system
5. If necessary, complete the entries.
6. If applicable, "Save contact" steering wheel.
2. Issue the command.
Hands-free system
Switching off the voice control system
General
Briefly press the button on the steering
Calls taken via the hands-free system can be
wheel ›Cancel‹.
continued via the mobile phone and vice versa.
From mobile phone to the hands-free Possible commands

Mobility
system
Having possible commands read aloud
Calls that were started outside the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued via the Press the button. ›Help‹. Possible commands
hands-free system when the ignition is switched are announced.
on.
Reference
225
Voice phone book*
Telephone Digits from zero to nine are understood. Each
digit can be spoken individually or grouped in a Depending on the equipment available in your
sequence to accelerate input. vehicle, it may be necessary to create a separate
voice phone book.
Using alternative commands
The entries must be made using voice control
In many instances the system can accept any of and are independent of the memory of the mo‐
several different spoken commands for a given bile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
function, for example:
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹ Saving an entry
1. ›Save name‹
Example: dialling a phone number
2. Say the names. Keep to a speaking duration
of approximately 2 seconds.
steering wheel. 3. When asked to do so by the system, say the
phone number.
2. ›Dial number‹
4. ›Save‹
The system says: »Please say the number«
3. For example ›123 456 790‹ Deleting an entry
The system says: »123 456 790. Please 1. ›Delete name‹
continue«.
2. When asked to do so, say the name.
3. Confirm the prompt with ›Yes‹.
The system says: »Dialling number«
Deleting all entries
Making a call
1. ›Delete phonebook‹
Dial a phone number The dialogue to delete the phone book is
opened.
2. Say the phone number.
3. Confirm the prompt again with ›Yes‹.
3. ›Dial‹
Reading out and selecting entries
Correcting phone numbers
1. ›Read phonebook‹
It is possible to delete a sequence of digits once
the system has repeated the digits. The dialogue to read out the phone book is
opened.
›Correct number‹
2. ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry is read
The command can be repeated any number of
out.
times.
Selecting an entry
Deleting phone numbers
1. ›Dial name‹
›Delete‹
2. When asked to do so, say the name.
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Redialling
Adjusting volume
›Redial‹
Turn the knob during the announcement.
226
▷ The volume is retained even if you change 2. Insert snap-in adapter at the front, arrow 1,
the volume of other audio sources. and press to the bottom, arrow 2, until the
Overview
▷ The volume is saved for the remote control adapter engages.
currently in use.
Notes
The voice control system should not be used for
emergency calls. Under stress, the spoken lan‐
Controls
guage and voice pitch can change, which could
unnecessarily delay the connection of your call.
Driving hints
Inserting the mobile phone
Operating conditions
▷ Commands, digits and letters should be
pronounced fluently, with the usual empha‐
sis, and at a normal volume and speed.
Navigation
▷ Always speak the commands in the lan‐
guage of the voice control system.
▷ Keep doors and windows closed to avoid
noise interference.
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
▷ Avoid background noises in the car while the protective cap from the aerial connector
you are speaking. of the mobile phone.
2. Push the mobile phone with buttons up‐
wards in the direction of the electrical con‐
Snap-in adapter* nections, arrow 1, and push down, arrow 2,
until it engages.
Installed position
In the centre armrest. Removing the mobile phone
Inserting the snap-in adapter

1. Press the button and take out the cover.
Mobility
Press the button and pick up the mobile phone.

Reference
227
Office*
Office
Overview 3. Select the desired entry to display details.
General
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes and text
messages from the mobile phone can be viewed
on the control display if the mobile phone sup‐
ports these functions and is compatible with the
corresponding Bluetooth standards.
Information on which mobile phones support
which Office functions can be found under
www.bmw.com/bluetooth.
The system can only read from the mobile.
Contacts
The data is updated every time the mobile
phone is connected to the vehicle.
General
Do not operate Office while the vehicle is Contacts can be created and edited. Contacts
in motion. from the mobile phone* are displayed if the mo‐
Only make adjustments if the traffic conditions bile phone supports this function. Contacts from
are appropriate. Otherwise, you may become the BMW Online address book* are also dis‐
distracted and endanger the vehicle occupants played. The addresses can be used as naviga‐
and other road users.◀ tion destinations and the phone numbers dialled
directly.
Requirements
▷ A compatible mobile phone is registered
Displaying contacts
and connected to the vehicle. For some mo‐ 1. "Office"
bile phones, data access must be confirmed 2. "Contacts"
on the mobile phone.
▷ Time zone, time, see page 77, and date are
set correctly on the Control Display and on
the mobile phone, for example, to display
appointments correctly.
Office update
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as appointments coming up are All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. The
displayed. A-Z search, see page 22, function is offered, de‐
pending on the number of contacts.
1. "Office"
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
2. "Office today"
contacts:
228
Symbol Storage location In the case of contacts from the mobile
phone and BMW Online address book*, the
Overview
No symbol In the vehicle, address not address might have to be matched to the
checked as destination. navigation data in the vehicle. If that is the
case:
In the vehicle, address checked as
destination*. Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
Mobile phone*
Controls
BMW Online address book* Checking address as destination*
An address that is to be added to the route guid‐
Displaying contacts from BMW Online* ance must match the navigation data contained
in the vehicle. Here, the address can be
To display contacts from BMW Online, when
checked.
Driving hints
logging on, see page 242, to BMW Online the
function "Login automatically" must be enabled. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
Dial a phone number* 2. Call up "Options".
1. Select the desired contact. 3. "Check as destination"
2. Select the phone number. 4. If necessary, correct and save the address.
The connection is established. If the address is corrected and saved, a copy is
Navigation
created in the vehicle. The address is not
Editing contacts changed on the mobile phone or at BMW On‐
1. Select the desired contact. line*.
2. "Edit contact"
Display the Internet address of a
contact*
The Internet address stored for a contact can be
called up.
1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select Internet address.
The selected Internet address is displayed
in the browser.
3. Change entries. Displaying additional information from

4. "Save contact in car" BMW Online*
If a contact that comes from the mobile phone* Display of additional information for a contact if
or BMW Online* is edited, the changes are not present at BMW Online.
saved on the mobile phone or at BMW Online*.
A copy of the entry is saved in the vehicle and
Mobility
only the copy is displayed. 2. Call up "Options".

Selecting a contact as navigation
destination* New contact
1. Select the desired contact. You can add up to 8 phone numbers, 2 ad‐
Reference
2. Select address. dresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one URL.
229
Specifying home address
Office 1. "Office"
2. "Contacts" A home address can be saved in memory. This
home address appears at the top of the list of
contacts.
4. "New contact"
1. "Home address"
2. Organising contacts
3. "Save contact in car"
Selecting sort order for names

Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "Contacts"
5. Input boxes still show previous input: "Clear 3. "Show: surname, first name" or "Show: first
fields" name, surname"
6. To complete the input fields: select the sym‐ The sort order for names might not be the same
bol beside the input field. as the selected sort order, depending on how
contacts are saved on your mobile phone.
7. Enter text and select a contact type.
8. If your vehicle is equipped with the naviga‐ Display contact images
tion system: Entering an address. Only ad‐
Photos saved for contacts are saved in the ve‐
dresses that are present in the car’s naviga‐
hicle when the mobile phone is connected to the
tion data can be entered. This ensures that
vehicle.
route guidance is possible for all addresses.
If applicable, "Accept address" 1. "Contacts"
9. "Save contact in car" 2. Call up "Options".
3. "Show pictures"
Contact types Displaying all contact images is activated or de‐
Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned activated.
to various contact types.
Exporting/importing contacts
Symbol Meaning
Contacts can be exported and imported via Per‐
Private phone number sonal Profile, see page 31. The contacts stored
in the vehicle are exported neither from the mo‐
Work phone number
bile phone or by BMW Online*.
Mobile phone number
Deleting contacts
Other phone number
Only contacts saved in the vehicle are deleted.
Private address The contacts from the mobile phone* or BMW
Online* cannot be deleted.
Work address
1. "Contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. "Options"
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
230
Messages 4. Call up "Options".
Overview
5. Call up "Delete message".
General Deleting all messages:
The display of SMS messages depends on
1. "Office"
whether their transmission to the vehicle is sup‐
ported by the mobile phone. It is possible that 2. "Messages"
SMS messages are not supported by the serv‐ 3. Call up "Options".
ice provider or must be enabled separately.
4. "Delete all messages"
Controls
Transmission of the SMS can take a few minutes
after the first time a mobile phone connects.
SMS
Display of various messages:
▷ SMS. Calling the sender of an SMS
Driving hints
▷ My Info messages from the BMW Assist 1. Select the desired message.
Portal. 2. Select the symbol.
▷ Messages from BMW information service.
Saving the sender in Contacts
Displaying messages 1. Highlight the desired message.
1. "Office" 2. Call up "Options".
2. "Messages" 3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing
Navigation
contact"
Message type
A symbol marks the type of message. My Info
Message read
Replying
Message unread
Send a predefined reply.
Symbol Message type
1. Select the desired message.
SMS. 2. Call up "Options".
My Info 3. "Answer"
Message from information service, Starting route guidance

see page 239.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
Read out a message
Read out text message, see page 234. Dialling the number in the message
Up to 4 phone numbers can be transferred with
Deleting messages
one message.
Messages from Information Service, My Info and
BMW Online can be deleted. 1. Select the desired message.
Mobility
Deleting a message: 2. "Call":

A phone connection is established if the
1. "Office"
message contains a number.
2. "Messages"
"Select phone number":
Reference
231
Office Select the desired number from the list if the 2. Call up "Options".
message contains more than one number. 3. "Save contact in car"
Telephone connection is set up.
Select e-mail address in message
Select e-mail address in message
2. "Send e-mail (BMW Online)"
2. "Send e-mail (BMW Online)"
Call up URL
Call up URL
2. "Open address in browser"
2. "Open address in browser"
Display additional information
Message from information service
Starting route guidance 2. "Open address in BMW Online"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest."
Calendar
Display calendar
The last 30 days and the next 90 days can be
displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
The current day's appointments are dis‐
played.
3. If necessary, start the route guidance. Select calendar day

1. Select date.
Dialling the number in the message
Up to 4 phone numbers can be transferred with
one message.
2. "Call":
A phone connection is established if the
message contains a number.
"Select phone number":
Select the desired number from the list if the 2. Select desired day or date.
message contains more than one number.
▷ "Next day"
Telephone connection is set up.
▷ "Date:"
Saving an address ▷ "Day before"
1. Select the desired message. ▷ "Today"
232
Display appointment 1. Select the e-mail address.
Overview
1. Select the desired appointment. 2. Call up "Options".
2. Browse any appointments: 3. "Add to existing contact" or "Save as new
▷ Turn the controller. contact"
▷ Select the symbol.
Read out appointment
Display contact data Read out appointment, see page 234.
Controls
If telephone numbers or E-mail addresses are
contained in the appointments, these can be
used directly or stored in contacts. Tasks
1. "Use contact data" Display task list
Driving hints
Open tasks can be viewed.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sort task list

1. Select headers in the task list.
Navigation
2. Display contact or dial telephone number:
▷ Select contact to display a detailed view
of the contact.
▷ Select telephone number to make a di‐
rect connection.
Store contact data

1. Highlight telephone number or e-mail ad‐ 2. Select sort criterion:
dress. ▷ "Priority (!)"
2. Call up "Options". ▷ "Subject"
3. "Add to existing contact" or "Save as new ▷ "Due date"
contact"
Display task
Display subscriber 1. Select the desired task.
Participants of a calendar entry transferred from
2. Browse any tasks:
the mobile phone are listed in the appointment.
▷ Turn the controller.
Select the symbol.
Mobility
If the subscriber is stored in the contacts, the

contact is displayed. Select contact to display
Display contact data
details.
If telephone numbers or E-mail addresses are
If the participant is not stored in the contacts,
contained in the task these can be used directly
only the e-mail address might be displayed. To
or stored in contacts.
save the e-mail address:
Reference
233
Office 1. "Use contact data" 1. "Use contact data"
2. Display contact or dial telephone number: 2. Display contact or dial telephone number:
▷ Select contact to display a detailed view ▷ Select contact to display a detailed view
of the contact. of the contact.
▷ Select telephone number to make a di‐ ▷ Select telephone number to make a di‐
rect connection. rect connection.
Store contact data Store contact data

1. Mark telephone number or E-mail address. 1. Mark telephone number or E-mail address.
2. Call up "Options". 2. Call up "Options".
3. "Add to existing contact" or "Save as new 3. "Add to existing contact" or "Save as new
contact" contact"
Read out task Read out note

Read out task, see page 234 Read out note, see page 234
Notes Reminders
Display notes Display reminders
1. "Office" Reminders connected to appointments and
2. "Notepad" tasks are displayed. The reminder is deleted
when the appointment to which it refers has
All notes are displayed.
passed or when the task to which it refers is due.
Display note 1. "Office"

1. Select the desired note. 2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The relevant appointment or task is displayed.
Reading out
Text messages, appointments, tasks and notes
can be read out.
1. Select desired message, appointment, task

2. Browse any note: or note.
▷ Turn the controller. 2. Select the symbol.
▷ Select the symbol. The following possibilities are available when
reading out:
Display contact data ▷ "Pause"
If telephone numbers or E-mail addresses are Interrupt reading out. Select again to restart
contained in the note these can be used directly reading out.
or stored in contacts.
▷ "To beginning"
234
Read out message again from the beginning
Overview
Skip paragraph.
Return to last paragraph.
▷ To end reading out, tip the controller to the
left.
Controls
What to do if...
Information about suitable mobile phones, see
page 218.
Driving hints
▷ Appointments, tasks, notes, or text mes‐
sages from the mobile phone are not dis‐
played?
Mobile phone is not suitable for the missing
function or it is not connected correctly?
Appointments are more than 30 days old/
Navigation
more than 90 days ahead.
Appointments are marked as done or are
more than 90 days ahead.
Not all appointments might be shown in the
vehicle, depending on the number saved in
the mobile phone.
▷ Appointments of tasks from the mobile
phone are not displayed to the correct time.
Time zone, time or date is not correctly set
on the control display and the mobile phone.
▷ Texts of entries are not fully displayed.
Texts are abridged before they are transfer‐
red from the mobile phone.
Synchronisation between mobile phone and
vehicle might take several minutes to com‐
plete.
▷ Contact photos are not displayed?
A maximum of 200 contact photos can be
saved in the vehicle.
Mobility
▷ If you have worked through all the points in

the list and the desired function is still un‐
available, contact hotline support or Service.
Reference
235
Contacts*
Contacts
General 7. If applicable, "Save"

8. "Save contact in car"
Contacts can be created and edited. Contacts
from the mobile phone* are displayed if the mo‐
Specifying home address
bile phone supports this function. Contacts from
the BMW Online address book* are also dis‐ A home address can be saved in memory. This
played. The addresses can be used as naviga‐ home address appears at the top of the list of
tion destinations and the phone numbers dialled contacts.
directly. 1. "Home address"
2. Organising contacts
New contact 3. "Save contact in car"
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact" My contacts
General
List of all contacts from the vehicle, the mobile
phone and the BMW Online address book*.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
3. Input boxes still show previous input: "Clear

fields"
4. To complete the input fields: select the sym‐
bol beside the input field.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. The

A-Z search, see page 22, function is offered, de‐
pending on the number of contacts.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
5. Enter text, see page 22.
6. If your vehicle is equipped with the naviga‐
tion system: Entering an address. Only ad‐
dresses that are present in the car’s naviga‐
tion data can be entered. This ensures that
route guidance is possible for all addresses.
236
Symbol Storage location Selecting a contact as navigation
destination*
Overview
No symbol In the vehicle, address not 1. Select the desired contact.
checked as destination.
2. Select address.
In the vehicle, address checked as In the case of contacts from the mobile
destination*. phone and BMW Online address book*, the
Mobile phone* address might have to be matched to the
navigation data in the vehicle. If that is the
Controls
BMW Online address book* case:
Correct the address.
Displaying contacts from BMW Online* 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest."
To display contacts from BMW Online, when
Driving hints
logging on, see page 242, to BMW Online the Checking address as destination*
function "Login automatically" must be enabled. An address that is to be added to the route guid‐
ance must match the navigation data contained
Dial a phone number* in the vehicle. Here, the address can be
1. Select the desired contact. checked.
2. Select the phone number. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
The connection is established. address.
Navigation
Editing contacts
3. "Check as destination"
4. If necessary, correct and save the address.
2. "Edit contact"
If the address is corrected and saved, a copy is
created in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone or at BMW On‐
line*.
Displaying additional information from

BMW Online*
Display of additional information for a contact if
present at BMW Online.

3. Change entries.
4. Tilt the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
If a contact that comes from the mobile phone* Selecting sort order for names
or BMW Online* is edited, the changes are not
Names can be displayed in a different order.
saved on the mobile phone or at BMW Online*.
Mobility
A copy of the entry is saved in the vehicle and 1. "My contacts"

only the copy is displayed. Under certain cir‐
cumstances an identical contact entry is cre‐
ated. 3. Call up "Options".
4. "Show: surname, first name" or "Show: first
name, surname"
Reference
237
Contacts The sort order for names might not be the same
as the selected sort order, depending on how
contacts are saved on your mobile phone.
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via Per‐
sonal Profile, see page 31.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts saved in the vehicle are deleted.
The contacts from the mobile phone* or BMW
Online* cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
238
BMW Services
Overview
BMW Assist* bile phone recommended by BMW for Tel‐
eServices must be connected to the vehicle.
General ▷ In the case of a mobile phone with UMTS
Assist provides certain services, for example an capability: data transfer is switched to solely
information service. GSM data transfer.
Controls
The exact offering is country-specific. Your ▷ The SIM card is enabled for free service
Service Centre will be glad to answer any ques‐ numbers.
tions you might have. ▷ There is mobile radio communications re‐
Assist can also be used via the Internet, where ception.
Driving hints
additional services are available: ▷ Engine is running.
www.bmw.com.
During a connection to Assist, it might be that Using BMW TeleServices*
no telephone connection can be established via The BMW TeleServices are generally activated
the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is to be in the vehicle.
used, disconnect it from the vehicle. If the BMW TeleServices are not active, a voice
link to the Mobile Service is possible as well.
Navigation
To continue to use it, or to deactivate the serv‐
BMW TeleServices* ices, contact your Service Partner or the BMW
Customer Hotline.
General
TeleServices supports communication with the
Service Centre. Information service*
▷ Data on the servicing needs of the vehicle
can be transferred directly to the Service General
Centre. In so doing, the Service Centre can Information about hotels, emergency service
initiate the work needed earlier. The work‐ chemist shops, telephone numbers and ad‐
shop stay is shortened. dresses, etc. can be sent to the vehicle, called
▷ In case of accident, data on the vehicle con‐ directly or entered in navigation* as a destina‐
dition can be transferred to the Mobile Serv‐ tion.
ice Centre. It might be that malfunctions can
be remedied directly. Starting the information service
▷ The offering is country-specific. 1. "BMW Services"
▷ Connection charges can be incurred.
▷ Services can be limited abroad.
Mobility
Requirements
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
If BMW Assist is not enabled, the selected
mobile communications network must sup‐
port Circuit Switched Data, CSD, phone
number transfer must be enabled and a mo‐
Reference
239
Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW
BMW Services 2. "Info plus"
TeleServices
1. "BMW Services"
2. "BMW Mobile Care"
3. "Start service"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection to the BMW information
service is established. Phone numbers and ad‐
dresses can be transferred as messages.
BMW TeleServices Diagnosis*

Breakdown recovery TeleServices Diagnosis enables transfer of de‐
tailed vehicle data that are necessary for diag‐
Overview nosis of the vehicle via mobile telephony. This
It is possible to contact the Mobile Service* of‐ data is transferred automatically.
fered by the BMW Group if you require help in
After transfer of the data, a voice connection to
the event of a breakdown.
the Mobile Service is established.
Starting Roadside Assistance

BMW TeleServices Help*
Equipment without BMW Assist or The Teleservice Assistance enables a deeper
BMW TeleServices diagnosis of the vehicle to be gone through by
the Mobile Service.
1. "BMW Services"
As requested by the Mobile Service and on ter‐
2. "BMW Mobile Care"
minating the voice connection, the Teleservice
The number of Roadside Assistance is dis‐ Assistance can be started.
played. If a mobile phone* is connected, a
connection to Roadside Assistance is es‐ Starting BMW TeleServices Help
tablished.
1. Park the vehicle safely.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Engine is running.
4. "Teleservice Help"
After concluding the Teleservice Assistance, a
voice connection to the Mobile Service is es‐
tablished.
240
Activating BMW Assist* ▷ The correct date is set, see page 78, on the
control display.
Overview
General
Starting BMW Online
If you have a valid Assist contract and the serv‐
ices are not displayed, these might have to be 1. "BMW Services"
activated. 2. "BMW Online"
Activating
Controls
1. Ensure that the vehicle is able to determine
its location. As a rule, this is possible out‐
doors under a clear sky.
Driving hints
3. "Activate Assist"
The activation can take a few minutes. If you call
up another menu, the activation continues to run
in the background. 3. If applicable, "OK"
The BMW Online start page is displayed.
BMW Online* Using BMW Online
Navigation
To select and display content:
Overview
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
BMW Online is an online portal which provided
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
you with certain services for use in the vehicle,
e.g. information on weather forecasts, current
Call up home page
news, stock market data, access to E-mails and
personal address book. 1. Call up "Options".
Licensing terms 2. "Display start page"
This product contains NetFront Browser Soft‐
ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in
Japan and in other countries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷ You have registered for BMW Online with Reloading a page
your Service Centre.
Mobility
▷ A mobile communications network must be

2. "Reload"
available.
▷ For certain services, for example informa‐ Cancel
tion on current location, the vehicle must be
able to determine your current location.
2. "Cancel loading"
Reference
241
Log on Internet*
BMW Services
To display contacts of BMW Online or other per‐
sonal data, log on is required. General
1. "BMW Services" For your own safety, the internet is only available
up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h or 3 mph.
2. "BMW Online"
In some national market versions this is only
3. Call up "Options". possible when the vehicle is at standstill.
4. "User login"
Calling up the Internet
1. "BMW Services"
2. "Internet"
5. "User:"
3. Any"OK"
The home page is displayed. It is possible that
the Internet sites are not displayed in the same
way as on a PC. Flash or Java applications may
be displayed incorrectly.
Licensing terms
This product contains NetFront Browser Soft‐
6. Enter your user name and select "OK".
ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
7. "Password:" ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
8. Enter your password. NetFront is a trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in
9. "OK" Japan and in other countries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Automatic log on Independent JPEG Group.
The log on takes place automatically when BMW
Online is called up. Operating the Internet
"Login automatically"
Menu bar
Logging off A menu bar for operation is displayed. To acti‐
vate the menu bar, tilt the controller to the left
1. "BMW Services"
until the cursor is located in the menu bar.
2. "BMW Online"
Symbol Function
4. "User logoff" Activate mouse pointer.
Call up home page.
242
Symbol Function Tilt the controller upwards to switch be‐
tween upper and lower case.
Overview
Refresh, reload
Cancel
Back
Enter URL.
Controls
Bookmarks/favourites
Zoom
Close the browser.

Bookmarks/favourites
Driving hints
Navigating with the mouse pointer
Adding bookmarks
The currently displayed page is saved as a book‐
2. Navigate with the mouse pointer on the
mark.
page.
▷ To move the mouse pointer: tilt the con‐ 1. Select the symbol.
troller in the corresponding direction. 2. "Add to bookmarks"
Navigation
▷ To move the mouse pointer diagonally:
tilt the controller in the corresponding
direction and turn it.
▷ To select an element: move the mouse
pointer onto the element and press the
controller.
▷ To scroll: turn the controller.
Status display
A symbol in the top left on the screen indicates
the following status:
Select bookmark
Symbol Meaning
2. Select the desired bookmark.
No connection possible
Deleting bookmarks
Data transfer/connection
Secure connection 2. Highlight the bookmark to be deleted.
Entering Internet addresses
Mobility

2. Enter the address and select "OK".
Reference
243
Hotline
BMW Services 4. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all
bookmarks"
Overview
Contact the BMW Hotline for information cov‐
ering every aspect of the vehicle.
Calling the hotline
Equipment without BMW Assist or

BMW TeleServices
1. "BMW Services"
2. "Hotline"
Specifying a bookmark as home page
The telephone number of the hotline is dis‐
played. If a mobile phone* is connected, a con‐
2. Highlight the desired bookmark. nection to the hotline is established.
4. "Set as start page"
Settings
Suppressing cookies
2. "Suppress cookies"
Suppressing pop-ups
Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW
TeleServices
2. "Suppress pop-ups"
1. "BMW Services"
Suppressing security warnings 2. "Hotline"
1. Call up "Options". 3. "Start service"
2. "Suppress HTTPS pop-ups"
TeleServices Call*
Enabling BMW TeleServices Overview
TeleServices must have been enabled in the ve‐ Sends information to your Service Partner indi‐
hicle before they can be used. In most cases, this cating that a service appointment is to be
will already have been done by your Service agreed. The TeleServices data is transferred. If
Partner. possible, your Service Partner will establish
"BMW TeleServices" contact with you.
Starting a TeleServices Call

1. "BMW Services"
2. "Teleservice Call"
244
3. "Start service" Service partners*
Overview
Address and contact data of the Service partner.
Displaying Service partners

1. "BMW Services"
2. "Your BMW Dealer"
Controls
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
Automatic TeleServices call* 1. "BMW Services"
Driving hints
The TeleServices data on the service require‐
ment for the vehicle are transmitted to your 3. "Data transfer"
Service Partner automatically when a service is
due. If possible, the partner will make contact
and a service appointment can be agreed. Service status*
Checking when your service partner was noti‐
Display available services
Navigation
fied:
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
2. "Vehicle status" 1. "BMW Services"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"
4. "Last Teleservice Call"
Update BMW Services

Manual update of BMW TeleService*, BMW As‐
sist* and BMW Online*.
"Update BMW Services"
Mobility
Reference
245
Extended BMW Online services
Extended BMW Online services
General
The extended BMW Online services provides
scope for exchanges of information and data
with the vehicle via BMW Online.
The following section lists the functions of the
extended BMW Online services.
Navigation
▷ Importing trips, see page 166.
▷ Information on points of interest from BMW
Online, see page 161.
▷ Displaying current traffic regulations and
country information, see page 171.
CD/multimedia
▷ Updating album information, see page 193.
Contacts
▷ Show BMW Online address book, see
page 228.
▷ Display additional information for a contact,
see page 229.
Personal Profile
▷ Exporting/importing a user profile, see
page 31.
BMW Online and Internet

▷ BMW Online, see page 241.
▷ Internet, see page 242.
246
Rear telephone*
Overview
Overview Operation via the hands-free system
The rear telephone can be used to make a call in
General the front via the hands-free system or directly
The rear telephone consists of a handset and a via the handset.
snap-in adapter. Calls can be transferred from the handset to the
Controls
This enables telephony via a SIM card in the hands-free system and vice versa.
same way as with a mobile phone, with the ad‐
vantage of not having to use the hands-free sys‐ Requirements
tem of the vehicle. ▷ Snap-in adapter installed in the vehicle.
Driving hints
When the snap-in adapter is installed in the ve‐ ▷ SIM card inserted in the snap-in adapter.
hicle, it is possible to make phone calls via the ▷ Mobile phone connected via the SIM Access
hands-free system in the front and via the hand‐ Profile (SAP) to the snap-in adapter.
set in the rear.
▷ Snap-in adapter connected in the vehicle.
Calls can be transferred from the handset to the
hands-free system and vice versa. SIM Access Profile (SAP)
Navigation
Options for use General
The SIM Access Profile can be used to connect
Preparations
your mobile phone to the handset via the snap-
To be able to use the rear telephone, the in adapter.
following must be carried out depending on the
type of use: Principle
▷ Insert the SIM card into the snap-in adapter, SAP means that the snap-in adapter uses Blue‐
see page 248. tooth to access SIM card of the mobile phone
▷ Install the snap-in adapter to the vehicle, see with Bluetooth capability.
page 259. The calls and the connection to the external aer‐
▷ Connect the mobile phone via the SIM Ac‐ ial run via the snap-in adapter. Radiation which
cess Profile (SAP) to the snap-in adapter, is caused by the transmission operation is dis‐
see page 247. sipated from the vehicle interior.
If the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle
Operation via the handset and downloading the internal phone book en‐
Calls are only possible on the rear telephone di‐ tries of the mobile phone is supported, the in‐
rectly via the handset. ternal phone book can be displayed on the hand‐
set and on the control display.
Requirements
Requirements
Mobility
▷ Snap-in adapter installed in the vehicle.

▷ SIM card inserted in the snap-in adapter. ▷ Mobile phone with SAP capability. Overview
of compatible models at www.bmw.com.
▷ Mobile phone connected via the SIM Access
Profile (SAP) to the snap-in adapter. ▷ Mobile phone is switched on with activated
Bluetooth interface.
Reference
247
Removing
Rear telephone ▷ No SIM card is inserted into the snap-in
adapter.
Connecting the mobile phone via SAP
1. Press the button on the snap-in

adapter for approximately six seconds.
The LED above the button flashes, alternat‐
ing green and orange.
2. The 16-digit SAP PIN is displayed on the
handset. Pull the handset upwards.
3. "Connect" with BMW GSM SIA.
4. Enter the displayed PIN in the mobile phone. Inserting
Breaking the connection

▷ Disable the SAP connection on the mobile
phone. If the Bluetooth interface is not dis‐
abled, the connection is automatically re-
saved after approximately ten seconds.
▷ Switch off the handset.
▷ Switch off the ignition for longer than 3 mi‐
nutes.
1. Snap the handset into place at the top, ar‐
▷ Take the mobile phone to a distance ap‐
row 1.
proximately ten metre away from the vehi‐
cle. 2. Press the handset downwards, arrow 2.
Handset and snap-in adapter Inserting/removing the SIM card
Snap-in adapter and handset in the centre arm‐ Inserting:

rest in the rear. 1. Press the SIM card slot downwards, arrow 1.
2. Push the SIM card into the slot until it snaps
into place, arrow 2.
3. Close the slot.
Removing:
1. Press the SIM card slot downwards, arrow 1.
248
2. Press the upper edge downwards. Information regarding switching on/off
Overview
If the handset is switched off and on again while
TWIN SIM cards the vehicle is in motion, the Bluetooth connec‐
If so-called TWIN cards (cards with the same tion in the control display must be re-saved.
phone number) are used as SIM cards in the
snap-in adapter and in an additional mobile Requirements for standby indicator
phone, the device not being used must be ▷ The SIM card is inserted into the snap-in
switched off, as otherwise the function of the adapter or a mobile phone is connected via
Controls
rear telephone is not ensured. the SIM Access Profile.
▷ The handset is switched on.
Removing/installing the snap-in
adapter ▷ The PIN for the SIM card has been entered
or the PIN query, see page 257, has been
suppressed.
Driving hints
▷ Entering the PIN is also possible on the con‐
trol display if the snap-in adapter is connec‐
ted to the vehicle.
▷ Network reception is ensured.
▷ The PIN has been entered or the PIN query
has been suppressed.
Navigation
Removing:
1. Press the button, arrow 1.

2. Pull the snap-in adapter upwards and for‐
wards, arrow 2.
Installing:
1. Snap into place at the lower end.

2. Press downwards until it snaps into place,
arrow 1. The standby indicator and name of the network
operator are displayed.
Controls Display/arrow buttons
Basic principles
Connect button
Press the button. Select the displayed or
highlighted phone number, accept the call.
Mobility
On/off/exit button
Press the button. Press longer: switches on
and off. The current functions of these buttons are
shown in the bottom line of the display.
Press briefly: terminates a call.
Press the button: selects the function.
Reference
249
Via telephone book
Rear telephone
1. "Ph.book"
2. Enter the first letters of the name or browse
with the arrow buttons.
3. Use the arrow buttons to select an entry.
4. Press the connect button.
Via SMS
Press the up/down arrow buttons: browses in 1. "Menu"
menus. 2. "Text messag."
Press the left/right arrow buttons: sets the call 3. "Ok"
volume during a call.
4. "Inbox" or "Outbox"
5. "Ok"
Text input
Press a numerical key (1 to 9) repeatedly until 6. Select an entry.
the desired character is displayed. If the next 7. "Ok"
letter is entered with the same key as the current 8. "Call"
letter, wait briefly until the cursor is displayed
9. "Ok"
again.
Insert spaces using the 0 key. Via the call list
Switch between upper and lower case with the 1. "Menu"
# key.
2. "Last calls"
Insert special characters using the 1 key.
3. "Missed calls" or "Received calls"
Switch to number mode by pressing and holding
4. "Ok"
the # key.
5. Dial a phone number.
Initiating a call 6. "Call number" or press the connect button.
Via numerical keys Incoming call

1. Enter the complete phone number with area
code/national dialling code. Accepting a call
2. "Delete" last digit is deleted. If the number of the caller is saved in the tele‐
phone book and is transferred from the network,
3. "Dial" or press the connect button.
the name of the telephone book entry is dis‐
played.
Via repeat dialling
▷ Press the button or "Answer".
The last ten phone numbers dialled are auto‐
matically saved. ▷ With call acceptance, see page 256, activa‐
ted, take the handset from its cradle.
The phone number last dialled is displayed. Rejecting a call
2. Use the arrow buttons to select the phone Press the button or "End call".
number.
3. Press the connect button.
250
Call Forward Disabling all diversions
Overview
In the "Call forward" menu:
Principle
1. "Deactivate"
Incoming calls are diverted to another telephone
number. 2. "Ok"
A password might be required to set this up.
Other information from the service provider, see
Phone book
page 260.
Controls
Select the storage location
Calling up the menu If the mobile phone supports downloading of in‐
ternal phone book entries and this function is
1. "Menu"
active, the internal memory of the telephone
2. "Settings" book is selected as the storage location. The
Driving hints
3. "Ok" function "Memory place" is then not available.
4. "Call forward" Select the SIM card or snap-in adapter as the
5. "Ok" storage location.
1. "Menu"
Diverting calls
2. "Ph.book"
3. "Ok"
Navigation
1. "Voice calls" 4. "Memory place"
2. "Ok" 5. "Ok"
3. "Forward all calls", "If busy", "If not avail." or 6. "SIM" or "GSM-SIA" or "Both"
"If no answer"
7. "Ok"
4. "Ok"
5. "Deactivate" or "Activate" Setting the display
6. Enter the phone number for the diversion. 1. "Menu"
7. "Ok" 2. "Ph.book"
3. "Ok"
Diverting fax and data inputs
4. "Private Ph.book"
5. "Ok"
1. "Fax calls" or "Data calls"
2. "Deactivate" or "Activate" Available memory
3. Enter the phone number for the diversion. 1. "Menu"
4. "Ok" 2. "Ph.book"
3. "Ok"
Checking the status 4. "Memory place"
Select call forwarding.
Mobility
5. "Ok"
1. "Status" 6. "Status"
2. "Ok" 7. "Ok"
3. The status is displayed.
New entry
Reference
Save phone numbers in the international format.
251
Rear telephone Press the asterisk key until + is shown on the 2. "Ph.book"
display. 3. "Ok"
1. "Menu" 4. "Find entry"
2. "Ph.book" 5. "Ok"
3. "Ok" 6. Select SMS and confirm with "Ok".
4. "New entry" 7. "Edit"
5. "Ok" 8. "Ok"
6. Enter the name. 9. Edit the name and number and confirm with
7. "Ok" "Ok".
8. Enter the complete phone number.

Deleting an entry
9. "Ok"
1. "Menu"
Entry from call lists 2. "Ph.book"
Save phone numbers from call lists in the tele‐ 3. "Ok"

phone book. 4. "Find entry"
1. "Menu" 5. "Ok"
2. "Last calls" 6. Select an entry.
3. "Ok" 7. "Ok"
4. "Numbers dialled", "Missed calls" or 8. "Delete"

"Received calls" 9. "Yes"
5. "Ok"
Show details
6. Select an entry.
1. "Menu"
7. "Store number"
2. "Ph.book"
8. "Ok"
3. "Ok"
9. Enter the name and number and confirm
each with "Ok". 4. "Find entry"
5. "Ok"
Entry from SMS 6. Select an entry.
1. "Menu" 7. "Ok"
2. "Text messag." 8. "Details"
3. "Ok"
4. "Inbox" or "Outbox" SMS
5. "Ok"
Reading SMS messages
6. Select SMS and confirm with "Ok".
7. "Options" Principle
8. "Extract number" An SMS is a text message that can be received
9. "Ok" and sent.
Received SMS messages are saved automati‐
Editing an entry cally.
1. "Menu"
252
Observe the memory status, see page 254, on 7. "Delete"
the SIM card.
Overview
8. "Ok"
If necessary, delete saved SMS messages so 9. "Yes"
that you can receive new SMS messages.
Writing an SMS
Setting the SMS Service Centre
The phone number of the Service Centre is Creating and sending an SMS
saved. 1. "Menu"
Controls
1. "Menu" 2. "Text messag."
2. "Text messag." 3. "Ok"
3. "Ok" 4. "Text messag."
4. "Settings" 5. Create an SMS, see page 250.
Driving hints
5. "Ok" 6. "Send"
6. "Servicecentre" 7. "Ok"
7. "Ok" 8. Enter the phone number or use "Find
8. Check the phone number. entry" to open the telephone book and se‐
lect an entry.
9. "Ok"
9. Confirm with "Ok" and select "Send".
Navigation
Reading SMS messages
Creating a template
1. "Menu"
Templates are saved SMS messages with fre‐
2. "Text messag."
quently used texts.
3. "Ok"
1. "Menu"
4. "Inbox"
2. "Text messag."
5. Select SMS.
3. "Ok"
6. "Ok"
4. "Text messag."
Replying to an SMS 5. Enter text, see page 250.
1. "Options" 6. "Options"
2. "Reply" 7. "Insert symbol" or "Insert template"
3. Enter text, see page 250. 8. "Ok"
4. "Options" 9. Select the symbol or a template and confirm
5. "Send" with "Ok".
Deleting an SMS Editing templates
1. "Menu" 1. "Menu"
Mobility
2. "Text messag." 2. "Text messag."
3. "Ok" 3. "Ok"
4. "Inbox" or "Outbox" 4. "Templates"
5. Select an entry and confirm with "Ok". 5. "Ok"
6. "Options" 6. Select the template and confirm with "Ok".

Reference
253
SMS options
Rear telephone 7. Edit the text of the template.
8. "Options"
Query memory status
9. Select "Send" or "Store".
Symbol indicates that memory capacity is
Saving created SMS messages no longer available for SMS messages.
Created SMS messages can be saved for future Delete, see page 253, saved text messages.
use on the SIM card. 1. "Menu"
1. "Menu" 2. "Text messag."
3. "Ok" 4. "Settings"
5. Enter text, see page 250. 6. "Memory capacity"
6. "Options" 7. "Ok"
7. "Store" The number of occupied and free memory
8. "Ok" slots is displayed.
Saving automatically Automatic status report
Save sent SMS messages automatically. Show free memory when sending an SMS.
1. "Menu" 1. "Menu"
2. "Text messag." 2. "Text messag."
3. "Ok" 3. "Ok"
4. "Settings" 4. "Settings"
5. "Ok" 5. "Ok"
6. "Store text msg" 6. "Status report"
7. "Ok" 7. "Ok"
Forwarding an SMS Transfer duration
1. "Menu" Validity period for attempts to send an SMS.
2. "Text messag." 1. "Menu"

3. "Ok" 2. "Text messag."
4. Select "Inbox" or "Outbox". 3. "Ok"
5. Select SMS and confirm with "Ok". 4. "Settings"
7. Select "Forward" and change text if re‐ 6. "Validity"
quired. 7. Select a period of time.
9. Select "Send" and confirm with "Ok".
Language
Set the language for the SMS.
254
1. "Menu" 1. "Options"
Overview
2. "Text messag." 2. "Switch"
3. "Ok" 3. "End call"
4. "New text msg" Terminating conference call:
5. "Ok" 1. "Options"
6. "Input language" 2. "Conf. participants"
7. "Ok"
Controls
3. Select the call.
8. Select the language. 4. "End active call"
9. "Ok"
Calls with a number of participants Settings
Driving hints
Call waiting Telephone
If there is a second call during an ongoing call,
you hear a call waiting signal. Calling up the menu
Choose between "Answer" or "Reject". 1. "Menu"
2. "Settings"
Setting up a second call 3. "Ok"
Navigation
1. "Options"
2. "Hold" Transferring your own phone number
3. "Back" Display the phone number on the receiver.
Other information from the service provider, see
4. Select entry from telephone book or the
page 260.
number of another subscriber.
In the "Settings" menu:
Switching between two calls, 1. "Call options"
alternating
2. "Ok"
1. "Options"
3. "Transmit caller ID"
2. "Switch"
4. "Ok"
Telephone conference 5. "Activate", "Deactivate" or "Network-
Merge two calls to set up a conference. depend."
1. "Options" Setting call waiting

2. "Conference" Acoustic signal for a call during another call.
Terminating a call
Terminating current call 1. "Call options"
Mobility
"End call" 2. "Ok"
Terminating a call 3. "Call waiting"

4. "Ok"
1. "Options"
5. "Activate" or "Deactivate"
2. "End call"
6. "Ok"
Reference
Terminate second call through three-way:
255
Selecting the menu language Call acceptance on lifting handset
Rear telephone
Options: German, English, French, Italian, Span‐ The call is accepted when you lift the handset
ish, Portuguese or Chinese. from the cradle.
In the "Settings" menu: In the "Settings" menu:
1. "Telephone" 1. "Call options"
2. "Ok" 2. "Ok"
3. "Language" 3. "Answer on eject"
4. "Ok" 4. "Ok"
5. "Menu language" or "Input language"
Ring sound volume
6. "Ok"
7. Select the language.
8. "Ok" 1. "Telephone"
2. "Ok"
Resetting the language 3. "Ring tone vol. SIA"
Set the English language. 4. "Ok"
1. Press the button. 5. Make the setting.
2. Press the button on the right below the dis‐ 6. "Ok"
play.
3. Press the arrow button downwards three Brightness and lighting duration
times. Make the setting for the display.
4. Press the right-hand arrow once. In the "Settings" menu:
5. Press the arrow button downwards once. 1. "Telephone"
6. Press the right-hand arrow once. 2. "Ok"
7. Press the arrow button downwards three 3. "Brightness" or "Backlight durat."
times.
4. Make the settings.
8. Press the right-hand arrow once.
5. "Ok"
9. Select the language and confirm with "Ok".
Key lock
Deleting the call list
Locks the keypad automatically if no key has
1. "Menu" been pressed for a certain time,
2. "Last calls" providing protection against inadvertent opera‐
3. "Ok" tion of the keys.
4. "Delete" In the "Settings" menu:
5. "Ok" 1. "Telephone"
6. Select "All calls" or select an entry. 2. "Ok"
7. "Ok" 3. "Autom. keylock"
8. "Yes" 4. "Ok"
Cancelling the key lock

Follow the instructions on the handset display.
256
Restoring factory settings 5. Select a network.
Overview
Overview of factory settings, see page 258. 6. "Ok"
The handset is reset to default values. This does
not affect the SIM card and network settings. Authorisation and security
Enabling/disabling the PIN query
1. "Telephone" Disabling the PIN query
2. "Ok" If the PIN query is disabled, your SIM card
Controls
3. "Default settings" is not protected against misuse.◀
4. "Ok" 1. "Menu"
5. "Yes" 2. "Settings"
3. "Ok"
Driving hints
Network selection 4. "Security"
Principle 5. "Ok"
On older SIM cards, it might be necessary to en‐ 6. "PIN query": confirm with "Ok".
able roaming. 7. "Activate" or "Deactivate"
Roaming enables you to connect to other tele‐ 8. "Ok"
phone networks abroad. Other information from 9. Enter the PIN and confirm with "Ok".
Navigation
the service provider, see page 260.
Changing the PIN
Automatic or manual network selection
If the PIN query is activated.
With automatic network selection, the handset
connects to an available network. 1. "Menu"
With manual network selection, an available net‐ 2. "Settings"
work can be selected. If the handset is connec‐ 3. "Ok"
ted to another network, a triangle is shown on 4. "Security"
the display.
5. "Ok"
To set the type of network selection:
6. "Change PIN"
1. "Menu" 7. "Ok"
2. "Settings" 8. Enter the current PIN and confirm with
3. "Ok" "Ok".
4. "Network selection" 9. Enter the new PIN twice and confirm with
5. "Ok" "Ok".
6. "Automatic" or "Manual"
Unblocking SIM card
7. "Ok"
If the incorrect PIN is entered three times, the
Mobility
SIM card is blocked.

Manual network selection
"Please enter PUK:" is shown on the display.
1. "Menu"
The PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) or Super PIN is
2. "Settings"
required. This can only be entered on the hand‐
3. "Netw. select." set. Other information from the service provider,
4. "Select network" see page 260.
Reference
257
Rear telephone After entering the PUK, assign a new PIN, see 5. Enter your password.
page 257. 6. "Ok"
Barring calls Deactivating call barring

1. "Menu"
Principle
2. "Settings"
These functions are protected with a password
against unauthorised use. Other information 3. "Ok"
from the service provider, see page 260. 4. "Security"
5. "Ok"
Calling up the menu
6. "Call barring"
1. "Menu"
7. "Ok"
2. "Settings"
8. "Deactivate all"
3. "Ok"
9. Enter the password and confirm with "Ok".
4. "Security"
5. "Ok" Factory settings
6. "Call barring" If you reset the handset to the factory settings,
7. "Ok" the following settings are made.
Setting Factory setting

Outgoing calls
Outgoing calls can be suppressed: Phone book The telephone book is
deleted.
▷ All except for emergency call.
▷ All international calls. Display of the tele‐ Both
phone book
▷ All international calls except home country.
1. "Call barring" Save text messages Switched off
automatically.
2. "Ok"
3. "All calls", "International calls" or "Int. exc. Transfer duration of Maximum
homectry" text messages
4. "Ok" Status report for text Switched off
5. "Activate", "Deactivate" or "Status" messages
6. Enter your password. Key lock Switched off
7. "Ok"
Brightness 3
Incoming calls Lighting duration 3
Incoming calls can be suppressed:
Language English
▷ All calls.
Bluetooth name GSM SIA BMW
▷ All international calls.
1. "Incoming calls" Call acceptance for Switched on
handset
2. "Ok"
3. "All calls", "Int'l calls"
4. "Ok"
258
Setting Factory setting Connecting the handset
Overview
Private telephone Switched off Principle
book
To be able to use the handset, it must be con‐
Ring sound volume 4 nected to the snap-in adapter. The handset is
already connected at the factory. The connec‐
tion is set up automatically each time the hand‐
set is switched on.
Install the snap-in adapter to
Controls
the vehicle* Requirements
▷ The snap-in adapter is inserted in the centre
Principle
armrest.
Connect the snap-in adapter to the vehicle. The
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Driving hints
telephone book is shown on the display and the
hands-free system at the front can be used. ▷ The SIM card is inserted into the snap-in
adapter.
Requirements ▷ The Bluetooth passkey, see page 259, on
▷ The snap-in adapter is inserted in the centre the back of the snap-in adapter is known.
armrest.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Connecting the handset
Navigation
▷ The SIM card is inserted into the snap-in 1. Press the button for approximately
adapter or the SIM Access Profile (SAP) is nine seconds.
active.
The LED above the button illuminates or‐
▷ The Bluetooth passkey, see page 259, on ange.
the back of the snap-in adapter is known.
2. Switch on the handset.
Install the snap-in adapter to the 3. "GSM-SIA"
vehicle 4. "Ok"
Activate the Bluetooth connection, see 5. GSM SIA BMW
page 220, in the vehicle. Up to four devices, in‐
6. "Ok"
cluding the handset, can be connected.
7. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
1. In the main menu, select the entry
8. "Ok"
"Telephone".
9. The connection to the snap-in adapter is es‐
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)". All connected mo‐
tablished.
bile phones are listed.
4. "Bluetooth" Bluetooth passkey
5. Press the button on the handset for The Bluetooth passkey is located
Mobility
approximately three seconds. on the back of the snap-in

adapter.
The LED above the button illuminates
green. To read the passkey, remove the
snap-in adapter, see page 249.
The number in the PIN line is the Bluetooth
Reference
passkey. A new PIN can be chosen.
259
Changing the Bluetooth passkey
Rear telephone
1. "Menu"
2. "Settings"
3. "Bluetooth"
4. "Ok"
5. "Change Passkey"
6. "Ok"
7. Enter a new password.
8. "Ok"
Reset Bluetooth passkey and delete all

Bluetooth connections
Press the button for approximately
12 seconds. The LED above the button
illuminates red.
Service provider
These functions depend on your service pro‐
vider and contract.
If you have any other questions, contact the
service provider directly.
260
261
262
Mobility
To assist you in preserving your car’s mobility, this
section contains important information on
operating fluids, wheels and tyres, maintenance
and minor repairs.
263
Refuelling
Refuelling
Fuel filler flap Do not jam the strap attached to the tank cap, as
otherwise the tank cap cannot be closed prop‐
Opening erly and fuel vapours can escape.◀
1. Briefly press rear edge of fuel filler flap.
Unlocking fuel filler flap manually
For example in the event of an electrical fault.
2. Turn the fuel filler cap anticlockwise.

Pull the green tag with the fuel pump symbol.
Fuel filler flap is unlocked.
Note when refuelling

When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into
the filler neck. Lifting the filler nozzle during re‐
fuelling results in:
3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the fuel ▷ The fuel supply being cut off prematurely.
filler flap. ▷ Fuel vapour and fumes being fed back less
effectively.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts out
for the first time.
Handling fuels
Comply with the safety regulations dis‐
played at filling stations.◀
Fuel tank capacity

Closing Petrol engine Fuel tank capacity is approxi‐
Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is mately 82 litres, 18 gal
clearly heard to click into place. Diesel engine Fuel tank capacity is approxi‐
mately 80 litres, 17.6 gal
Do not crush the retaining strap
Refuel in good time
264
If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, you
should refuel as soon as possible, or engine
Overview
functions may be impaired and damage may oc‐
cur.◀
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
265
Fuel
Fuel
Fuel grade Diesel quality

The engine is designed to run on diesel fuel to
Petrol DIN EN 590.
For optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be
sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as pos‐ Winter-grade diesel
sible. No diesel additives
Only refuel with unleaded petrol Do not incorporate any additives, includ‐
ing petrol, as these could cause damage to the
Never use fuel containing lead, otherwise
engine.◀
the catalytic converter will be permanently dam‐
aged.◀ Winter-grade diesel must be used to ensure re‐
liable operation of the diesel engine during the
You can fill up with fuels with a maximum pro‐
cold season.
portion of ethanol of 10 %, i.e. E10.
It is sold at filling stations over that period.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Fuel filter heating is installed as standard equip‐
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of ment to prevent the fuel from solidifying during
85 % ethanol, or flex fuel, as otherwise the en‐ operation.
gine and fuel supply system will be damaged.◀
Petrol grade
The engine has anti-knock control. This means
that different grades of petrol can be used.
It is recommended to use unleaded premium
grade petrol with 95 RON.
Unleaded fuel qualities with 91 RON and higher
are permitted.
Minimum grade
Do not fill the tank with any petrol below
91 RON, as otherwise the engine could be dam‐
aged.◀
Diesel
Incorrect refuelling
Do not refuel any rape seed methyl ester
– RME –, green diesel or petrol.
After refuelling a wrong fuel, do not start the en‐
gine, otherwise there is danger of engine dam‐
age.◀
The filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel
pumps.
Contact your Service Centre if the wrong type of
fuel has been added.
266
Wheels and tyres
Overview
Tyre pressures Tyre tread
Information for your safety Summer tyres
A tyre’s condition and pressure influence the The tyre tread depth should not be less than
following: 3 mm, 1/8 in.
Controls
▷ Operating life of the tyre. Below a tread depth of 3 mm, 1/8 in, there is a
▷ Driving safety. high risk of aquaplaning.
▷ Driving comfort.
Winter tyres
Driving hints
Checking pressures The tyre tread depth should not be less than
4 mm, 3/16 in.
Checking tyre pressures regularly
Below a tread depth of 4 mm, 3/16 in, suitability
Check regularly and adjust as necessary,
for vehicle operation in winter is restricted.
but at least twice a month and before any long
journey. Incorrect tyre pressures can adversely
Minimum tread depth
affect the car’s road holding and cause tyre
damage, which could result in an accident.◀
Navigation
Reinitialise the run-flat indicator after adjusting
tyre pressures.
Tyre pressure values
Wear indicators are distributed across the tyre
circumference and have the legally prescribed
minimum height of 1.6 mm, 1/16 in.
They are identified on the tyre’s side wall by TWI,

Tread Wear Indicator.
The inflation pressures specified for approved
tyre sizes are located on the door pillar of the
driver’s door. Tyre damage
If the speed code letter for the tyre cannot be Inspect tyres frequently for damage, the pres‐
located, use the tyre pressure for the corre‐ ence of foreign bodies and wear.
sponding size, for example 255/50 R 19.
Vehicle behaviour that is an indication of tyre
Mobility
damage or other faults:

Tyre sizes ▷ Unusual vibrations while the vehicle is in
Inflation pressures refer to the approved and motion.
recommended tyre sizes and tyre makes.
▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro‐
Your Service Centre will be glad to provide more nounced pulling to the left or right.
Reference
information on wheels and tyres.
267
Wheels and tyres In the event of tyre damage Incorrect wheel and tyre combinations will in‐
terfere with the proper functioning of various
If there are indications of tyre damage, re‐
systems, such as ABS and DSC.
duce speed immediately and have the wheels
and tyres checked without delay, otherwise To maintain good vehicle handling, always fit
there is an increased risk of accident. tyres of the same make and tread pattern to all
wheels.
Drive carefully to the nearest Service Centre or
specialist tyre dealer. After a tyre has been damaged, fit the original
wheel and tyre combination again.
Have the car towed there if necessary.◀
Repairing tyre damage Approved wheels and tyres
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
your vehicle advises against having damaged mends using only wheels and tyres that have
run-flat tyres repaired; have them replaced in‐ been approved for a specific vehicle type.
stead. Otherwise subsequent damage cannot Even if nominally the same dimension, tyres
be excluded.◀ could make contact with the body, for example
due to manufacturing tolerances and result in
serious accidents.
Age of tyres The manufacturer of your vehicle is unable to
assess the suitability of tyres and wheels it has
Recommendation not approved, and therefore cannot guarantee
Irrespective of wear, change tyres after six years their safety.◀
at the latest.
Recommended makes of tyre
Date of manufacture
On the tyre side wall:
DOT … 3508: the tyre was made in the
35th week of 2008.
Replacement of wheels and

tyres
Fitting Certain makes of tyre are recommended by the
manufacturer of your vehicle depending on tyre
Information on tyre mounting
size. These can be seen by the asterisk on the
Only have tyres fitted, including balancing, side wall of the tyre.
by your Service Centre or by a specialist tyre
When properly used, these tyres meet the high‐
dealer.
est standards in terms of safety and handling
If such work is performed inexpertly, it could re‐ characteristics.
tute a safety risk.◀
Retreaded tyres
Wheel and tyre combination The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against the use of retreaded tyres.
Your Service Centre can provide details of the
right wheel/tyre combination and rim designs for Retreaded tyres
your car.
268
Due to their potentially different internal con‐ Run-flat tyres
struction and advanced age, their durability may
Overview
be limited and their road safety therefore ques‐ Label
tionable.◀
Winter tyres
Winter tyres are recommended for operation on
winter roads or at temperatures below +7 ℃/
Controls
+45 ℉.
Although so-called all-season tyres with an M+S
marking have better winter characteristics than
summer tyres, they do not normally match the
performance of winter tyres.
RSC marking on the tyre sidewall.
Driving hints
Top speed of winter tyres These wheels consist of tyres that are self-sup‐
porting within certain limitations, and special
If the car is capable of speeds higher than the
rims.
speed permitted for the winter tyres, a sticker
stating the maximum permitted speed for the The reinforced side wall means that the tyre
tyres fitted must be displayed in the driver’s field keeps the vehicle mobile to a degree even if
of view. Specialist tyre dealers and your Service pressure has been lost.
Navigation
Centre can supply the sticker. Continuing a journey with damaged tyres, see
Top speed for winter tyres page 92.
Do not exceed the top speed for the winter
Changing run-flat tyres
tyres in use, otherwise tyre damage potentially
leading to an accident could occur.◀ For your own safety, use only run-flat tyres.
There is no spare wheel available in the event of
Run-flat tyres a puncture. Your Service Centre will be pleased
to advise.
For your own safety, use only run-flat tyres.
a puncture. Your Service Centre will be pleased
to advise. Snow chains
Interchanging front and rear wheels Fine-link snow chains

The manufacturer of your vehicle advises Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
against interchanging the front and rear wheels. tested, found safe for use in traffic, and recom‐
mended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
This could impair vehicle handling.
The Service Centre is able to provide the details
Tyre storage of these makes.
Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and pref‐

Use
Mobility
erably dark place when not in use.

Fit them only as a pair on the rear wheels, on
Protect tyres against contamination from oil, tyres of size:
grease and fuel.
▷ 245/55 R 17
Do not exceed the maximum tyre pressure indi‐
cated on the tyre’s side wall. ▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Reference
269
Wheels and tyres Observe the chain manufacturer’s instructions. ▷ Snow chains are not fitted. The setting is
Ensure that the snow chains are always ade‐ activated .
quately taut. Re-tighten them if necessary in ac‐ As of 50 km/h, 30 mph, a warning light is il‐
cordance with the chain manufacturer’s instruc‐ luminated and a message is displayed. De‐
tions. activate the state manually.
Do not initialise the run-flat indicator with snow With malfunction:
chains fitted, as the instrument might otherwise ▷ Snow chains are fitted. The setting is not
issue an incorrect reading. activated .
When driving with snow chains, activate Dy‐ No message appears on the control display.
namic Traction Control briefly if necessary.
The automatic detection is disrupted. Acti‐
vate the state manually.
Maximum speed with snow chains
When snow chains are fitted, do not exceed Activating/deactivating the rear-wheel
50 km/h, 30 mph. steering
If the state for driving with snow chains is acti‐
Snow chain detection*
vated, the rear-wheel steering is automatically
disabled.
Principle
As of 50 km/h, 30 mph, the rear-wheel steering
If you are using snow chains, it should be set
is enabled again despite the fact that snow
using the iDrive that snow chains have actually
chains are fitted.
been fitted.
The snow chain detection supports the driver
here and shows the detected state automati‐
cally on the control display.
During operation with snow chains, the rear-
wheel steering of the Integral Active Steering*
is automatically disabled.
As of the permitted maximum speed with snow
chains of 50 km/h, 30 mph, the rear-wheel steer‐
ing is enabled again automatically.
Activating the status

1. "Settings"
2. "Snow chains"
3. "Snow chains fitted"
Automatic detection
With correct function:
▷ Snow chains are fitted. The setting is not
activated .
After driving for a short period, a message is
shown on the control display and the state
is automatically activated.
Confirm the automatic activation.
270
Engine compartment
Overview
Important accessories in the engine compartment
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
1 Identification number* 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
2 Jump-starting, negative terminal 5 Oil filler neck
3 Reservoir for washer fluid 6 Coolant tank
Bonnet 1. Pull the lever.
Open bonnet
Working in the engine compartment
Do not work on the car unless you possess
the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are not aware of the regulations to follow,
work on the vehicle should only be carried out
by Service.
If such work is performed inexpertly, it could re‐
Mobility

tute a safety risk.◀
Reference
271
Engine compartment 2. Press the release lever and open the bonnet. Risk of trapping
area of the bonnet is unobstructed during clos‐
ing.◀
3. Watch out for any protruding parts of the

bonnet.
Risk of injury with the bonnet open

With the bonnet open, protruding parts
represent a risk of injury.◀
Closing bonnet
Let the bonnet fall from approximately 40 cm,

16 in and then press to fully lock the bonnet.
The bonnet must audibly snap into place on
both sides.
Bonnet open while the vehicle is in motion

Should it appear while the vehicle is in mo‐
tion that the bonnet has not been properly
locked, stop immediately and close properly.◀
272
Engine oil
Overview
Oil level check Too much engine oil
Have the car examined immediately,
Principle otherwise too much oil could result in engine
The oil level is monitored electronically and damage.◀
shown on the control display.
Controls
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Conditions
Note the recalculated distance remaining
▷ Engine running and at operating tempera‐ until the next Oil Service. Have the system
ture after driving at least 10 km, 6 miles. checked as soon as possible.
Driving hints
▷ Vehicle stationary and on level surface.
Displaying oil level Adding engine oil

2. "Vehicle status" Filler neck
3. "Engine oil level"
Navigation
If indicated in the instrument cluster, top up
within the next 200 km, 120 miles1 litre, 2 pints
of oil.
Possible messages
▷ "Engine oil level OK" Recommended oil grades, see page 273
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time." Protecting children
▷ "Measuring engine oil level..." Keep all oils, greases etc. out of the reach
Duration with engine running: approxi‐ of children, and read and comply with any warn‐
mately three minutes. ing instructions on the containers, to avoid any
Duration while the vehicle is in motion: ap‐ health risks.◀
proximately five minutes.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add one
Oil grades
Mobility
litre!"
Top up oil within the next 200 km, 120 miles. Note
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this No oil additives
checked."
Oil additives could lead to engine dam‐
Have the car checked as soon as possible. age.◀
Reference
273
Approved oil grades
Engine oil
Your Service Centre knows the engine oils ap‐
proved by your manufacturer.
The engine oil quality is decisive for the life or
the engine.
The following specifications determine ap‐
proved oils:
Petrol engines
Preferred: BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE Coolant
Alternatively: BMW Longlife-04 General
BMW Longlife-98 Danger of scalding while the engine is hot
Do not open up the cooling system while
Diesel engines the engine is hot, otherwise you may scald your‐
self on the escaping coolant steam.◀
Preferred: BMW Longlife-04
Suitable additives
Alternatively: BMW Longlife-01 Use only suitable additives, otherwise the
BMW Longlife-98 engine could incur damage. The additives are
injurious to health.◀
Approved oils fall under the viscosity grades Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive.
SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
5W-30. able for your vehicle. Your Service Centre can
provide details of which additives are suitable.
Alternative oil grades
If approved oils are not available, you can top up Coolant level
a maximum of 1 litre, 2 pints of a different oil with If required, arrange for the coolant level to be
the following specifications: checked by your Service Centre and have it top‐
ACEA A3/B4 ped up if necessary.
Viscosity grades for ACEA A3/B4 oils
Disposal
When selecting an ACEA A3/B4 oil, en‐
When disposing of coolant and coolant
sure that the oil has one of the viscosity grades
additives, comply with the relevant en‐
SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE
vironmental protection regulations.
5W-30, otherwise functional disruptions or en‐
gine damage could occur.◀
274
Maintenance
Overview
BMW Maintenance System Service Booklet
The system maintains the road Have maintenance and repair work performed
safety and operating reliability of by your Service Centre. Have the Service Book‐
the vehicle and takes account of let stamped to confirm that maintenance work
Controls
aspects such as timely vehicle has been carried out. The entries in it serve as
checks. Its purpose is to optimise proof of regular maintenance.
maintenance measures with a
view to minimising the cost of looking after your
car. Overview: maintenance
Driving hints
schedule
Condition Based Service, Standard schedule

CBS Maintenance work
Sensors and advanced algorithms monitor the
Examine Check Control messages.
conditions in which your vehicle is used. Condi‐
Navigation
tion Based Service uses this information to cal‐ Examine indicator and warning messages.
culate the maintenance requirements.
The system thus enables adaptation of the Engine oil
scope of maintenance to the individual usage
profile. Maintenance work
The detailed Service requirement, see
page 80, can be shown on the control display. Replace engine oil and oil filter.
Parking brake:
Service data in the remote control
Check function of brake engagement.
Information on maintenance requirements is
continually saved in the remote control. The Automatic air conditioning:
Service Centre reads out this data and then sug‐ At additional cost: replace the microfilter.
gests a set of maintenance routines optimised
on this basis. With a petrol engine:
This is why you should hand over the remote At every 2nd oil change:
control that was last used for driving to your At additional cost: replace spark plugs
service advisor.
With diesel engine:
Periods out of use With every 2nd engine oil change
Immobilisation periods with the battery discon‐ At additional cost: replace the fuel filter, with
Mobility
nected are not taken into account. lower fuel grades, shorten the replacement in‐
terval.
Updating the time-dependent maintenance
scope such a brake fluid and any engine oil and
microfilter or activated carbon filter can be done
by a Service Centre.
Reference
275
Brake fluid
Maintenance Maintenance work
With every 2nd engine oil change Maintenance work

Intake muffler:
Replace brake fluid.
At additional cost: replace air-filter element;
with heavier dust deposit, reduce change in‐ Reset service display in line with workshop
terval. guidelines.
Reset service display in line with workshop

guidelines. Vehicle check
Maintenance work
Front brake
Check horn, headlight flasher and hazard
Maintenance work warning system.
Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts. Check instrument lighting and dial lighting and
heating fan.
Brake discs:
Check lighting system.
Check surface and thickness.
At additional cost: replace if necessary. Seat belts:
Check condition of the seat belt strap, function
Reset service display in line with workshop
of roller mechanism, belt interlock and belt
guidelines.
buckle.
Rear brakes Check windscreen wiper and washer system.
Tyres:
Maintenance work
Check tread depth, running pattern, external
Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts. condition and inflation pressure; correct infla‐
tion pressure if necessary.
Brake discs:
Check surface and thickness. Initialise run-flat indicator.
At additional cost: replace if necessary. Power steering fluid reservoir*:
Parking brake: Check the oil level.
Check condition, brake pad thickness and At additional cost: top up if necessary.
function. Check the coolant level and concentration.
At additional cost: replace if necessary. At additional cost: top up if necessary.
Reset service display in line with workshop Windscreen washing unit:
guidelines.
Check fluid level: top up if necessary.
At additional cost: if required, add anti-freeze.
Brake lines and connections:

Check for leaks, damage and correct position.
276
Maintenance work information can be read out with suitable devi‐
ces, especially at the Service centre. The data
Overview
Underbody, including all visible parts: read-out is used to support service processes
Check for damage, corrosion, sealing includ‐ and repair or for optimising and developing ve‐
ing seal of shock absorbers and check the fit‐ hicle functions. If an Assist contract exists addi‐
ting of springs. tionally, certain vehicle data can be sent directly
from the vehicle to enable the desired services.
Steering components:
Controls
Check clearance, leaking, damage and wear.
Check of road safety, test drive:

Recycling
Brakes, steering, shock absorbers, transmis‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
sion. handing the vehicle in at a take-back point nom‐
inated by the BMW Group. The regulations con‐
Driving hints
Reset service display in line with workshop cerning the returning of end-of-life vehicles may
guidelines. vary from country to country. Your Service Cen‐
tre will be glad to provide information.
Socket for on-board

diagnosis, OBD
Navigation
The OBD socket for checking components de‐
finitive in terms of the composition of the ex‐
haust emissions is on the driver's side.
Emissions
▷ The warning light flashes:
Engine malfunction that could dam‐
age the catalytic converter. Have the
car checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light is illuminated:
Mobility
Deterioration of exhaust emissions. Have

the car checked as soon as possible.
Data memory
Your vehicle saves data about operation, faults
and user settings. This data is saved in the ve‐
Reference
hicle and partly also in the remote control. The
277
Replacing parts
Replacing parts
On-board tool kit 4. Remove the wiper blade towards the side.
The on-board tool kit is located under a flap in

the boot lid.
Replacing bulbs
Unscrew the wing bolt to remove.
General
Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of driv‐
Replacing the wiper blades ing safety.
Do not fold the wipers onto the wind‐ Your vehicle manufacturer recommends that re‐
screen without wiper blades pairs that you are not familiar with or that are not
described here be performed at your Service
Do not fold in wiper if no wiper blades are fitted,
Centre.
otherwise damage may occur to the window
glass.◀ A box containing spare bulbs is available from
your Service Centre.
Wiper blades, replacing Risk of sustaining burns
1. To replace the wiper blades, place the wip‐ Only change bulbs while they are cool to
ers in the fold-out position, see page 67. the touch. Otherwise, burns could result.◀
2. Fold out the wipers. Working on the lighting system
Before performing any work on the light‐
ing system, switch off the lights in question, oth‐
erwise there is a risk of short-circuits.
Observe any instructions supplied by the bulb
manufacturer to avoid the risk of injury or dam‐
age when changing bulbs.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with
your fingers, because even slight amounts of dirt
3. Swing the wiper blade into a horizontal po‐
or grease will then be burned into the bulb and
sition.
reduce its working life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
278
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs If a bulb fails, you can continue driving
moderately with fog lights. Observe any applica‐
Overview
Controls, displays and other equipment items
inside your car have light-emitting diodes be‐ ble country-specific laws.
hind a cover as their light source. Do not perform any work on or replace
These resemble conventional lasers and are bulbs on the xenon lights
classified by legislation as Class 1 light-emitting Work on the xenon light system, including
diodes. changing the bulb, must always be performed
by Service.
Controls
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers or expose the Otherwise there is a risk of potentially fatal ac‐
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for cidents if work is performed inexpertly, because
several hours at a time, as this could cause irri‐ of the high electrical voltages present.◀
tation to the retina.◀
Turn indicators, including side turn
Driving hints
Headlight glass indicators
During cool or humid weather, the exterior lights Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and
can mist over. When the light is switched on, the lights, see page 278.
condensation disappears after a short time. These lights use LED technology.
There is no need to replace the headlight glass. In the event of a defect, contact your Service
In the event of more extensive moisture, for ex‐ Centre.
Navigation
ample water droplets in the light, have this
checked at your Service Centre. Adaptive Headlights
Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and
Front lights, replacing the bulbs lights, see page 278.
The picture shows the left-hand side of the en‐
Overview
gine compartment.
H3 bulb, 55 Watts
1. Open the flap in the engine compartment.
1 Adaptive Headlights
2 Side lights, daytime driving lights*
3 Low-beam/high-beam headlights
4 Turn indicator
Mobility
Xenon light
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. Frequent switching on and
off shortens the service life.
Reference
279
Replacing parts 2. Turn the cover and remove. 2. Turn the cover and remove.
3. Squeeze the retaining bracket and guide 3. Turn the bulb fitting.
downwards. On the right-hand side, turn in the other di‐
rection.
4. Let go of the retaining bracket and fold up‐

wards. 4. Take out the bulb and change it.
5. Take out the bulb and change it. 5. To install the new bulb and reattach the
6. To install the new bulb and reattach the cover, carry out the above steps in reverse
cover, carry out the above steps in reverse order.
order.
Front fog lights
Side lights Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and
Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and lights, see page 278.
lights, see page 278. H8 bulb, 35 Watts
The picture shows the left-hand side of the en‐
1. Unclip the grille at the recess, arrow.
gine compartment.
H8 bulb, 35 Watts
1. Open the flap in the engine compartment.
280
2. Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw. Rear fog light and reversing lights in the
boot lid
Overview
Access to the lights
1. Use the screwdriver from the on-board tool
kit to loosen the three screws.
Controls
3. Pull out the light towards the front.
4. Take out the bulb and change it.
Driving hints
5. To install the new bulb and reattach the
cover, carry out the above steps in reverse
order.
2. Fold up the cover.
Rear lights, replacing the bulbs
Overview
Navigation
3. Change the corresponding bulb.
1 Turn indicator
2 Reversing lights
3 Rear fog light*
4 Rear light
5 Brakelight
6 Reflector*
Turn indicators, brake, tail and licence

Rear fog light
place lights
21 Watt bulb, H21W
Follow the instructions regarding bulbs and
Mobility
lights, see page 278.

These lights use LED technology.
In the event of a defect, contact your Service
Centre.
Reference
281
Jack mounting points
Replacing parts
Pull out the bulb and change it.
The jacking points are at the positions marked.

Reversing lights
16 Watt bulb, W16W Thiefproof wheel studs*
Pull out the bulb and change it. The thiefproof wheel stud (adapter) is located in
the on-board tool kit.
Changing a wheel
Notes
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tyres, see
page 269, as standard.
This dispenses with the need to change a wheel
immediately in the event of a puncture.
When fitting new tyres, or replacing summer
with winter tyres or vice versa, use run-flat tyres ▷ Wheel stud, arrow 1.
for your own safety.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
a puncture. Removing
The tools for changing wheels are available as 1. Place the adapter on the wheel stud.
optional accessories from your Service Centre.
2. Unscrew wheel stud.
After reattaching the wheel stud, remove the
adapter again.
282
Car battery Batteries filled with acid should be transported
and stored upright. Protect batteries against
Overview
Maintenance falling over when in transit.
The battery does not require routine mainte‐
nance, in other words the quantity of acid it con‐
tains is sufficient for the full operating life of the Fuses
battery.
Notes
If you have any queries regarding the battery,
Controls
your Service Centre will be pleased to advise Replacing fuses
you. Do not repair blown fuses or replace them
with fuses with different colours or ampere rat‐
Replacing the battery ings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires
Only use approved vehicle batteries. could cause a fire in the vehicle.◀
Driving hints
Only use vehicle batteries that are ap‐ Plastic tweezers and details of the fuse assign‐
proved by the manufacturer of your vehicle. Oth‐ ment can be found with the fuses in the boot.
erwise the vehicle may be damaged and availa‐
bility of systems or functions may be limited.◀ In the glove box
When the vehicle battery has been changed,
have the battery registered on the vehicle by
Navigation
your Service Centre to ensure that all comfort
functions are fully available.
Recharging the battery

Recharge the battery only with the engine stop‐
ped, via the connections, see page 285, in the
engine compartment.
Push the handle upwards, arrow 1, and open the
Power failure flap, arrow 2.
After a temporary power supply interruption,
some items of equipment must be reinitialised. Inside the boot
Individual settings must be updated:
▷ Seat, mirror and steering wheel position
memory: re-save positions.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio transmitter: re-save.
▷ Navigation system: wait until the navigation
is functioning properly.
Mobility
Remove the cover from the right-hand trim

Disposing of the old battery panel.
Dispose of old batteries only at an au‐
Details of the fuse assignment are on a separate
thorised collecting point or hand them in
leaflet.
to your Service Centre.
Reference
283
Help in the event of a breakdown
Help in the event of a breakdown
Hazard warning lights Subscriber contract

▷ Service centre can deactivate the BMW As‐
sist system after expiration of the participa‐
tion contract without you having to visit the
workshop.
After deactivation of the system, no emer‐
gency call is possible.
▷ It is possible that the system can be re-en‐
abled by Service centre after conclusion of
a new contract.
The button for the hazard warning lights is loca‐
ted on the centre console. Making an emergency call
Emergency call*
Requirements
▷ Equipment with preparation for mobile
phone.
An emergency call is also possible when no
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle.
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it.
▷ BMW Assist is activated, see page 241.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
▷ Radio ready state is switched on. button is illuminated.
▷ The BMW Assist system is connected to a ▷ LED illuminated: emergency call activated.
mobile communications network.
If a cancellation request is displayed on the
▷ Emergency call system functional. control display, the emergency call can be
Use the emergency call function only in the aborted.
event of an emergency. If the situation permits, wait in the car until
Even if an Assist emergency call is not suppor‐ voice contact has been established.
ted, it is still possible to initiate an emergency ▷ LED flashes when the connection to the
call within most GSM networks using the button. emergency number has been established.
These emergency numbers and the applicable
terms of use may differ from country to country. In the case of a BMW Assist emergency call,
the data required to decide on the rescue
Emergency call not ensured measures to be taken is transferred to the
For technical reasons, it might not be pos‐ emergency call centre, for example the cur‐
sible to make an emergency call in highly ad‐ rent position of the vehicle if this can be de‐
verse conditions.◀ termined.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the emergency call
centre cannot be heard over the hands-free
system, it is possible that the hands-free
284
system is malfunctioning. However, the Mobile Service
emergency call centre may still be able to
Overview
hear you speak. Standby
In many countries Mobile Service is available by
Automatically activating emergency
phone twenty-four hours a day, seven days a
calls
week. This service can render assistance in the
In certain circumstances, an emergency call event of a breakdown.
may be placed automatically immediately after
The Contact brochure contains a list of the num‐
Controls
a serious accident. Use of the button does not
bers to call for Mobile Service.
interfere with an automatic emergency call.
Breakdown recovery
If you need breakdown recovery, see page 240,
Warning triangle*
use the iDrive to view the number or to establish
Driving hints
a connection directly to Mobile Service*.
Starting with a flat battery

Notes
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the engine
Navigation
can be started using two jump leads from an‐
other vehicle’s battery. Use only jump leads with
The warning triangle is located on the inside of fully insulated terminal clamps.
the boot lid in the container.
Do not deviate from the procedure described
Unscrew the wing bolt to remove. below, as otherwise personal injury could result
or both vehicles could be damaged.
Do not touch live parts
First-aid kit*
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal accident
could occur.◀
Preparations
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approxi‐
mately the same capacity in Amp/h. Speci‐
fications are on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.
The first-aid kit is located on the inside of the
3. Switch off any electrical systems in both ve‐
boot lid in the container.
hicles.
Mobility
Unscrew the wing bolt to remove.

Avoid contact between the vehicle bodies
The longevity of some articles is limited.
The bodies of the two vehicles must not
Check the use-by dates of the contents regu‐ make contact, otherwise there is the risk of a
larly and replace any items that have expired. short-circuit.◀
Reference
285
Jump-starting connections
Help in the event of a breakdown 5. Connect the second terminal clamp to the
Order for connecting negative battery terminal or to a ground/
earth connection on the corresponding en‐
Connect the jump leads in the correct or‐
gine or body of the vehicle to be started.
der to avoid sparks that could cause injury.◀
Starting the engine
Do not use the spray products sold as starting
aids.
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and al‐
low it to run for a few minutes at a slightly
increased idle speed.
In the case of a diesel engine, allow to run for
approximately ten minutes.
The jump-starting connection in the engine 2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the
compartment serves as the positive battery ter‐ customary way.
minal. If an initial attempt to start the engine fails,
wait several minutes until the flat battery has
been recharged to a slightly greater degree.
3. Allow both engines to run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite
order from that in which they were originally
attached.
Check the battery if necessary and have it re‐
charged.
The negative terminal is the body earth or a spe‐

cial nut. Tow-starting and towing
Connecting the cables Towing eye
1. Pull up the cap of the BMW jump-starting
connection to remove it.
2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+
jump lead to the positive battery terminal or
the corresponding jump-starting connec‐
tion on the donor vehicle.
3. Connect the other terminal clamp to the bat‐
tery’s positive terminal or to the correspond‐
ing jump-starting connection on the vehicle
to be started. Always have the screw-on tow fitting on board
the vehicle. It can be screwed into the front or
4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/–
rear end of the BMW. It is located on the inside
jump lead to the negative battery terminal or
of the boot lid in the container.
the corresponding engine or body earth
connection on the donor vehicle. Towing eye, information on use
286
▷ Use only the towing eye supplied with ▷ If the car’s electrical system has failed, the
the car, and make sure that it is car being towed must be made identifiable
Overview
screwed in fully and is tight. to following vehicles, for instance by placing
▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on nor‐ a notice or the warning triangle in the rear
mal roads (i.e. not off-road). window.
▷ Avoid lateral loads on the towing eye, for ex‐
Before towing
ample do not raise the car at the towing eye.
Vehicle without manual gear lock* or with
Otherwise the towing eye and the car could be
Controls
xDrive*:
damaged.◀
Only transport vehicle on low loader
Screw thread If the vehicle does not have a manual gear
lock* or is equipped with xDrive*, it must not be
towed.
Driving hints
Only have the vehicle transported on a low
loader, otherwise, the vehicle could be dam‐
aged.◀
Vehicle with manual gear lock*:
Unlocking the transmission lockout man‐

ually
Navigation
Press on the arrow symbol of the cover to press Unlock the transmission lockout manually, even
it out. if there is no transmission malfunction. Other‐
wise there is a danger that the transmission
lockout engages automatically during towing.◀
Towing away
Being towed
General
Comply with the instructions for towing/
Light towing vehicle
being towed
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
Comply with all instructions on towing/being
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be un‐
towed; failure to do so could result in damage to
able to keep the towed vehicle reliably under
the vehicle or an accident.◀
control.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
Attaching the tow bar/towing rope
as otherwise low-beam headlights, rear
Only attach the tow bar or towing rope to lights, turn indicators and windscreen wip‐
the towing eye. Attaching the towing rope to ers would not be available.
other parts of the car can result in damage.◀
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
Do not tow when the electronics have raised, as otherwise the steering can turn.
failed
▷ When the engine is not running, there is no
When the electronic fails do not tow the vehicle, power assistance and the brake servo is out
Mobility
as otherwise the electronic steering lock cannot of action. The steering and brakes will re‐
be released and the vehicle cannot be quire extra effort to operate.
steered.◀
▷ Greater steering wheel movements are nec‐
▷ Switch on the hazard warning flashers, de‐ essary.
pending on local regulations.
Comply with the specified towing speed
Reference
and distance
287
Help in the event of a breakdown A towing speed of 50 km/h, approximately
30 mph and a towing distance of 50 km, approx‐
imately 30 miles must not be exceeded, other‐
wise it may damage the gearbox.◀
Methods of towing
Do not raise the vehicle
Do not raise the car at the towing eye or by
body or suspension components, otherwise it
could be damaged.◀ Only have the vehicle transported on a low
loader.
Tow bar Do not tow the vehicle with a raised front or rear
The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on axle, otherwise it could damage the vehicle.◀
the same side. Do not raise the vehicle
If it is impossible to avoid attaching the tow bar Do not raise the car at the towing eye or by
at an angle, note the following: body or suspension components, otherwise it
▷ Tow bar clearance may be restricted when could be damaged.◀
cornering. Protecting the car against rolling
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it After towing, secure the parking brake and
is attached offset. secure the vehicle against rolling as appropriate.
Check the operability of the gear position P with
Towing rope Service.◀
Ensure that the Towing rope is taut when the Vehicle with manual gear lock*:
towing vehicle moves off.
For towing, use nylon ropes or straps, as these
will help to avoid sudden tensile loads.
Attaching the towing rope correctly
Only attach the towing rope to the towing
eye. Attaching the towing rope to other parts of
the car can result in damage.◀
Towing truck
Vehicle without manual gear lock* or with Have your vehicle transported by a towing truck
xDrive*: with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a loading
platform.
Do not raise the vehicle

Do not raise the car at the towing eye or by
body or suspension components, otherwise it
could be damaged.◀
Protecting the car against rolling
After towing, secure the parking brake and
secure the vehicle against rolling as appropriate.
Check the operability of the gear position P with
Service.◀
288
Tow-starting
Overview
Note
Do not attempt to tow-start or push-start the
vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, it is not pos‐
sible to start the engine by towing.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties recti‐
Controls
fied.
Driving hints
Navigation
Mobility
Reference
289
General care
General care
Washing the car ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, see page 67, to
avoid unintentional operation of the wipers.
Notes Guide rails in car washes
Steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure Avoid car washes where the guide rails are
cleaners higher than 10 cm, 4 in as otherwise the car body
If you use steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure may be damaged.◀
cleaners, make sure you maintain an adequate
distance and a maximum temperature of 60 ℃/ Before entering a car wash
140 ℉. The vehicle can roll if the following steps are
High-pressure jets striking it from close up or carried out:
with excessively high pressure or temperature 1. Press the brake.
could cause damage, or start off a process of
2. Engage transmission position N.
long-term damage.
3. Release the parking brake, see page 63, or
Comply with the instructions for the high-pres‐
deactivate Automatic Hold, see page 65.
sure cleaner.◀
4. Stop the engine.
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure cleaners Transmission position P with the igni‐
Do not direct high-pressure cleaners at the sen‐ tion switched off
sors or cameras on the outside of the vehicle for With the ignition switched off, transmission
sustained periods and maintain a distance of at position P is engaged automatically. Make
least 30 cm, 12 in. This applies to systems such sure that in a car wash, for example, the ig‐
as Park Distance Control*.◀ nition is not switched off inadvertently.◀
Especially in winter, wash the car more fre‐ It is not possible to lock the vehicle from the out‐
quently. side in transmission position N.
Very high levels of dirt and road salt can cause If an attempt is made to lock the vehicle, a signal
damage to the car. sounds.
Washing in an automatic car wash Transmission position

Your vehicle can be washed right away using Transmission position P is automatically en‐
automatic car washes. gaged:
Textile car washes or systems using soft ▷ With the ignition switched off.
brushes are preferable, to avoid damage to the
▷ After approximately 15 minutes.
paintwork.
Headlights
Notes
▷ Do not rub them when dry or use abrasive or
Bear the following in mind:
corrosive cleaning agents.
▷ Make sure the wheels and tyres are not
▷ Soak impurities such as insects with sham‐
damaged by the conveying mechanism.
poo and wash off with water.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors, as they could
▷ Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not use
otherwise sustain damage due to the car’s
an ice scraper.
width.
290
After washing the car Suitable cleaner can be obtained from your
Service Centre.
Overview
After washing the car, drive it briefly and apply
the brakes to dry them out; this is necessary to
prevent reduced braking action, and also to Care of upholstery fabrics
avoid corrosion of the brake discs. Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
In the event of heavy soiling, for example stains
caused by drinks, use a soft sponge or a lint-free
Car care microfibre cloth with suitable interior cleaning
Controls
agents.
Care products Clean upholstery materials over a large area up
BMW recommends that you use BMW cleaning to the seams. Avoid strong rubbing.
and care products, as these have been tested
and approved. Damage from Velcro fasteners
Driving hints
Open Velcro fasteners on trousers or
Care and cleaning products
other items of clothing can damage seat covers.
Observe the notes on the pack. Make sure that any Velcro fasteners on your
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or clothing are closed.◀
windows.
Use only products that are intended for cleaning Care of special parts
the car’s interior.
Navigation
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub‐
Apply wheel cleaner, particularly during the win‐
stances or constitute a health risk.◀
ter months. Do not use aggressive, acidic,
strong alkali and abrasive cleaning agents, or
Vehicle paintwork
steam-jet cleaners at above 60 ℃/140 ℉. Follow
Regular care promotes driving safety and pre‐
the manufacturer's instructions.
serves your car’s value.
Environmental factors can affect the vehicle’s Chrome surfaces*
paintwork. Base the frequency and extent of ve‐ Carefully clean parts such as the radiator grille
hicle care on such factors. and door handles with plenty of water to which
a shampoo may be added, particularly if ex‐
Leather care posed to road salt.
Remove dust from the leather at regular inter‐
vals with a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Rubber parts
Dust and road dirt will otherwise become Other than washing with water, treat only with
worked into pores and folds, causing consider‐ rubber care products.
able abrasion and causing the leather surface to Do not use any silicone-based care products for
become prematurely brittle. treating rubber seals, as these could otherwise
In order to protect against discolouration, for ex‐ be damaged and become a source of noise.
ample from clothing, clean the leather approxi‐
Mobility
mately every two months. Fine wood parts*

Clean light-coloured leather more frequently as Clean fine wood trims and fine wood parts only
it has the tendency to soil faster. with a damp cloth. Then dry them with a soft
Use leather cleaner, as dirt and grease with oth‐ cloth.
erwise attack the protective coating of the
leather.
Reference
291
Plastic parts Displays/screens
General care
These include: Use a microfibre cloth to clean the control dis‐
▷ Roof lining. play, for example, or the Head-Up Display*.
▷ Light covers. Cleaning of displays
▷ Glass cover of instrument cluster. Do not use any chemical or domestic
▷ Parts sprayed matt black. cleaning agents.
Use a microfibre cloth to clean. Keep all liquids away from the set.
If necessary, lightly dampen the cloth with water Surfaces or electrical components could other‐
and, possibly, a cleaning agent for plastic. wise be attacked or damaged.
Do not soak the roof lining. Avoid applying excessive pressure when clean‐
ing and do not use abrasive materials, otherwise
No cleaning agents containing alcohol/ damage could occur.◀
solvent
Do not use any alcohol-based or solvent-based Laying up out of use
cleaning agents such as nitro thinners, cold Your Service Centre will be pleased to advise
cleansers, fuel or similar, as otherwise the sur‐ you on the measures that should be taken if the
faces can be damaged.◀ vehicle is to be placed in storage for longer than
three months.
Seat belts
Dirt on the seat belts can interfere with the ac‐
tion of the reel and represent a safety hazard.
Dry cleaning
Do not dry-clean or use chemical prod‐
ucts, otherwise the fabric may be weakened.◀
Clean only with a mild soap solution while still
fitted to the car.
Never allow seat belts to retract unless they are
dry.
Carpets and foot mats*

Floor mats can be removed from the car to en‐
able the interior to be cleaned more thoroughly.
If floor carpets are more heavily soiled, use a mi‐
crofibre cloth and water or a textile cleaning
agent to clean them. In doing so, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel, as otherwise the
carpet can become tangled.
Sensors/cameras
Use a cloth moistened with a small amount of a
glass-cleaning product to clean sensors or cam‐
eras, for example for high-beam assistance*,
Active Cruise Control* or Night Vision*.
292
293
294
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data, the short
commands for the voice control system and the
index, which provides the quickest way to find the
information you need.
295
Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
Width with mirrors, height with roof aerial
Value according to / applies to L models. Height with roof aerial 760i: 1479 mm / 760Li:
1490 mm
296
Width without mirrors
Overview
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
Length, wheelbase
Mobility
Value according to / applies to L models.
Smallest turning circle

Ø: 13.2 m or 40 ft L Model Ø: 12.7 m or 41.7 ft
Reference
750i xDrive Ø: 13.5 m or 41 ft 750Li xDrive Ø: 13.0 m or 42.7 ft
297
Weights
Technical data
730i/Li
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank 90 % full, no kg (lb) 1895/1930
optional extras (4178/4255)
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2505/2515

(5523/5545)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1145/1165

(2524/2568)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1400/1400

(3086/3086)
Roof load kg (lb) 100 (220)
Boot capacity Litres 500 (17.7)

(cu ft)
740i/Li

(5520/5565)

(2645/2665)

(3005/3030)

(cu ft)
750i/Li

(5675/5750)

(2800/2820)
298
750i/Li
Overview
(3005/3060)

(cu ft)
Controls
760i/Li
Driving hints
(5941/6096)

(3009/3009)

(3175/3197)
Navigation

(cu ft)
750i xDrive/Li xDrive

(5864/5930)

(2943/2976)

(3120/3164)

Mobility
(cu ft)
Reference
299
Technical data 730d/Ld

(5520/5575)

(2665/2690)

(2985/3020)

(cu ft)
740d
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, tank 90 % full, no kg (lb) 1950 (4299)
optional extras
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2505 (5523)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1200 (2646)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1375 (3031)

(cu ft)
Towing a trailer
730i/Li
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Your Service Centre will have details of possible
increases.
Unbraked kg (lb) 750 (1650)
With brake on upward incline up to 12 % kg (lb) 2100 (4630)
Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 100 (220)
300
730i/Li
Overview
(3428/3405)

(5743/5765)
Controls
740i/Li
increases.
Driving hints

(3315/3325)
Navigation
(5740/5785)
750i/Li
increases.

(3315/3360)

(5895/5975)
Mobility
760i/Li
increases.

Reference
301
Technical data 760i/Li

(3505/5394)

(6162/6316)
750i xDrive/Li xDrive
increases.

(3461/3483)

(6085/6151)
730d/Ld
increases.

(3295/3315)

(5740/5795)
302
740d
Overview
increases.
Controls
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1530 (3373)
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 2605 (5743)
Driving hints
Filling capacities
Litres (imp. units) Note
Fuel tank Petrol engine: Approximately 82 Fuel grade, see
Navigation
(18.4 gal) page 266
Diesel engine: Approximately 80
(17.6 gal)
Windscreen and headlight washer Approx. 5 (8.8 pints)

system
Mobility
Reference
303
Short commands of the voice control
Short commands of the voice control system
system*
General Have possible voice commands read
aloud: ›Voice commands‹
Instructions for the voice control system, see
page 23.
Practical short commands

Function Command
Owner’s Handbook ›Owner's Handbook‹
Call up music collection. ›Music collection‹
Call up sound. ›Tone‹
Call up settings. ›Settings‹
Call up profiles. ›Profiles‹
Call up on-board computer. ›On board computer‹
Call up contacts. ›Contacts‹
Show phonebook. ›Phonebook‹
Call up BMW services. ›B M W Services‹
Call up home address. ›Home address‹
Call up destination input. ›Destination input‹
CD/multimedia*
CD/DVD player
Function Command
Play CD. ›C D on‹
Select CD. ›Select C D‹
Select CD and track. ›C D ... track ... ‹, for example CD 3

Track 5
Select track. ›C D track ... ‹, for example Track 5
304
Function Command
Overview
Call up CD and multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD ›C D‹
Select DVD. ›D V D ... ‹ for example DVD 3
Show entertainment details in split screen. ›Entertainment details‹
Controls
Music collection
Function Command
Call up current playback. ›Current playback‹
Driving hints
Call up music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Call up music search, menu. ›Music search‹
Play most played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
Navigation
External devices
Function Command
Call up external devices. ›External devices‹
Call up Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
AUX at front ›AUX front‹
TV
Function Command
Call up TV. ›T V‹
Sound
Function Command
Call up sound. ›Tone‹

Mobility
Reference
305
Radio
Short commands of the voice control system
FM
Function Command
Call up radio. ›Radio‹
Call up FM stations. ›F M‹
Call up manual search. ›Manual search‹
Call up frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹, for example

93.5 Megahertz or frequency 93.5
Select frequency. ›Select frequency‹
Call up list of stations. ›Select station‹
Call up station directly. ›Station ... ‹, for example station Radio

3
AM
Function Command
Call up AM stations. ›A M‹
Call up manual search. ›Manual search‹
Call up frequency. ›Frequency ... kilohertz‹, for example

frequency 753 or 753 Kilohertz
DAB
Function Command
Call up digital radio. ›D A B‹
Switch on digital radio. ›D A B on‹
Call up digital stations. ›Select station‹, for example station

Radio 3
306
Saved stations
Overview
Function Command
Call up saved stations. ›Saved stations‹
Choose saved station. ›Select saved station‹
Select saved station. ›Saved station ... ‹, for example saved

station 2
Controls
Telephone*
Driving hints
Function Command
Call up telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
View phonebook. ›Phonebook‹
Redialling ›Redial‹
Show missed calls. ›Received calls‹
Navigation
Dial phone number. ›Dial number‹
List of messages ›Messages‹
Call up Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Navigation*
General
Function Command
Navigation menu ›Navigation‹
Call up destination input. ›Destination input‹
Entering an address. ›Destination input‹
Call up route guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start route guidance. ›Start guidance‹

Mobility
End route guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Call up home address. ›Home address‹
Call up route criteria. ›Route criteria‹
Call up course of route. ›Route profile‹

Reference
307
Short commands of the voice control system Function Command
Switch on spoken instructions. ›Switch on spoken instructions‹
Repeat spoken instructions. ›Repeat spoken instructions‹
Switch off spoken instructions. ›Switch off spoken instructions‹
Show address book. ›Address book‹
Show last destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Call up traffic information. ›Traffic information‹
Points of interest ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Displaying map ›Map‹
Map pointing towards north ›Map north oriented‹
Map pointing in direction of travel ›Map indicating direction of travel‹
Map in perspective ›Map perspective‹
Automatic map scaling ›Map automatic scaling‹
Scale...metres ›Map scale ... metres‹, for example map

scale 100 metres
Scale...kilometres ›Map scale ... kilometres‹, for example

map scale 5 kilometres
Scale...miles ›Map scale ... miles‹, for example map

scale 5 miles
Scale...yards ›Map scale ... yards‹, for example map

scale 100 yards
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off split screen. ›Switch off splitscreen‹
Adapt split screen sizes. ›Split screen display‹
Split screen, map pointing towards north ›Splitscreen map north oriented‹
Split screen, current position ›Splitscreen current position‹
308
Function Command
Overview
Split screen, pointing in direction of travel ›Splitscreen map direction of travel
oriented‹
Split screen, perspective ›Splitscreen perspective‹
Split screen 3D exits ›Splitscreen 3 D exit roads‹
Split screen Scale...metres ›Splitscreen scale ... metres‹, for ex‐
Controls
ample split screen scale 100 yards
Split screen Scale...kilometres ›Splitscreen scale ... kilometres‹, for

example split screen scale 5 kilome‐
tres
Driving hints
Split screen Scale...miles ›Splitscreen scale ... miles‹, for exam‐
ple split screen scale 5 miles
Split screen Scale...yards ›Splitscreen scale ... yards‹, for exam‐

ple split screen scale 100 yards
Split screen, highlight traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic situation‹
Navigation
Split screen, on-board computer ›Splitscreen on board computer‹
Split screen, journey computer ›Splitscreen Journey computer‹
Automatically scale split screen. ›Splitscreen automatic scaling‹
Route guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
New destination input ›Destination input‹
Trip list ›Saved journeys‹
Office*
Function Command
Call up office menu. ›Office‹
Show office update. ›Office today‹

Mobility
Show contacts. ›Contacts‹
Show messages. ›Messages‹
Show calendar. ›Calendar‹

Reference
309
Short commands of the voice control system Function Command
Show tasks. ›Tasks‹
Show reminders. ›Reminders‹
Contacts*
Function Command
My contacts ›My contacts‹
Call up contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact ›New contact‹
BMW Services*
Function Command
Call up BMW services. ›B M W Services‹
Call up BMW Online. ›B M W Online‹
Call up Internet. ›Internet‹
Vehicle information
Owner’s Handbook
Function Command
Call up Owner's Handbook. ›Show Owner's Handbook‹
Call up quick reference. ›Quick reference‹
Call up keyword search. ›Owner's Handbook‹
Call up search by graphics. ›Search by pictures‹
On-board computer
Function Command
Call up on-board computer. ›On board computer‹
Call up on-board trip computer. ›Journey computer‹
310
Vehicle
Overview
Function Command
Call up vehicle information. ›Vehicle information‹
Call up vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Controls
Settings
Vehicle
Function Command
Driving hints
Calls up the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Call up settings. ›Settings‹
Calls up options. ›Options‹
Info display in the instrument cluster ›Info display‹
Navigation
Settings, control display ›Control display‹
Call up time and date. ›Clock and Date‹
Call up language and units. ›Language and units‹
Call up speed limit. ›Speed‹
Call up lights. ›Lights‹
Call up door lock. ›Door locks‹
Call up profiles. ›Profiles‹
Equipment*
Function Command
Call up climate control. ›Climate‹
Call up head-up display. ›Head up display‹
Enabling rear ›Enable rear controller‹

Mobility
Reference
311
From A to Z
From A to Z
Index
A Air pressure, tyres 267 Automatic air recirculation
Alarm, false 41 control, AUC 127
ABS, anti-lock braking sys‐ Alarm system 40 Automatic anti-glare control,
tem 97 ALL program, automatic air see High-beam assis‐
ACC, Active Cruise Control conditioning 128 tance 86
with Stop & Go function 104 All-season tyres, see Winter Automatic driving lights con‐
Accessories and parts 7 tyres 269 trol 85
Activated charcoal filter 129 Alternating-code hand-held Automatic Hold 64
Activating/deactivating Blue‐ transmitter 135 Automatic locking 36
tooth link 220 Alternative oil grades 273 Automatic tailgate 37
Activation, airbags 90 AM/FM stations 178 Automatic transmission with
Active Cruise Control with Anti-freeze protection, washer Steptronic 68
Stop & Go function, fluid 68 AUTO program, automatic air
ACC 104 Anti-lock braking system, conditioning 127
Active seat, front 47 ABS 97 AUTO program, intensity 127
Active seat ventilation, Anti-theft alarm system, see Auxiliary heating 132
front 47 Alarm system 40 AUX-IN port 194
Active seat ventilation, Anti-theft device, see Central Average fuel consumption 75
rear 50 locking system 33 Average speed 76
Active steering, integral 99 Anti-theft system, wheel Avoid route segments 167
Adaptive brake assist 97 studs 282 Axle load limit 298
Adaptive brake light, see Dy‐ Anti-trap mechanism, glass Axle loads, weight 298
namic brake lights 95 roof 44
Adaptive Headlights 85 Anti-trap mechanism, win‐ B
Adaptive Headlights, replac‐ dows 42
ing bulbs 279 Approved engine oils 273 Backrest contour, see Lumbar
Additives, oil 273 Aquaplaning 149 support 46
Adjusting the front passen‐ Armrest, see Centre arm‐ Backrest, seats 45
ger’s seat 47 rest 141 Backrest width 46
After washing the car 291 Around the centre console 15 Balance 176
Age of tyres 268 Around the headlining 16 Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
Airbags 89 Around the steering wheel 10 ing 288
Airbag switch, see Key switch Arrival time 76 Basic position, rear seats 49
for front passenger air‐ Ashtray 135 Bass 176
bags 90 Assist 239 Battery, vehicle 283
Air conditioner operation at the AUC, automatic air recircula‐ Before driving into a car
headlining 131 tion control 127 wash 290
Air conditioning 126 Audio playback, Blue‐ Being towed, see Tow-start‐
Air distribution, manual 126 tooth 197 ing/towing 286
Air flow, automatic air condi‐ AUTO intensity 127 Belts, seat belts 50
tioning 127 Automatic air condition‐ Block, power windows 42
Air outlets, see Ventila‐ ing 126 Blower, see air flow 127
tion 129 Bluetooth audio 197
312
BMW Assist 239 Camera, Top View 121 Climate comfort wind‐
BMW EfficientDynamics, see Car battery 283 screen 149
Overview
Saving fuel 154 Car care 291 Clock 73
BMW homepage 6 Care products 291 Closing/opening from in‐
BMW internet site 6 Care, vehicle 291 side 35
BMW Maintenance Sys‐ Car jack 282 Closing/opening via door
tem 275 Car key, see Remote con‐ lock 35
BMW Online 241 trol 30 Closing/opening with remote
BMW TeleServices 239 Carpet, care 292 control 33
Controls
Bonnet 271 Carrying children in safety 58 Coat hooks 143
Boot lid 36 Car washes 290 Cold start, see Engine
Boot lid, automatic 37 Catalytic converter, see Hot start 62
Boot lid, emergency re‐ exhaust system 148 Comfort Access 38
lease 38 Category details, points of in‐ Comfort closing 34
Driving hints
Boot lid, hotel function 38 terest 161 Comfort opening 34
Boot lid, manual operation 36 CBS, Condition Based Serv‐ Comfort operation 35
Boot lid via remote control 34 ice 275 COMFORT program, driving
Boot, storage space 143 CD/DVD 183 dynamics 102
Bottle holder, see Cu‐ CD/DVD player in the Computer, see On-board
pholder 142 rear 205, 210 computer 75
Brake assist 97 CD memory 189 Condensate under the vehi‐
Navigation
Brake assist, adaptive 97 Central key, see Remote con‐ cle 150
Brake lights, adaptive 95 trol 30 Condensation on win‐
Brake lights, dynamic 95 Central locking system 33 dows 127
Brake lights, replacing Central screen, see Control Condition Based Service,
bulbs 281 display 17 CBS 275
Braking, notes 149 Centre armrest 141 Confirmation signals 34
Braking safely 149 Centre console 15 Connecting, mobile
Breakdown recovery 240 Changes, technical, see Your phone 218
Breakdown service, Mobile own safety 6 Contacts 228, 236
Service 285 Changing a tyre 282 Control display 17
Brightness of the control dis‐ Changing a wheel 282 Control display, care 292
play 79 Changing the batteries, re‐ Control display, settings 77
Buttons on the steering mote control for rear enter‐ Controller 17
wheel 10 tainment 206 Control systems, driving sta‐
Button, start/stop 61 Changing the scale in naviga‐ bility 97
Bypassing a section of the tion system 169 Coolant 274
route 168 Check Control 81 Coolant temperature 73
Bypass route segments 167 Child locks 60 Cooler box 137
Bypass traffic obstruc‐ Children, carrying 58 Cooling effect, maximum 127
tion 171 Child restraint systems 58 Cooling function 128
Child seat classes, ISOFIX 59 Cooling system 274
Mobility
C Child seat mounting 58 Corrosion of brake discs 150

Child seat mountings, ISO‐ Country selection, naviga‐
Camera, rear-view cam‐ FIX 59 tion 158
era 118 Child’s seats 58 Course of route 167
Cameras, care 292 Chrome parts, care 291 Cruise Control 111
Camera, Side View 119 City input, navigation 158 Cupholder 142
Reference
313
From A to Z Current fuel consumption 73 Driving Dynamic Control 100 Emergency release, boot
Driving hints 148 lid 38
D Driving lane lines, rear-view Emergency release, fuel filler
camera 116 flap 264
DAB, digital radio 179 Driving lights control, auto‐ Emergency release, parking
Damage, tyres 267 matic 85 brake 63
Damper Control, Dynamic 99 Driving notes, general 148 Emergency release, transmis‐
Data, technical 296 Driving notes, running in 148 sion lockout 70
Date 73 Driving stability control sys‐ Emergency running proper‐
Daytime driving lights 85 tems 97 ties, tyres 269
Deactivation, airbags 90 Drying air, see Cooling func‐ Emergency service, see Mo‐
Defrosting, see defrosting tion 128 bile Service 285
windows 127 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Emergency start function, en‐
Defrosting windows 127 trol 97 gine start 31
Defrost, see defrosting win‐ DTC, Dynamic Traction Con‐ Emergency unlocking, door
dows 127 trol 97 lock 35
Destination input, naviga‐ DVD/CD 183 Energy Control 73
tion 158 DVD/CD player in the Energy recuperation 74
Diesel fuel 266 rear 205, 210 Engine compartment 271
Diesel particle filter 148 DVD changer 187 Engine coolant 274
Digital clock 73 DVD settings 186 Engine oil 273
Digital radio, DAB 179 DVD, video 185 Engine oil additives 273
Dimensions 296 Dynamic brake lights 95 Engine oil filler neck 273
Dimming mirrors 56 Dynamic Damper Control 99 Engine oil grades, alterna‐
Dipping headlights, see High- Dynamic Drive 99 tive 273
beam assistance 86 Dynamic route guidance 167 Engine oil grades, ap‐
Displaying the route 167 Dynamic Stability Control, proved 273
Display in windscreen 123 DSC 97 Engine oil temperature 73
Display lighting, see Instru‐ Dynamic Traction Control, Engine start 61
ment lighting 87 DTC DTC 97 Engine starting, assis‐
Display of faults, see Check tance 285
Control 81 E Engine start with malfunc‐
Displays 12 tion 31
Displays, care 292 Easy entry/exit, steering Engine temperature 73
Disposal, coolant 274 wheel 57 Entering letters and digits 22
Disposal, vehicle battery 283 EfficientDynamics, see Saving Equaliser 176
Distance to destination 76 fuel 154 Equipment, interior 134
Distance warning, see Electrical glass roof 43 ESP, Electronic Stability Pro‐
PDC 113 Electrical power windows 41 gram, see DSC 97
Door key, see Remote con‐ Electronic displays, instru‐ Exhaust system 148
trol 30 ment cluster 14 Extended BMW Online serv‐
Door lock 35 Electronic oil level check 273 ices 246
Doors, Soft Close Auto‐ Electronic Stability Program, Exterior mirrors 55
matic 36 ESP, see DSC 97 External devices 194
Downhill gradients 149 Emergency call 284 External starting 285
Drinks holder, see Cu‐ Emergency detection, remote Eye for towing, see Towing
pholder 142 control 31 eye 286
Drive-off assistent 103 Eyes for securing load 151
314
F G Heavy transported load, load‐
ing 150
Overview
Fader 176 Garage door opener, see Height, seats 45
Failure message, see Check Integrated universal remote Height with roof aerial, vehi‐
Control 81 control 134 cle 296
False alarm 41 Gear change, automatic trans‐ Help in driving off 103
Fastening seat belts, see Seat mission 69 Help in the event of a break‐
belts 50 Gearshift, automatic transmis‐ down 284
Favourites buttons, iDrive 21 sion 68 High-beam assistance 86
Controls
Filler neck for engine oil 273 General driving notes 148 High-beam headlights 66
Fine wood, care 291 Gentleman function 47 Hill Descent Control HDC 98
First-aid kit 285 Glass roof, electric 43 Hill Start Assist, see Drive-off
Flat tyre, changing a Glove box 140 assistent 103
wheel 282 GPS navigation, see Naviga‐ Homepage 6
Driving hints
Flat tyre, warning lamp 92 tion system 158 Horn 10
Flooding 149 Green diesel 266 Hotel function, boot lid 38
Floor carpet, care 292 Guided tours 166 Hot exhaust system 148
FM/AM stations 178 Hotline 244
Fog lights, replacing H House number, input for navi‐
bulbs 280 gation 159
Fold-out position, windscreen Handbrake, see Parking HUD, Head-Up Display 123
Navigation
wipers 67 brake 62
Foot brake 149 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ I
Foot mats, care 292 nating-code 135
Forward alert, iBrake 110 Handset 247 iBrake, forward alert 110
Four-wheel drive 98 Hazard warning lights 284 Ice warning, see Outside tem‐
Front airbags 89 HDC Hill Descent Control 98 perature warning 72
Front fog lights 87 Head airbags 89 Icy roads, see Outside temper‐
Front head restraints 51 Head Light 85 ature warning 72
Front lights 279 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Identification number, see In
Front neck supports, see Head ture 84 the engine compart‐
restraints 51 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ment 271
Front passenger airbags, de‐ ture via remote control 34 iDrive 17
activating/activating 90 Headlight flasher 66 Ignition key, see Remote con‐
Front passenger airbags, Headlight lens 279 trol 30
light 91 Headlights 279 Ignition off 61
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Headlights, care 290 Ignition on 61
age fuel consumption 75 Headlight washer system 66 Important considerations 58
Fuel filler flap 264 Headlining 16 Important information regard‐
Fuel gauge 74 Headphones for rear enter‐ ing the engine compart‐
Fuel grade 266 tainment 208, 213 ment 271
Fuel tank cap 264 Head restraints 45 Importing a trip, online 166
Mobility
Fuel, tank capacity 303 Head-Up Display 123 Importing a trip, USB 165
Fuse 283 Head-Up Display, care and incline, seats 45
maintenance 292 Independent ventilation 132
Heated rear window 128 Indication of a flat tyre 92
Heating, see Auxiliary heat‐ Indicator and warning mes‐
ing 131 sages 12
Reference
315
From A to Z Indicator lights 12 Interval display, service re‐ Left-hand traffic, light set‐
Indicators, see Turn indica‐ quirement 80 ting 150
tors 65 iPod/iPhone 195 Length, vehicle 297
Individual air distribution 126 ISOFIX child seat mount‐ Licence plate light, replacing
Individual settings, see Per‐ ings 59 bulbs 281
sonal Profile 31 Light alloy wheels, care 291
Individual vehicle 6 J Light-emitting diodes,
Inflation pressure, tyres 267 LEDs 279
Inflation pressure warning, Jack mounting points 282 Lighter 135
tyres 91 Journey computer 77 Lighter, front 136
Info Display, see On-board Joystick, automatic transmis‐ Lighter, rear 136
computer 75 sion 69 Lighting 84
Information on navigation Jump-starting connec‐ Lighting via remote con‐
data 171 tion 286 trol 34
Information service 239 Jump-starting, see starting Lights 84
Initialisation, Integral Active assistance 285 Light switch 84
Steering 100 Junction, entering for naviga‐ Loads 150
Initialising, runflat indicator, tion 159 Lock, door 35
RPA 91 Locking/unlocking from in‐
Instrument cluster 12, 72 K side 35
Instrument cluster, electronic Locking/unlocking via door
displays 14 Key/remote control 30 lock 35
Instrument cluster switch, see Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Locking/unlocking with re‐
Turn indicators 65 cess 38 mote control 33
Instrument cluster switch, see Key memory, see Personal Locking, automatic 36
Wiper system 66 Profile 31 Locking, central 33
Instrument lighting 87 Key switch for front passenger Locking, doors and win‐
Instruments, instrument clus‐ airbags 90 dows 60
ter 72 Kick-down, automatic trans‐ Locking via the boot lid 37
Integral Active Steering 99 mission 68 Lock, wheel studs 282
Integrated key 30 Low-beam headlights 84
Integrated universal remote L Luggage compartment lid 36
control 134 Luggage rack, see Roof
Intensity, AUTO program 127 Lane boundary, warning 93 rack 151
Interactive map 163 Lane change warning 94 Lumbar support 46
Interior and exterior mirrors, Lane departure warning 93
automatic dim 56 Language, on the control dis‐ M
Interior equipment 134 play 78
Interior light 87 Lashing eyes, securing Maintenance 275
Interior lights via remote con‐ load 151 Maintenance require‐
trol 34 Lashing straps, securing ment 275
Interior mirror 56 load 151 Maintenance, service require‐
Interior movement detec‐ Laying up out of use 292 ment 80
tor 41 Laying up, vehicle 292 Maintenance System
Intermediate destina‐ Leather, care 291 BMW 275
tions 164 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Malfunction displays, see
Internet 242 odes 279 Check Control 81
Internet site 6
316
Malfunction, self-levelling Mirrors 55 Oil 273
suspension 100 Mobile communication equip‐ Oil additives 273
Overview
Manual air distribution 126 ment 149 Oil change interval, service re‐
Manual air flow 127 Mobile phone 218 quirement 80
Manual operation, boot lid 36 Mobile Service 285 Oil filler neck 273
Manual operation, door Moisture in the headlight 279 Oil grades, alternative 273
lock 35 Monitor, see Control dis‐ Oil grades, approved 273
Manual operation, exterior mir‐ play 17 Oil level check 273
rors 55 Mounting child restraint sys‐ Old battery, disposing 283
Controls
Manual operation, fuel filler tems 58 On-board computer 75
flap 264 MP3 player 194 On-board diagnosis,
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ Multifunction steering wheel, OBD 277
tance Control, PDC 114 buttons 10 On-board monitor, see Control
Manual operation, parking Multimedia 183 display 17
Driving hints
brake 63 Music collection 189 On-board tool kit 278
Manual operation, rear-view Music memory 189 Online, see BMW Online 241
camera 116 Music search 191 Opening/closing from in‐
Manual operation, Side side 35
View 118 N Opening/closing via door
Manual operation, Top lock 35
View 120 Navigation 158 Opening/closing with remote
Navigation
Manual operation, transmis‐ Navigation announcement, control 33
sion 69 see Voice instructions 168 Operating menus, iDrive 17
Manual operation, transmis‐ Navigation data 171 Operating principle, iDrive 17
sion lockout 70 New wheels and tyres 268 Outside air, see AUC 127
Map, destination input 163 Night Vision with person rec‐ Outside temperature dis‐
Map in the split screen 169 ognition 121 play 72
Map view 168 NORMAL program, driving dy‐ Outside temperature warn‐
Marking, run-flat tyres 269 namics 102 ing 72
Markings on approved Nose weight 300 Overheating of the engine, see
tyres 268 Notes 6 Coolant temperature 73
Massage seat, front 47 Notes regarding CD/DVD 188
Massage seat, rear 49 Nylon ropes for tow-starting/ P
Maximum cooling effect 127 towing 288
Maximum speed, display 82 Paintwork, vehicle 291
Memory, seat, mirrors, steer‐ O Park Distance Control,
ing wheel 54 PDC 113
Menu in the instrument clus‐ OBD on-board diagnosis 277 Parked vehicle, conden‐
ter 74 Object recognition, see Night sate 150
Menus, see iDrive operating Vision 121 Parking aid, see PDC 113
principle 18 Obstacle marking, rear-view Parking brake 62
Message list, traffic informa‐ camera 117 Parking lights 85
Mobility
tion 170 Octane number, see Petrol Parking position 55

Messages 231 grade 266 Park with Automatic Hold 64
Microfilter 129 Oddments table in rear pas‐ Particle filter 148
Minimum tread depth, senger compartment 137 Part replacement 278
tyres 267 Odometer 72 Parts and accessories 7
Mirror, memory 54 Office 228
Reference
317
From A to Z Passenger’s mirror, tilting Readiness service, see Mobile Replacement of parts 278
down 55 Service 285 Replacement of wheels/
PDC Park Distance Con‐ Rear and brake lights 281 tyres 268
trol 113 Rear automatic heater/air con‐ Replacing bulbs 278
Permitted gross weight while ditioner 130 Replacing bulbs, front 279
towing a trailer 300 Rear cooler box 137 Replacing bulbs, rear 281
Personal information 228 Rear entertainment 205, 210 Replacing parts 278
Personal Profile 31 Rear fog light, replacing Replacing the battery, remote
Person recognition, see Night bulbs 281 control of auxiliary heating/in‐
Vision 121 Rear fog lights 87 dependent ventilation 133
Petrol 266 Rear head restraints 52 Replacing the battery, vehicle
Petrol grade 266 Rear lights 281 battery 283
Place for children 58 Rear lights, replacing Replacing the battery, vehicle
Plasters, see First-aid kit 285 bulbs 281 remote control 30
Plastic, care 292 Rear neck supports, see Head Replacing wiper blades 278
Playing audio tracks 183 restraints 52 Reserve warning, see
Points of interest, naviga‐ Rear seats 48 Range 74
tion 161 Rear seats, setting 48 Residual heat, automatic air
Postcode input, naviga‐ Rear sockets 137 conditioning 128
tion 158 Rear storage compart‐ Restraint systems for chil‐
Power failure 283 ment 142 dren 58
Power socket 136 Rear telephone 247 Retreaded tyres 268
Power windows 41 Rear-view camera 115 Reuse 277
Prescribed oil grades 273 Rear-wheel steering 99 Reversing lights, replacing
Pressure, tyres 267 Recirculated-air mode 127 bulbs 281
Pressure warning, tyres 91 Recirculation, see recircula‐ Revolution counter 73
Profiles, Personal Profile 31 ted-air mode 127 Right-hand traffic, light set‐
Protection function, glass Recommended tours 166 ting 150
roof 44 Recommended tyre RME, rape seed methyl es‐
Protection function, win‐ makes 268 ter 266
dows 42 Recycling 277 Roller sunblinds 42
Puncture, runflat indicator, Refuelling 264 Roll stabilisation, see Dynamic
RPA 91 Refuelling recommenda‐ Drive 99
Puncture, tyres 282 tion 168 RON petrol grade 266
Regional programmes 179 Roof load 298
R Release tool 278 Roof rack 151
Remaining distance 74 Rope for tow-starting/tow‐
Radio 178 Remote control/key 30 ing 288
Radio-control key, see Re‐ Remote control for independ‐ Route criteria, route 166
mote control 30 ent ventilation/auxiliary heat‐ Route guidance 166
Radio ready state 61 ing 133 Route guidance with inter‐
Rain sensor 67 Remote control for rear enter‐ mediate destinations 164
Random 184 tainment 206 RPA, runflat indicator 91
Random playback 184 Remote control, malfunc‐ RSC, Run-flat System Com‐
Range 74 tion 35 ponent, see Run-flat
Rape seed methyl ester, Remote control, univer‐ tyres 269
RME 266 sal 134 Rubber parts, care 291
RDS 179 Replacement fuse 283 Runflat indicator, RPA 91
318
Run-flat tyres 269 Service requirement, CBS SPORT program, driving dy‐
Run-flat tyres, flat tyre 92 Condition Based Serv‐ namics 101
Overview
Running in 148 ice 275 Sport program, transmis‐
Running in brake discs 148 Service requirement, dis‐ sion 69
Running in brake pads 148 play 80 Stability control systems 97
Setting front seats 45 Start/stop button 61
S Settings on the control dis‐ Start function with malfunc‐
play 77 tion 31
Safe seated position 45 Settings, seats/head re‐ Starting assistance 285
Controls
Safety switch, windows 42 straints 45 Starting assistance, see
Safety systems, airbags 89 Short commands 304 DSC 97
Saved stations 181 Shoulder support 46 Starting, see Engine start 61
Saving current position 160 Side airbags 89 Starting the engine 61
Saving DVDs 189 Side lights 84 Status information, iDrive 20
Driving hints
Saving fuel 154 Side lights, replacing Status of the Owner’s
Saving position 160 bulbs 280 Handbook 6
Saving settings for seat, mir‐ Side View 118 Steering, Integral Active
rors, steering wheel 54 Signals on unlocking 34 Steering 99
Saving stations 178 Ski bag 138 Steering wheel, adjusting 56
Screen, see Control Sliding/tilting roof 43 Steering wheel heating 57
display 17 Smallest turning circle 297 Steering wheel, memory 54
Navigation
Screwdriver 278 Smokers’ package 135 Steptronic, automatic trans‐
Screw thread for towing Snap-in adapter, mobile mission 68
eye 287 phone 227 Stopping the engine 62
Seat belt reminder 51 Snow chains 269 Storage compartment be‐
Seat belts 50 Socket, on-board diagnosis tween the seats 142
Seat belts, care 292 OBD 277 Storage compartment in the
Seat heating, front 47 Soft Close Automatic, boot centre console 142
Seat heating, rear 50 lid 37 Storage compartments 140
Seat, mirror and steering Soft Close Automatic, Storage options 140
wheel memory 54 doors 36 Storage, tyres 269
Seats 45 Soot particle filter 148 Storage, vehicle 292
Seat ventilation, front 47 Sound 176 Street, entering for naviga‐
Seat ventilation, rear 50 Spare fuse 283 tion 159
Selecting the distance with Speed limit, automatic 82 Summer tyres, tread 267
ACC 105 Speed limit, display 82 Sunblinds, sun guard 42
Selection list in the instrument Speed Limit Information 82 Surround view 115
cluster 74 Speed limit information, on- Suspension adjustments 100
Selector lever, automatic board computer 76 Swinging of the trailer, see
transmission 69 Speed limit setting 76 Trailer Stability Control 153
Self-levelling suspension, air Speedometer 12 Switches, see Driving area 10
suspension 100 Split screen 21 Switch for driving dynam‐
Mobility
Self-levelling suspension, Split screen map set‐ ics 100

malfunction 100 tings 169 Switching off the engine 62
Sensors, care 292 Split screen view, split Switch-on times, auxiliary
Service, Mobile 285 screen 21 heating 132
Service partners 245 SPORT+ program, driving dy‐ Switch-on times, independent
namics 101 ventilation 132
Reference
319
From A to Z Symbols 6 TP, traffic announce‐ Unlock button, automatic
Symbols used 6 ments 181 transmission 69
Traction control 97 Unlocking/locking from in‐
T TRACTION program, driving side 35
dynamics 101 Unlocking/locking via door
Tailgate 36 Traffic information, naviga‐ lock 35
Tailgate, automatic 37 tion 170 Unlocking/locking with remote
Tailgate via remote control 34 Traffic reports 181 control 33
Tail lights 281 Traffic situation/grey Upholstery care 291
Tank display 74 map 170 USB audio interface 195
Technical changes, see Your Trailer loads 300 USB interface 140
own safety 6 Trailer Stability Control 153
Technical data 296 Trailer tow hitch 153 V
Telephone 218 Trailer towing, data 300
TeleServices 239 Transmission, automatic 68 Vanity mirror 56
Television, TV 201 Transmission lockout, releas‐ Variable Damper Control, see
Temperature, automatic air ing 70 Dynamic Damper Control 99
conditioning 127 Tread, tyres 267 Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
Temperature display, outside Treble, sound 176 tive Steering 99
temperature 72 Trip distance recorder 72 Vehicle battery 283
Temperature, engine oil 73 Triple turn signal 66 Vehicle battery, chang‐
Tensioning bands, securing Turn indicators, front, replac‐ ing 283
load 151 ing bulbs 279 Vehicle for tow-starting/tow‐
Terminal 0 61 Turn indicators, operation 65 ing 288
Terminal 15 61 Turn indicators, rear, replacing Vehicle identification number,
Terminal R 61 bulbs 281 see Identification number in
Text messages 231 Turning circle 297 the engine compart‐
Thermal camera, see Night Vi‐ Turning circle lines, rear-view ment 271
sion 121 camera 116 Vehicle paintwork 291
Thiefproof wheel studs 282 TV 201 Vehicle, running in 148
Thigh support 45 Tyre damage 267 Ventilation 129
Tilt alarm sensor 40 Tyre pressure monitoring, see Version of navigation
Tilting down, passenger’s mir‐ RPA 91 data 171
ror 55 Tyre pressures 267 Video replay 185
Toll routes, route 167 Tyre replacement 268 Voice control, mobile
Tools 278 Tyres, everything about phone 225
Topping up engine oil 273 wheels and tyres 267 Voice control, short com‐
Top speed, winter tyres 269 Tyres, puncture 282 mands 304
Top View 119 Tyres with emergency running Voice control system 23
Total weight 298 properties, tyre replace‐ Voice instructions, naviga‐
Total weight, permitted 298 ment 269 tion 168
Tourist function, see Left- Tyre tread 267 Volume, adjusting 176
hand/right-hand traffic 150
Towing 286 U W
Towing a trailer 152
Towing eye 286 Units of measure 79 Wading 149
Towing truck 288 Universal remote control 134 Warning lights 12
Tow-starting 286 Unloaded weight 298
320
Warning messages, see
Check Control 81
Overview
Warning triangle 285
Washer fluid 68
Washer fluid tank, ca‐
pacity 303
Washer jets, windows 67
Washing the car 290
Water on roads 149
Controls
Weights 298
Welcome lights 84
Wheelbase, vehicle 297
Wheel replacement 268
Wheels, everything about
Driving hints
wheels and tyres 267
Wheels, runflat indicator,
RPA 91
Width with mirrors, vehi‐
cle 296
Windscreen washer jets 67
Windscreen washing sys‐
Navigation
tem 66
Windscreen wipers 66
Windscreen wipers, fold-out
position 67
Winter-grade diesel 266
Winter storage, care and main‐
tenance 292
Winter tyres, right tyres 269
Winter tyres, tread 267
Wiper system 66
Wood, care 291
Wordmatch principle, naviga‐
tion 22
Working in the engine com‐
partment 271
Wrench 278
X
xDrive 98
Xenon light, replacing
Mobility
bulbs 279
Y
Your own safety 6
Reference
321
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving

www.bmw.com Machine
01 41 2 604 372 en
*BL260437200K*

Online Edition For Part No. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Online Edition For Part No. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Handbook

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 372 - 03 10 500

About this Owner’s Your individual vehicle

Symbol for components and Your own safety

Maintenance and repair

If such work is performed inexpertly, it could re‐

Parts and accessories

all operating conditions for BMW vehicles, and

Around the steering wheel

1 Seat comfort functions* Lane departure warning* 93

16 Steering wheel adjustment 57

17 Opening boot lid* 37

1 Fuel gauge 74 6 Outside temperature 72

Indicator and warning lights Overview: indicator and warning lights

Instrument cluster Symbol Function or system

Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a Front fog lights*

High-beam assistance* Steering system

Side lights, low-beam headlights Engine functions

Dynamic Stability Control, DSC Supplementary text messages

1 Symbols and messages, for example warn‐ 4 Navigation display* 158

Central locking system 35 Hill Descent Control HDC* 98

6 Radio 178 11 Driving Dynamic Control 100

1 Emergency call* 284 4 Reading lights* 88

2 Glass roof, electric* 43 5 Interior light 87

3 Front passenger airbag indicator

iDrive integrates the functions of a large number 1. Press the button.

▷ To avoid risk of damage to the control dis‐

Selecting a menu item

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Buttons on the controller

Press the button Function

MENU Calls up the main menu.

RADIO Calls up the Radio menu.

CD Calls up the CD/multimedia 2. Press the controller.

BACK Displays the previous Switching between screens

The main menu is displayed.

Adjusting the settings

View of an opened menu

Example: setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is

▷ Screen settings, for example "Split

Traffic Information* switched on.

Symbols for telephone

Reception level of mobile telephone

No mobile communications network

Bluetooth* switched on.

SIM card* disabled.

Status field PIN* required.

▷ Reception level of mobile telephone net‐ Music collection*

AUX-IN port in the rear left*

USB audio interface*

Audio interface for mobile phone*

Spoken instructions* switched off.

1. Press the button.

Selecting display The function is carried out immediately.

Jog the controller to the top:

Clearing assignment of buttons Entry comparison

Press the controller: deletes a letter

Press and hold down the controller:

Switching between letters and digits